AWY 20 Technical ED03

9400AWY REL.2.
0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HANDBOOK STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 13 14 15 16 17
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . .

11 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Equipment architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.1 Splitmount architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.2 IDU (Indoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.3 ODU (Outdoor Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1.4 IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2 System configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 1+0 Unprotected configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.2 1+1 Protected configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.1 Reference system standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.2 RF channelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.3 Transmitted power at antenna port (ETSI and ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.4 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.5 ETSI System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.6 ANSI System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1.7 Protection switching system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 Tributary interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 Maximum capacity and Modulation type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 03 02 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
19
21 21 21 24 33 36 37 37 39 47 48 49 50 51 53 54 58 62 63 63 63
060202 051027 050503 DATE
0000029166 0000023750
P.CREMONESI ITAVE V.FOSSATI P.CREMONESI ITAVE V.FOSSATI P.CREMONESI ITAVE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE ORIGINATOR
ED
CHANGE NOTE
9400AWY Rel.2.0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 1 / 332
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 STATION LAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Constraints for 9400AWYIDU multiple equipping in a rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 Hardware installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.4 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5.2 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.5.3 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 IDU PART LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 IDU PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2 1+0 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.4 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . 23.5 1+1 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.6 1+1 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.7 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.8 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . 24 IDU OPERATIVE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2 IDU Main Unit front and rear views and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3 IDU Extension Unit front and rear views and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4 Description of User interfaces and connectors pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.1 Power Supply connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.2 Connector for IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.3 E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.4 E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.5 E3/DS3 tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.6 Ethernet tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.7 User service channels (pinout and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.8 Alarms Housekeeping (pinout and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.9 NMS V.11 Audio 1 (pinout and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.10 NMS G.703 Audio 2 (pinout and description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.11 ECT RS232 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.12 OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4.13 IDU Main Unit LEDs summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
69 70 70 70 71 73 73 74 77 81 87 88 89 90 91 92 94 96 98 101 102 103 105 107 107 107 108 109 110 110 111 114 117 118 119 120 121
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 2 / 332
12.5 IDUODU cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 Manmachine interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10.1 Operating environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility/safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10.3 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 Dismantling & Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11.1 WEEE general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11.2 Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63 64 64 64 64 65 65 65 65 66 66 66
24.4.14 IDU Extension Unit LEDs summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5 Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.2 Flash Card identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5.3 Flash Card upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6 Installation of tributary plugins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.6.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.7 IDU Main unit dipswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 ODU AND ANTENNA CONFIGURATIONS, PART LISTS AND PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . 26.1 ODU mechanical design and identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2 ODU configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3 ODU part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.1 78 GHz ODU part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.2 1338 GHz ODU part lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4 Antenna configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4.1 1+0 configuration with integrated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4.2 1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . 26.4.3 1+1 HSB configuration with hybrid coupler and not integrated antenna (78 GHz) . 26.4.4 Configuration with separated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.5 Integrated antenna part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.6 Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ODU AND RELATED OPTIONAL TOOLS OPERATIVE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1 ODU operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.1 General, views and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.2 ODU hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.3 ODU identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 78 GHz ODU additional operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2.1 78 GHz ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2.2 78 GHz ODUs TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2.3 Label affixed inside the 78 GHz ODU BRANCHING box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 Light service kit cable operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 COMMERCIAL CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123 124 124 124 124 125 125 128 133 135 137 138 139 140 141 144 149 150 152 153 154 156 158 159 159 159 161 161 162 162 163 164 165 167
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

31 MAINTENANCE POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1 Setting information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone handset connected to the IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . 33 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.2 Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 175 176 176 177 177 178 179 179 179 179 180
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 3 / 332
34 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2 System state display by visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1 LED test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.2 Alarm LEDs on the IDU MAIN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.3 Alarm LEDs on the Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3 Craft Terminal interface commonly used commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.1 Craft Terminal (CT) connection and startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.2 Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.3 Exploring the Alarms of the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.4 Network Element login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.6 NE Logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3 Routine (preventive) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3.1 Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4 Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5 Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.1 General flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.3 Troubleshooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.4 Troubleshooting via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.5 IDU unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.6 ODU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
185 185 185 185 185 185 187 187 188 189 190 191 195 197 197 198 198 198 198 199 199 200 201 201 202 203 204 206 212 213 213 213
SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

41 RADIO TRANSMISSION FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.1 Frequency Agility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.2 Frequency shifter management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.3 Transmitted power control: ATPC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.4 Transmitted power control: RTPC function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.5 Internal service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.6 User service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.1 Functional description and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.1.1 Functions and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 218 218 219 222 222 223 225 226 226
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 4 / 332
33.3 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.1 Types of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.2 P/Ns to be used for Spare Parts provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.3 ODU Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.4 IDU Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.5 Number of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.6 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
182 182 182 182 182 183 183
42.1.2 IDU and ODU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2 Control subsystem hardware architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2.1 Function partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2.2 Control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.3 IDU functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.3.2 IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.3.3 IDU Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.3.4 IDU Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4 Protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.2 Tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.3 TMNRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.4 TMN line: V11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.5 TMN line: G.703 and inframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.6 User Service channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.7 EOW party line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.8 Alarms Housekeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.9 EPS logic management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.10 RF TX Squelch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.11 RPSRX logic management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.4.12 Hitless Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.5 ODU functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.6 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.6.1 IDU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.6.2 ODU loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 IDU DATA INTERFACE PLUGIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.1 Data plugin block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.2 Ethernet overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.4 Integration with the PDH mux/demux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.5 Bandwidth compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43.6 Ethernet Data management supported by ULS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND INTERWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1 Local monitoring: ECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.1.1 Security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.2 Small/medium sized networks: RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.3 Large mixed network: TMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.4 1353NM operation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.5 Use of NMS channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.5.1 NMSV11 and NMSG703 channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.5.2 NMSRF channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.1 Alarms Provided by Item HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.1.1 IDU Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.1.2 ODU Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.2 Alarm severity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.2.1 Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.2.2 Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226 231 231 231 233 233 234 240 241 242 242 243 244 245 245 247 248 248 250 252 254 257 259 261 261 262 265 265 266 267 268 270 271 273 274 274 275 275 276 277 277 279 281 281 282 285 286 287 288
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 5 / 332
SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

APPENDIX A : INTRODUCTION TO THE 9400AWY REL.2.0 RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . A.1 : General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 : Products of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 : 9400AWY Rel.2.0 system usage in MW links and networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.1 : Radio Hop length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3.2 : Most common applications of 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX B : SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . B.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2 : Compliance with International Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3 : Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1 : General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.4 : Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.5 : Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.6 : Equipment connection to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.7 : Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.8 : Microwave radiations (EMF norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.1 : EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.2 : EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4.3 : EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7 : Labels affixed to the 9400AWY equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.1 : Labels affixed on the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7.2 : Labels affixed on the ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 : Handbook guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.1 : Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.3 : Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2 : Documentation set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.1 : 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.2 : Additional documentation for 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.1 : CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . APPENDIX D : LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 291 292 292 292 296 301 301 301 302 302 303 304 305 305 306 306 307 308 309 309 309 309 310 310 311 311 312 313 313 313 314 314 318 318 319 320 320 321 323
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 6 / 332
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

FIGURES Fig. 1. 9400AWY R.2.0 splitmount system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 2. Possible configurations of ODU (1+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 3. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 4. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 5. ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 6. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 7. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plugin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 8. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with additional tributary plugin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9. IDU (1+1) system (base or with Ethernet plugin) composition and intershelf cabling . . . . Fig. 10. E1 / DS1 and User Service Channel splitcable structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 11. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plugin and with Ethernet plugin) Fig. 12. Additional items and intershelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with 916 E1 / DS1 plugin Fig. 13. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with 916 E1 / DS1 plugin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 14. Additional items and intershelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plugin . . . . . Fig. 15. E3 / DS3 coaxialsplitcable structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 16. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with E3 / DS3 plugin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 17. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB SD) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 18. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB one antenna) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 19. 9400AWY (1+1 FD Double Antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 20. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 21. Station layout of 9400AWY (1+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 22. IDU and ODU configurations in 9400AWY 1+1 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 23. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & 8E1/DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 24. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & 16E1/DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 25. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & E3/DS3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 26. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 27. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSBSD or FDDA AP with two antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 28. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB with one antenna (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 29. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB with not integrated antenna (78 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 30. Station layout of ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 31. 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 32. 1+0 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 33. 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 34. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 35. 1+1 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 36. 1+1 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 37. 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 39. IDU Main Unit front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 40. IDU Extension Unit front and rear views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 41. User service channel: V11 codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 42. User service channel: V11 contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 43. User service channel: G.703 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 44. User service channel: V24/V28 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 45. Equipment outputs (summarizing and housekeeping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 46. Equipment inputs relay scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 47. Equipment inputs open collector scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 48. LEDs on the IDU Main Unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 49. LEDs on the IDU Extension Unit front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 50. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
22 23 25 25 34 38 38 38 39 40 40 41 42 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 71 73 75 75 76 76 77 78 79 80 88 89 90 91 92 94 96 98 103 105 112 112 113 113 115 116 116 121 123 124
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 7 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 51. Tributary plugin views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 52. Dismounting the fixing brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 53. Cover unfix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 54. Release and sliding out the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 55. Removing the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 56. Dismounting the metal plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 57. 916 E1/DS1 Tributary plugin preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 58. Tributary plugin insertion and fix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 59. Dipswitchbanks on IDU MAIN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 60. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.0/2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 61. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 62. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.6/5.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 63. Front view of 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM non EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 64. Front view of 3U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 65. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 66. ODU types, identification, dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 67. View of ODU with integrated antenna (V polarization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 68. View of ODU with integrated antenna (H polarization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 69. Coupler (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 70. Coupler and related items (78 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 71. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 72. ODU LEMO connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 73. ODU views (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 74. ODU views (78 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 75. 78 GHz ODU composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 76. 78 GHz ODUs TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 77. Label affixed inside the 78 GHz ODU BRANCHING box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 78. Light service kit cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 79. Special extractor to remove the coaxial cables 1.0/2.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 80. Lever for ODU mounting/dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 81. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU Extension unit for maintenance purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 82. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU MAIN unit for maintenance purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 83. Network Element Synthesis screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 84. Selection of a NE and start of its supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 85. NE in supervised state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 86. Show alarms of a supervised NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 87. Login of a supervised NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 88. Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 89. Loggedin NE JUSM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 90. Checks on Radio domain Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 91. Checks on Radio domain Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 92. Checks on Radio domain Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 93. Checks on Radio domain RTPC & ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 94. Checks on Radio domain Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 95. NE Stop Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 96. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 97. Troubleshooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 98. Details for IDU MAIN unit or FLASH CARD replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 99. Details for IDU EXTENSION unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 100. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 101. ATPC functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 102. ATPC in HSB configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 103. EOW analog party line block diagram in 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 104. Control subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127 128 129 129 130 130 131 131 134 135 135 136 136 136 136 138 150 151 152 153 154 160 160 161 162 163 164 165 180 181 185 186 187 188 188 189 190 190 191 192 192 193 193 194 195 201 203 207 210 214 221 222 224 232
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 8 / 332
Fig. 105. Components of the IDU Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 106. Mux/Demux block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 107. Microprocessor platform supported interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 108. Flash Card content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 109. Components of the IDU Extension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 110. Power distribution in 1+1 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 111. EPS and RPS system overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 112. TMNRF: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units at TX side . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 113. TMNRF: signals exchanged between Main Extension Units in RX direction . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 114. TMNG.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in TX direction . . . Fig. 115. TMNG.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in RX direction . . . Fig. 116. User Service Channel (TXRX direction) in G703 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 117. EOWparty line architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 118. EPS alarms and commands overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 119. Hot Stand By configuration: TPS alarms and commands overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 120. RPS alarms and commands overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 121. ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 122. Near end IDU cable loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 123. Far end IDU tributary loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 124. Near end tributary loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 125. Near end ODU cable loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 126. Near end RF loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 127. RF loopback scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 128. Data plugin block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 129. Ethernet MAC frame fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 130. Ethernet data 8E1 example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 131. Bandwidth compression examples for the 100BASET case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 132. Bandwidth compression examples in the 10BASET case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 133. TMN with SNMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 134. Possible NMS connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 135. Station connected by the NMSRF channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 136. Hop length VS availability due to rain (4QAM 8xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 137. Hop length VS availability due to rain (16QAM 8xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 138. Hop length VS availability due to rain (4QAM 16xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 139. Hop length VS availability due to rain (16QAM 16xE1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 140. Cellular GSM applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 141. Cellular UMTS applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 142. Alcatel 9400AWY Rel.2.0 integration in Wireless IP and LMDS network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 143. LantoLan Single Hop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 144. LantoLan Single Hop with SDH Transport (2 sites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 145. LantoLan Single Hop with SDH Transport (N=3 sites) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 146. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 147. Label affixed on the IDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 148. Label affixed on the ODU and ODUs TRANSCEIVER box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 149. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 150. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLES Tab. 1. Additional feature and SWPversion relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 2. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 3. Available Flash cards for 9400AWY R.2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 4. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 5. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 6. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (IDU basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234 235 237 238 240 241 243 244 244 246 246 247 249 251 253 255 259 261 261 262 262 262 263 265 267 268 270 270 275 278 279 293 294 295 296 297 297 297 298 298 299 310 311 312 321 322
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
14 17 24 26 27 28
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 9 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 7. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with 916 E1/DS1 plugin) . . . Tab. 8. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with E3/DS3 plugin) . . . . . . . . Tab. 9. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with Ethernet plugin) . . . . . . . . Tab. 10. 13 to 38 GHz 4/16 QAM configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 11. Bit rate of the IDUODU signal on the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 12. 9400 AWY family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 13. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1E3 8E1 with BER 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 14. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1E3 8E1 BER 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 15. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 2E1 BER 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 16. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1 2E1 BER 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 17. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3 8DS1 BER 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 18. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3 8DS1 BER 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 19. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 20. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 21. Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail for 9400AWY R.2.0 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 22. IDU part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 23. Notes to Tab. 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 24. 1+0 & 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 25. 1+0 & 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 26. 1+0 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 27. 1+0 & 16DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 28. 1+0 IDU & E3 equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 29. 1+0 IDU & DS3 equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 30. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 31. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 32. 1+1 & 8E1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 33. 1+1 & 8DS1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 34. 1+1 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 35. 1+1 & 16DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 36. 1+1 & E3 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 37. 1+1 & DS3 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 39. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 40. IDU Main Unit external interfaces and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 41. IDU Extension Unit external interfaces and access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 42. Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 43. E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 44. E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 45. RJ45 connectors leds for Ethernet user data interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 46. User service channel connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 47. Alarms Housekeeping connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 48. NMSV.11 + Audio 1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 49. NMSG.703 + Audio 2 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 50. ECT connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 51. OS (or ECT) connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 52. Upgrade Kits and IDU units compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 53. Setting of dipswitchbanks on IDU MAIN unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 54. ODU dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 55. ODU configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 56. 7 GHz Transceiver assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 57. Branching assemblies for 7 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 58. 8 GHz Transceiver assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 59. Branching assemblies for 8 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66 82 86 88 88 89 89 90 90 91 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 103 105 107 108 109 110 111 114 117 118 119 120 126 133 138 139 142 142 143 143
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 10 / 332
29 30 31 35 36 47 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
Tab. 60. 13 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 61. 15 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 62. 18 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 63. 23 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 64. 25 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 65. 28 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 66. 38 GHz ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 67. Pole Mounting versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 68. Available couplers (1338 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 69. Available couplers and related items (78 GHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 70. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 71. ODU Output flanges with external antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 72. Part list of available integrated antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 73. Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 74. ODU external interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 75. RF interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 76. Correspondence between the item Commercial Codes and associated Technical Codes Tab. 77. Special items of the Kit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 78. IDU unit replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 79. Markets, tributaries and modulations forecasted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 80. Shelves Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 81. Allowed board/plugin types in IDU Main shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 82. Allowed board/plugin types in IDU Extension shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 83. Protections for Tributaries/services in 9400AWY (1+1) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 84. Characteristics of the protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 85. EPS switch priority table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 86. RPSRX Automatic switch criteria priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 87. RPSRX priority table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 88. 10BASET and 100BASET main parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 89. Data/voice mix (ETSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 90. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 91. 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 92. Handbooks contained in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 93. Documentation common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . Tab. 94. List of symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tab. 95. List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144 145 146 147 147 148 148 149 152 153 154 155 156 158 159 159 167 180 206 226 228 229 229 242 242 251 255 256 266 269 315 318 319 319 323 323
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 11 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
12 / 332
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a)
Warranty Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contract of sale of the equipment to which this handbook refers to. ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b)
Information The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the part of ALCATEL.
c)
Copyright Notification The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d)
Safety recommendations The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment: 1) Service Personnel Installation and service must be carried out by authorized persons having appropriate technical training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and service, so as to prevent any personal injury or danger to other persons, as well as prevent damaging the equipment. 2) Access to the Equipment Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only. 3) Safety Rules Recommended safety rules are indicated in para.B.3 on pages 302. Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In case of conflict between safety instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety rules stated in this manual will prevail.
e)
Service Personnel skill Service Personnel must have an adequate technical background on telecommunications and in particular on the equipment subject of this handbook. An adequate background is required to properly install, operate and maintain equipment. The fact of merely reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para. C.2.1 on page 318 is considered as not enough.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 13 / 332
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY

Tab. 1. Additional feature and SWPversion relationship This handbook describes 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment, taking into account all system features that are made available by first SWP version V2.0.0, as well as by successive SWP releasesversions. This table sumsup the major additional features (mainly related to new HW items and relevant performance) that are available starting from a certain SWPversion successive to first SWP version V2.0.0. Additional feature New 48/60V and 24V PSU ETSI IDU Main and Extension units, with different 3DB xxxxx AB P/N (see N.B.a in Tab. 23. on page 86) 78 GHz ODUs (new 9470AWY product) N.B. Frequency shifter management (see para.41.2 on page 218) V2.0.2 Profiles management (see para.44.1.1 on page 274) New fullrange (24/60V) IDU Main and Extension units N.B. ANSI version (DS1/DS3) interfaces and relevant ANSI IDU Main and Extension units and PlugIns N.B. ANSI version ODUs N.B. N.B. the claimed item management must be meant from SWPversion point of view, independently from actual availability of related HW items. In particular, take into account that, on issue date of this handbook, IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units for 2460V power supply are not available. Ed.03 of this handbook is validated in conjunction with SWP versions V2.0.0 to V2.0.2 only. Information relevant to SWP versions > V2.0.2 , if any, must be considered preliminary, subject to change and without any obligation on the part of ALCATEL. For detailed information regarding handbook applicability, purpose and history, please refer to para.C.1 on page 313. V2.0.3 to be confirmed Available from SWPversion mandatory from V2.0.1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 14 / 332
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
Information in this handbook is divided into the following parts: a) FRONT MATTER TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES PRELIMINARY INFORMATION HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY HANDBOOK STRUCTURE SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING QUICK GUIDE It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks. SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS on page 19 This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical characteristics. SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS on page 67 This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment provisioning and system configuration, including the setting up of logical/physical connections. SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE on page 173 This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance. SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION on page 215 This section provides the 2nd level description of the equipment. SECTION 5: APPENDICES on page 289 In this section some additional information and instructions are given: Appendix A Introduction to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 radio system family Appendix B SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling Appendix C Documentation guide Appendix D List of symbols and abbreviations
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 15 / 332
SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

a) Please refer to Appendix B on page 301 to obtain details regarding following information: Safety rules: TOPIC General rules Dangerous Electrical Voltages WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Equipment connection to earth
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts
Equipment emitting RF power (EMF norms)
Other labels: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Logo
b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs, loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the Constructors technical documentation.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 16 / 332
QUICK GUIDE
Tab. 2. Quick guide If you need immediate operative information on how to: GENERAL TOPICS get information on system documentation have a short description of the system configure a station, provision equipment boards and logically setup connections read Appendix C on page 313
read para.11.1 on pages 21 thru 36
read chapter 21 on page 69 for Technical Codes and for: IDU, read chapter 22 on page 81 ODU and antennas, read chapter 26 on page 137
get item P/Ns
for Commercial Codes read chapter 28 on page 167 GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE get information on safety, EMC, EMF, ESD norms and equipment labelling acknowledge cautions to avoid equipment damage for: get operative information regarding the units in IDU (connectors, leds, buttons) get operative information regarding ODU and Light service kit cable know the consequences of unit extraction in IDU/REG shelf set and use the EOW functions of the equipment
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
read Appendix B on page 301
read para.24.1 on page 102
IDU Main unit: read para.24.2 on page 103 unit IDU Extension unit: read para.24.3 on page 105 Flash Card: read para.24.5 on page 124 Distributor subracks: read chapter 25 on page 135
read chapter 27 on page 159
Tab. 2. continues ..
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 17 / 332
.. continues Tab. 2. If you need immediate operative information on how to:

INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING physically install and cable the equipment hardware get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook and proceed as specified by it
install or upgrade Craft Terminals and/or equipments software
get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
commission equipment
get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide and proceed as specified by it SYSTEM UPGRADE
install a tributary plugin on IDU Main and/or Extension unit upgrade system configuration from (1+0) to (1+1) replace Flash Card to improve system capacity
get 9400AWY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook and read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics) MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts carry out First Level maintenance (system state display) carry out preventive maintenance
carry out corrective maintenance
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please refer to the TABLE OF CONTENTS of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 18 / 332
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical characteristics.
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 11 System description It describes the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment architecture and system configurations. Chapter 12 Technical specifications It sumsup the technical characteristics of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0.
PAGE 21
47
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 19 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
20 / 332
11 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
This chapter describes the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment architecture and system configurations; it includes the following main subparagraphs: para.11.1 Equipment architecture, on page 21 para.11.2 System configurations, on page 37.
If you need general information on 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment family, please refer to Appendix A Introduction to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 radio system family on page 291.
11.1 Equipment architecture

11.1.1 Splitmount architecture The 9400AWY system has been designed in a split mount architecture. As shown in Fig. 1. on page 22, it consists of three main parts. Indoor Unit (IDU) Outdoor Unit (ODU) IDUODU cable(s) details in paragraph 11.1.2 on page 24 details in paragraph 11.1.3 on page 36 details in paragraph 11.1.4 on page 33
IDU and ODU are connected with a single standard coaxial cable carrying the main traffic, the remote power supply voltage for the ODU and auxiliary information. Rack or wall or desk mounting are available for the IDU. The ODU can be installed on standard poles, wall or pedestal mount, with an appropriate fastening system, which guarantees the coarse and fine pointing, even when a faulty ODU has to be replaced. The ODU (one or two depending on the configuration 1+0 or 1+1) incorporates the complete RF transceiver and can be associated with an integrated antenna (30 cm or 60 cm diameter) or separate antenna, if a larger diameter is needed. The ODU is capacityindependent and consists of a single cabinet (size and weight independent on frequency) with a solar shield. The cabinet is a very compact and robust weatherproof (IP 67) container, designed to be compatible with hot and very sunny climatic zones. The ODU can be rapidly installed on standard poles with an appropriate fastening system. The pole mounting is the same for 1+0 or 1+1 configurations from 7 to 38 GHz. The ODU is fixed by means of quick latches. This system allows to change the ODU without altering antenna pointing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 21 / 332
9400AWY R.2.0 (1+0) SPLITMOUNT SYSTEM

ODU Ch#1 Antenna
ODU NE ULS IDU
IDUODU cable
MAIN SHELF IDU Ch#1
9400AWY R.2.0 (1+1) SPLITMOUNT SYSTEM

for possible ODU (1+1) configurations see Fig. 2. on page 23
ODU
IDUODU cables
EXTENSION SHELF IDU Ch#0
NE ULS IDU
MAIN SHELF IDU Ch#1 Fig. 1. 9400AWY R.2.0 splitmount system

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 22 / 332
Antenna CH 0
Antenna CH 1
ODU CH 0 to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
ODU CH 1 to IDU MAIN UNIT
ODU (1+1) HSBSD or FDDA AP with two antennas
ODU CH 1 COUPLER ANTENNA
COUPLER
ODU CH 0 ODU CH 0 ODU CH 1 to IDU EXTENSION UNIT to IDU MAIN UNIT
ANTENNA
to IDU MAIN UNIT to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
ODU (1+1) HSB with one antenna (1338 GHz)
ODU (1+1) HSB with not integrated antenna (78 GHz)
Double Polar Antenna
ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna
Fig. 2. Possible configurations of ODU (1+1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 23 / 332
11.1.2 IDU (Indoor Unit) The IDU incorporates the baseband processing and offers tributaries interfaces as well as service channel and supervision. The IDU is frequencyindependent. As shown in Fig. 1. on page 22, up to 2 subracks (each of them being 1U high) are used as basic elements to build the following configurations: 1+0 this configuration includes one main IDU unit (height 1U) 1+1 this configuration includes one main IDU unit (height 1U) and one Extension IDU unit (height 1U).
In 1+1 configuration the two subracks are interconnected by means of an auxiliary flat cable (100wires SCSI front panel connector) Both the main and the extension IDU units if not equipped with plugsin, are able to support 8xE1 or 8xDS1 interfaces. It is possible to accommodate three different plugsin alternatives among them, exploiting the same mechanical space on the front panel: 916xE1 or 916xDS1 plugin allowing to support the extension to 16xE1 or 16xDS1 interfaces E3 or DS3 plugin DATA plugin implementing Ethernet functionalities. This plugin is plugged onto the Main IDU unit only. Main IDU unit It includes the Mux/Demux and the cable interface functions for the main channel. This is a common item for 1+0 and 1+1 systems. Onto the main unit is plugged the microprocessor unit implementing EC and RC functionalities. A Software Key (FLASH CARD) is also plugged onto the Main board allowing flexibility in choosing user interfaces as in the following Tab. 3. (6 possible types of Flash card): Tab. 3. Available Flash cards for 9400AWY R.2.0 NAME 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD Detailed information on flash cards is given in point [5] on page 27. [2] Extension IDU unit It includes the Mux/Demux and the cable interface functions for the spare channel. This is an item specific for 1+1 systems. The Hitless Switch functionality (RPS RX) is embedded.
[1]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 24 / 332
[3]
Power supply One PSU is integrated in each of the Main and Extension units and can be of three types:
N.B. [4]
Floating (4860) VDC nom. 20% Floating 24 VDC nom. 20% Floating full range (2460) VDC nom. 20% (please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14) No Fans Unit are foreseen inside the 9400AWY R.2.0 IDU units.
IDU External interfaces IDU Main and Extension subrack external interfaces are shown and listed in following Fig. 3. , Fig. 4. , Tab. 4. and Tab. 5. respectively.
(1+1) interconnection Battery input ON/OFF switch Connector of optional plugin
Alarms Housekeeping NMS_V11 AUDIO 1
Pushbuttons Telephone
OS Debug
ECT 8 E1/DS1
User service channel NMS_G703 AUDIO 2
LEDS IDUODU interconnection
Fig. 3. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces
Battery input
ON/OFF switch
Connector of optional plugin
IDUODU interconnection
Pushbutton
(1+1) interconnection
8 E1/DS1
User service channel
LEDS
Fig. 4. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 25 / 332
Tab. 4. IDU Main Unit: external interfaces list Interface (1+1) interconnection 8E1 / DS1 32 wires (NMS_V11 + Audio1) (NMS_G703 + Audio2) User Service Channel Bas c asic (witho t option l tri utaries plugs in) ( ithout o tional tributar s p ugsin) Alarms Housekeeping Debug OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT ECT RS232 Telephone Reset Test lamp Acknowledgement Battery input ONOFF switch IDUODU cable LEDs Optio ptional Interface faces (on optiona tributaries plugsin) sp onal N 8 on Eth Data plugin; alternative to: 916 E1 / DS1 plugin or E3 / DS3 plugin on E3 / DS3 plugin; alternative to: 916 E1 / DS1 plugin or Eth Data plugin 916 E1 / DS1 plugin; alternative to: E3 / DS3 plugin or Eth DATA plugin SubD 3 Connector SCSI 100 pin SubD 37 SubD 15 SubD 15 SubD 15 SubD 15 RJ45 RJ45 SubD 9 RJ11 Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Male Two position switch on PSU board on PSU board Female Female Female Female Female Female Notes
Ethernet user data
2 x RJ45
E3 / DS3
2 x (1.0/2.3)
916 E1 / DS1 32 wires
SubD 37
Female
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 26 / 332
Tab. 5. IDU Extension Unit: external interfaces list Interface

Connector SCSI 100 pin SubD 37 SubD 15 SubD 3 Female Female Female Male Two position switch N Pushbutton 2 (ON, ODUW)
Notes
Basic ic (witho t optiona tributaries plug in) ithout op ional butaries lugsin
(1+1) interconnection 8E1 / DS1 32 wires User Service Channel Battery input ONOFF switch IDUODU cable test lamp LEDs
on PSU board on PSU board
Optional Interfaces l In (on optional tribut ibutaries plugsin)
E3 / DS3
2 x (1.0/2.3)
on E3 / DS3 plugin; alternative to 916 E1 / DS1 plugin
916 E1 / DS1 32 wires
SubD 37
Female
on 916 E1 / DS1 plugin; alternative to E3 / DS3 plugin
[5]
Software Keys (FLASH CARDS) The following tables show the possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be supported by each of the six types of flash cards defined in previous Tab. 3. on page 24: Tab. 6. on page 28, to be used when no tributary plugin is equipped Tab. 7. on page 29, to be used when tributary 916 E1 / DS1 plugin is equipped Tab. 8. on page 30, to be used when tributary E3 / DS3 plugin is equipped Tab. 9. on page 31, to be used when Ethernet plugin is equipped
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 27 / 332
Tab. 6. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (IDU basic) Flash Card Name Int.N# & type 2E1 4E1DS1 4QAM 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1DS1 4/16QAM 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1DS1 4QAM 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1DS1 4/16QAM 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 4QAM 8DS1 16E1 without plugin (IDU basic) Supported configuration 1E12E1 1E14E1 1DS14DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1DS14DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 na na na na Supported modulation 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM na na na na
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 28 / 332
16E1/DS1 4/16QAM
E3/DS3

16DS1 E3 DS3 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 16E1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 na na na na 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM na na na na 16DS1 E3 DS3
Tab. 7. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with 916 E1/DS1 plugin) Flash Card Name
Int.N# & type 2E1
with 916 E1/DS1 plugin Supported configuration 1E12E1 1E14E1 1DS14DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1DS14DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E116E1 1DS116DS1 na na Supported Modulation 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM na na
4E1DS1 4QAM
4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1
4E1DS1 4/16QAM
8E1DS1 4QAM
8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1
8E1DS1 4/16QAM
8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1
4QAM
8DS1 16E1 16DS1 E3 DS3 2E1 4E1 8E1
16E1/DS1 4/16QAM
E3/DS3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 29 / 332

1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM na na 4DS1 8DS1 16E1 16DS1 E3 DS3 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E116E1 1DS116DS1 na na
Tab. 8. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with E3/DS3 plugin) Flash Card Name Int.N# & type 2E1 4E1DS1 4QAM 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1DS1 4/16QAM 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1DS1 4QAM 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1DS1 4/16QAM 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 4QAM 8DS1 16E1 E3 with E3/DS3 plugin 1E12E1 1E14E1 1DS14DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1DS14DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 na na 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM na na
Supported configuration
Supported Modulation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 30 / 332
16E1/DS1 4/16QAM
E3/DS3

16DS1 DS3 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 16E1 E3 16DS1 DS3 E3 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM DS3 1E12E1 1E14E1 1E18E1 1DS14DS1 1DS18DS1 na na 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM na na E3 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM DS3
Tab. 9. Capacity and modulation for 9400AWY R.2.0 flash cards (with Ethernet plugin) with Ethernet plugin
Flash Card Name
Int.N# & type 2E1
TDM BW (a) 0E12E1 0E14E1 0DS14DS1 0E12E1 0E14E1 0DS14DS1 0E12E1 0E14E1 0E18E1 0DS14DS1 0DS18DS1 0E12E1 0E14E1 0E18E1 0DS14DS1 0DS18DS1 0E12E1 0E14E1 0E18E1 0DS14DS1 0DS18DS1 0E18E1 0DS18DS1 na na
ETHERNET BW (b) 2E10E1 4E10E1 4DS10DS1 2E10E1 4E10E1 4DS10DS1 2E10E1 4E10E1 8E10E1 4DS10DS1 8DS10DS1 2E10E1 4E10E1 8E10E1 4DS10DS1 8DS10DS1 2E10E1 4E10E1 8E10E1 4DS10DS1 8DS10DS1 16E10E1 16DS10DS1 na 51,184Mbps 2E10E1 4E10E1 8E10E1 4DS10DS1 8DS10DS1 16E10E1 16DS10DS1 na 51,184Mbps
(a)+ (b) 2E1 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 16E1 16DS1 na
Supported Modulation 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM 4 and 16 QAM
4E1DS1 4QAM
4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1 4DS1 2E1 4E1
4E1DS1 4/16QAM
8E1DS1 4QAM
8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1
8E1DS1 4/16QAM
8E1 4DS1 8DS1 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1
4QAM
8DS1 16E1 16DS1 E3 DS3 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1
16E1/DS1 4/16QAM
E3/DS3
8DS1 16E1 16DS1 E3 DS3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 31 / 332

51,184Mbps 2E1 4E1 8E1 4DS1 8DS1 16E1 16DS1 na 51,184Mbps 0E12E1 0E14E1 0E18E1 0DS14DS1 0DS18DS1 0E18E1 0DS18DS1 na na
[6]
IDU configurations from factory Different IDU configurations are available from factory: an 8 E1 / DS1 hardware maximum configuration which could be upgraded later by the means of the dedicated board to 16 E1 / DS1 or E3 / DS3 Or Ethernet 2x 10/100 BaseT configuration (with also the appropriate software key). an 16 E1 / DS1 hardware configuration an E3 / DS3 hardware configuration an Ethernet 2x10/100 BaseT allowing to mix with up to 8 E1 / DS1 physical input.
Refer to para.11.2 on page 37 for details.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 32 / 332
11.1.3 ODU (Outdoor Unit) a)

ODU unit The ODU consists of a cabinet including the modem + transceiver of a channel. The mechanical structure utilizes an outdoor IP67 cabinet. Two mechanical solutions are adopted: one for all frequency bands from 13 to 38 GHz, where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the ODU cabinet; the only differences among the frequency bands are related to the diplexer and the RF section; another for all frequency bands from 7 to 8 GHz, where ODU is composed by two independent units: the branching (diplexer) and the RF section (transceiver).
See chapter 26 on page 137 for drawings. All configurations are available for each frequency band. The ODU presents one output port at which a single polarization integrated antenna (30 cm or 60 cm diameter) or a waveguide for not integrated antenna connection can be connected. The ODU is capacityindependent. The ODU consists of subunits which carry out the following main functions (see Fig. 5. on page 34): [1] Modem: It consists of a baseband part and an IF part. The main functions are: [2] Cable interface: DC splitting, echo cancellation, clock recovery HDB3 coding/decoding Modulation and demodulation Digital to analog conversion Analogue filtering Upconversion in Tx side in the frequency range of 1 GHz to 2.1 GHz Downconversion in Rx side from 675 MHz to base band Control function for hardware configuration and dialog with the IDU.
FrontEnd. The main functions are: AGC IF amplification Upconversion to the RF Tx channel frequency Transmit power control range of 30 dB RF loopback Double mixers at Rx side (the frequency of the signal sent to the modem board is 675 MHz whatever the frequency band and shifter).
[3]
Synthesizer unit The RF LO in the overall frequency range of 3.8 GHz to 5.7 GHz The IF LO in the frequency range of 1.0 GHz to 2.1 GHz
[4]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Power Supply Unit: it is screwed on the Front End box Microwave Diplexer: it is inserted between the front end and the antenna. Its scope is to filter all interfering signals and harmonics. It consists of two bandpass filters: one for the Rx and one for the Tx. The rejection between these two parts is more than 70 dB. The insertion losses are less than 2 dB.
[5]
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 33 / 332
Fig. 5. ODU block diagram b) Solar shield Even if the ODU has been designed to work without solar shield, this one is always delivered with each ODU. N.B. Note : the ODU is qualified for a room temperature of +55 0C maximum. In case of solar radiation (1120 W/m2), the maximum room temperature is reduced to +40 0C (ETS 300 01924.1). It assumes that the protection of the solar shield is 15 0C. c) ODU configurations The ODU configurations available are: for the employment in 1+0 unprotected systems: 1+0 for the employment in 1+1 protected systems: 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB SD 1+1 FD AP 1+1 FD DA
Tab. 10. on page 35 depicts the corresponding radio configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 34 / 332
Tab. 10. 13 to 38 GHz 4/16 QAM configurations Configuration

ODU cabinet 1
RF channeling
Coupler NO
Antenna 1
1+0
1+1 HSB
1/10 dB asymmetric
1+1 HSB SD
NO
1+1 FD AP
NO
1 (nonintegrated only
1+1 FD DA
OR
NO
Legend: AP = Alternate polar DA = Dual antenna
d)
ODU Coupler The ODU coupler [shown in Fig. 69. on page 152 (1338 GHz) and in Fig. 70. on page 153 (78 GHz)] is used in the 1+1 HSB configuration. The 1+0 configuration is comprised of a simple diplexer inside the cabinet while the protected configurations (1+1) are always comprised of two cabinets and one 1/10 dB asymmetric coupler for HSB configuration.
The couplers are connected between the cabinets and the antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 35 / 332
11.1.4 IDUODU cable The connection between the IDU and the ODU is realized with a single coaxial cable and N50 ohm connectors (2 cables in 1+1 configurations). On this cable the following signals are present: DC voltage to the remote power supply of the ODU; HDB3 Tx signal; HDB3 Rx signal.
The HDB3 signal is an aggregate signal including the main signal, auxiliary signal and the IDUODU service channels. The bit rate of the aggregate signal is listed in the following table. Tab. 11. Bit rate of the IDUODU signal on the cable ETSI (2 to 16xE1, E3) AWY configuration ETSI (2 to 16xE1, E3) UX configuration ANSI (4 to 16xDS1, DS3) 39.168 Mbit/s 39.437 Mbit/s 57.120 Mbit/s
The IDUODU cable is a standard coaxial cable whose characteristics are specified in para.12.5 on page 63.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 36 / 332
11.2 System configurations

The configurations available are:
Unprotected configurations (1+0) described in para.11.2.1 herebelow Protected configurations (1+1) described in para.11.2.2 on page 39.
11.2.1 1+0 Unprotected configurations The 1+0 unprotected terminal is made up of the following elements: One Outdoor Unit (ODU) incorporating the complete RF transceiver (modem, RF units, branching filter) and an integrated or separated antenna. The ODU is capacityindependent. One Indoor Unit (MAIN IDU unit) incorporating the baseband processing and offering tributaries interfacing as well as service channel and supervision. The IDU is frequencyindependent. A single coaxial cable.
Fig. 6. on page 38 shows the IDU+ODU block diagram. Fig. 7. on page 38 shows the IDU block diagram, when no tributary plugin is equipped. In this case the possible capacities and modulations are depicted in Tab. 6. on page 28, according to the equipped flash card. Fig. 8. on page 38 shows the IDU block diagram, when a tributary plugin is equipped. In this case the possible capacities and modulations are depicted, according to the equipped flash card, in: Tab. 7. on page 29, to be used when tributary 916 E1 / DS1 plugin is equipped Tab. 8. on page 30, to be used when tributary E3 / DS3 plugin is equipped Tab. 9. on page 31, to be used when Ethernet plugin is equipped
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 37 / 332
1 x ODU IDU 1+0

IDU MAIN UNIT
RT
Fig. 6. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU + ODU block diagram
NMS V11 NMS G.703 10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT) RS232 (ECT)
EC / RC
64Kb/s TMN MAIN TRIBUT Service channel 64 Kb/s EOW 8 x E1/DS1
MUX DEMUX
HDB3
ODU CH#1
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 7. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plugin)
NMS V11 NMS G.703 10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT) RS232 (ECT)
EC / RC
64Kb/s TMN MAIN TRIBUT Service channel 64 Kb/s EOW 8 x E1/DS1 additional plugin
MUX DEMUX
HDB3
ODU CH#1
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 8. 9400AWY (1+0) IDU block diagram (with additional tributary plugin)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 38 / 332
11.2.2 1+1 Protected configurations The protected configurations allow to protect the most critical transmission paths. The 1+1 configurations include an EPS protection (in Tx and Rx side) and an Hitless Switch (at Rx side) as standard features. In the protected configuration the main traffic and service channels are automatically protected. In the following, IDU and ODU protected configurations are described in: para.11.2.2.1 below: IDU (1+1) configurations para.11.2.2.2 on page 45 : ODU (1+1) configurations 11.2.2.1 IDU (1+1) configurations [1] IDU (1+1) base system and IDU (1+1) system with Ethernet plugin The IDU (1+1) base system (without any tributary plugin) and the IDU (1+1) system with Ethernet plugin is implemented with (see Fig. 9. below): a) b) c) one MAIN IDU unit ; one EXTENSION IDU unit ; one auxiliary front panel flat cable (100 wires connecting SCSI front panel connectors) interconnecting the Main and Extension units one front panel 37wiressplitcable for 18 E1 / DS1 line connection; one front panel 15wiressplitcable for User Service Channels line connection; optionally, one Ethernet plugin equipped on the MAIN IDU unit only.
d) e) f)
b) c) a)
Fig. 9. IDU (1+1) system (base or with Ethernet plugin) composition and intershelf cabling Fig. 10. on page 40 shows the structure of the split cables d ) and e ) cited above. Fig. 11. on page 40 shows the IDU block diagram. The possible capacities and modulations are depicted:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
if the Ethernet plugin is not equipped , in Tab. 6. on page 28, according to the employed flash card; if the Ethernet plugin is equipped , inTab. 9. on page 31, according to the employed flash card.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 39 / 332
f)
e)
d)
Main Unit
Extension Unit
SUB D 37 / 15 male
SUB D 37 / 15 male
SUB D 37 / 15 female
Special Split Cable for E1/DS1 Tributaries (37 pins) and for User Service Channels (15 pins) User Fig. 10. E1 / DS1 and User Service Channel splitcable structure
IDU EXTENSION UNIT 37pin split cable

8 x E1/DS1 MUX DEMUX EPS User Service Channel HDB3 Hitless Switch
ODU CH#0
15pin split cable
flat cable
NMS V11 NMS G.703 10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT) RS232 (ECT) 64Kb/s TMN 8 x E1/DS1 EOW MUX DEMUX EPS
EC / RC
Tributaries
Eth.plugin User Service Channel
HDB3
ODU CH#1
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 11. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with no tributary plugin and with Ethernet plugin)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 40 / 332
[2]
IDU (1+1) system with 916 E1 / DS1 plugin The IDU (1+1) system with 916 E1 / DS1 plugin is implemented starting from the base configuration already described in point [1] on page 39, composed by: a) b) c) one MAIN IDU unit ; one EXTENSION IDU unit ; one auxiliary front panel flat cable (100 wires connecting SCSI front panel connectors) interconnecting the Main and Extension units one front panel 37wiressplitcable for 18 E1 / DS1 line connection; one front panel 15wiressplitcable for User Service Channels line connection;
d) e)
adding the following items, depicted in Fig. 12. below: f) g) h) one 916 E1 / DS1 plugin equipped inside the MAIN IDU unit; another 916 E1 / DS1 plugin equipped inside the EXTENSION IDU unit; one front panel 37wiressplitcable for 916 E1 / DS1 line connection, equal to that used for 18 E1 / DS1 line connection.
g) EXTENSION f) MAIN
Fig. 12. Additional items and intershelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with 916 E1 / DS1 plugin Fig. 13. on page 42 shows the IDU block diagram. The possible capacities and modulations are depicted in Tab. 7. on page 29, according to the employed flash card.
h)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 41 / 332
2 x 37pin split cables
IDU EXTENSION UNIT

8 x E1/DS1 916 E1/DS1 plugin MUX DEMUX User Service EPS Channel Hitless Switch HDB3
ODU CH#0
15pin split cable
flat cable
NMS V11 NMS G.703 10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT) RS232 (ECT) 64Kb/s TMN 8 x E1/DS1 EOW
EC / RC
Tributaries
916 E1/DS1 plugin User Service Channel MUX DEMUX EPS HDB3 ODU CH#1
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 13. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with 916 E1 / DS1 plugin)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 42 / 332
[3]
IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plugin The IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plugin is implemented starting from the base configuration already described in point [1] on page 39, composed by: a) b) c) one MAIN IDU unit ; one EXTENSION IDU unit ; one auxiliary front panel flat cable (100 wires connecting SCSI front panel connectors) interconnecting the Main and Extension units one front panel 37wiressplitcable for 18 E1 / DS1 line connection; if E3 / DS3 transmission is used, this cable has no use, so that it could not be equipped. e) one front panel 15wiressplitcable for User Service Channels line connection;
d)
adding the following items, depicted in Fig. 12. below: f) g) h) one E3 / DS3 plugin equipped inside the MAIN IDU unit; another E3 / DS3 plugin equipped inside the EXTENSION IDU unit; one pair of front panel coaxialsplitcable for E3 / DS3 line connection, one for line input, the other for line output.
g) EXTENSION f) MAIN
Fig. 14. Additional items and intershelf cabling of IDU (1+1) system with E3 / DS3 plugin Fig. 15. on page 44 shows the structure of one of the coaxial split cables h ) cited above. Fig. 16. on page 44 shows the IDU block diagram. The possible capacities and modulations are depicted in Tab. 8. on page 30, according to the employed flash card.
h)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 43 / 332
Extension Unit
Main Unit User Fig. 15. E3 / DS3 coaxialsplitcable structure
37pin split cable (if necessary, see text)
IDU EXTENSION UNIT

8 x E1/DS1 E3/DS3 plugin HDB3 MUX DEMUX EPS Hitless Switch
ODU CH#0
2 x coaxial split cable

User Service Channel
15pin split cable
flat cable
NMS V11 NMS G.703 10/100 BaseT (OS or ECT) RS232 (ECT) 64Kb/s TMN 8 x E1/DS1 EOW
EC / RC
Tributaries
E3/DS3 plugin User Service Channel MUX DEMUX EPS HDB3 ODU CH#1
IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 16. 9400AWY (1+1) IDU block diagram (with E3 / DS3 plugin)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 44 / 332
11.2.2.2 ODU (1+1) configurations According to the ODU configurations introduced in Tab. 10. on page 35, at radio level the following system implementations are available: 1+1 Hot Stand By (HSB): with Space Diversity (SD) or without space diversity 1+1 with Frequency Diversity (FD): FD double antenna AP N.B. FD one antenna AP
see Fig. 17. herebelow see Fig. 18. herebelow
see Fig. 19. on page 46 see Fig. 20. on page 46
The radio configurations are independent from the IDU (1+1) configurations described in previous para.11.2.2.1 on page 39.
ODU CH 0
HDB3 MODEM IF RF
IDU 1+1 IDU EXTENSION UNIT front interconnections IDU MAIN UNIT
HDB3 MODEM
only one RT transmits

ODU CH 1
IF RF
N.B.
the detailed station layout of this configuration is given in para.21.5.3.1 on page 77 Fig. 17. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB SD) IDU + ODU block diagram
ODU CH 0
HDB3 MODEM IF RF
Coupler
HDB3 MODEM
only one RT transmits

ODU CH 1
IF RF
1:10
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the detailed station layout of this configuration is given in: para.21.5.3.2 on page 78 (1338 GHz) para.21.5.3.3 on page 79 (78 GHz) Fig. 18. 9400AWY (1+1 HSB one antenna) IDU + ODU block diagram
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 45 / 332
ODU CH 0
HDB3 MODEM IF RF
IDU EXTENSION UNIT front interconnections IDU MAIN UNIT

HDB3 MODEM
both RTs transmit

ODU CH 1
IF RF
AP
N.B.
the detailed station layout of this configuration is given in para.21.5.3.1 on page 77 Fig. 19. 9400AWY (1+1 FD Double Antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram
ODU CH 0
HDB3 MODEM IF RF
HDB3 MODEM
both RTs transmit

ODU CH 1
IF RF
N.B.
the detailed station layout of this configuration is given in para.21.5.3.4 on page 80 Fig. 20. 9400AWY (1+1 FD one antenna AP) IDU + ODU block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 46 / 332
IDU 1+1
12 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as typical values Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9400AWY Rel.2 in the following RF band configurations: Tab. 12. 9400 AWY family SYSTEM 9470AWY 9413AWY 9415AWY 9418AWY 9423AWY 9425AWY 9428AWY 9438AWY This chapter is organized as follows: General Characteristics on page 48, including: Reference system standards on page 49 RF channeling on page 50 Transmitted Power at antenna port (ETSI & ANSI) on page 51 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator on page 53 ETSI System Characteristics on page 54 ANSI System Characteristics on page 58 Switching system on page 62 Tributary interfaces Modem Maximum capacity and Modulation type IDUODU cable Manmachine interface Alarms Power supply Mechanical characteristics Environmental conditions Electromagnetic compatibility / safety Dismantling & Recycling on page 63 on page 63 on page 63 on page 63 on page 64 on page 64 on page 64 on page 64 on page 65 on page 65 on page 66 BAND (GHz) 78 13 15 18 23 25 28 38

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 47 / 332
12.1 General Characteristics

Version Station type Configuration Reference standard (system) Transmission capacity RF channel spacing Tunability Transmitted power 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator ATPC range RTPC range Tx level with Tx mute ON RF frequency stability Synthesizer step RF spectrum masks Spurious emissions BER receiver threshold System gain Rx max input level Switching system SPLIT MOUNT (IDU+ODU) Terminal 1+0 / 1+1 HSB / 1+1 FD Refer to para. 12.1.1 page 49 ETSI: 2xE1, 4xE1, 8xE1, 16xE1, E3 ANSI: 4xDS1, 8xDS1, 16xDS1, DS3 Refer to para. 12.1.2 page 50 Refer to para. 12.1.3 page 51 Refer to para. 12.1.3 page 51 Refer to para. 12.1.4 page 53 20 dB (Pmax / Pmax20 dB) 30 dB (Pmax / Pmax30 dB) (ETSI mask compliance till Pmax20 dB) < 30 dBm $ 10 ppm 250 kHz Compliant with the relevant ETSI / ANSI standards Compliant with the relevant ETSI / ANSI standards Compliant with ERC Rec. 7401 Refer to para. 12.1.5 page 54 (ETSI) or 12.1.6 page 58 (ANSI)
20 dBm (for a BER of 103) Refer to para. 12.1.7 page 62 SC #1 DATA CHANNEL 1x64 Kb/s data channel configurable alternatively as one of the following modes: G.703 asynchronous codirectional V11 codirectional V11 contradirectional 4.8/9.6 Kbps V11 4.8/9.6 Kbps V24/V28 asynchronous 1x64 Kbps V11 codirectional or G703 (DTE or codirectional) [also embedded in E1/DS1 slot for TMN ( first tributary, first slot) ] SC #2 EOW Omnibus voice channel 64 kbit/s DTMF (Q.23) + 4wire party line (2 ways) NMSV.11: 1x64 kbit/s V.11 codirectional for TMN (port 1) NMSG.703: 1x64 kbit/s G.703 codirectional for TMN (port 2) NMSRF: 1x64 kbit/s radio channel for TMN (internal to the radio frame)
User service channels
NMS channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 48 / 332
12.1.1 Reference system standards ETSI standard

Equipment
ETSI reference standard
Frequency band (GHz) 7
Frequency range (GHz) 7.117.9
Channeling
9470 AWY 4&16 QAM
EN 301 216 8 7.7259.5
ITUR F.385 ITUR F.386
Standard Tx/Rx separation (MHz) 150,154,160, 161,168,182, 196,245 119, 126, 151.614, 208,266, 294.44, 305.56, 311.32
9413 AWY 4QAM 9413 AWY16QAM 9415 AWY 4QAM 9415 AWY 16QAM 9418 AWY 4QAM 9418 AWY 16QAM 9423 AWY 4QAM 9423 AWY 16QAM 9425 AWY 4QAM 9425 AWY 16QAM 9428 AWY 4QAM 9428 AWY 16QAM
EN 301 128 Class 1 EN 301 128 Class 2 EN 301 128 Class 1 EN 301 128 Class 2 EN 301 128 Class 1 EN 300 198 Class 2 EN 300 198 Class 4 EN 300 431 Class 2 EN 300 431 Class 4 EN 300 431 Class 2 EN 300 431 Class 4 EN 300 197 Class 2 EN 300 197 Class 4
13 GHz
12.7513.25
ERC 1202 ITUR Rec 497 MEXICO ERC 1207 ITUR Rec 636 ERC 1203 ITUR Rec 595 CHINA
ERC 1302 annex A
266
15 GHz
14.415.35
315 728 420,490,644 1008,1010 340,1560 1092.5 1008, 1050, 1200,1232 1200
18 GHz
17.719.7
23 GHz
21.223.6
ITUR Rec 637
25 GHz
24.526.5
ERC 1302 ITUR Rec. 748
1008
28 GHz
27.529.5
ERC 1302 ITUR Rec. 748
1008
9438 AWY 4QAM 9438 AWY16QAM
38 GHz
3739.5
ERC 1201 ITUR Rec 749
1260
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 49 / 332
ANSI standards Designation Band (GHz) 78 11 13 15 14.415.35 SRSP314.5CDN 9418 AWY 9423 AWY 9425 AWY 9428 AWY 18 23 25 28 17.719.7 21.223.6 FCC 101 SRSP 317.7 FCC 101 NOT SUPPORTED FCC 101 SRSP 317.7 SRSP 338.6 Frequency (GHz) Frequency plans Standard (N.B.) Tx/Rx separation (MHz)
9470 AWY 9413 AWY
NOT SUPPORTED
NTIAUS 9415 AWY
640 475 1560 1560
9438 AWY
38
38.640.0
700
N.B.
Other separations are available on request.
12.1.2 RF channelling ETSI RF CHANNELING Capacity (Mbit/s) RF Channeling with 4 QAM (MHz) RF Channeling with 16 QAM (MHz) 2x2 3.5 4x2 7 3.5 8x2 14 7 16x2 /34 28 14
ANSI RF CHANNELING Capacity (Mbit/s) RF Channeling with 4 QAM (MHz) RF Channeling with 16 QAM (MHz) 4x1.5 5 8x1.5 10 5 16x1.5 20 10 45 40 20
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 50 / 332
12.1.3 Transmitted power at antenna port (ETSI and ANSI) Tolerance: 2.0 dB in temperature range 33C to +55C
Equipment
Tx/Rx separation (MHz) 7GHz: 150, 154, 160, 161, 168, 182, 196, 245 8GHz: 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 294.44, 305.56, 311.32
Output Output power setting (dBm) power ATPC range = 20 dBm (dBm) N.B. RTPC range = 30 dBm (Note 1) 25 ATPC : +25 to +5 dBm RTPC : +25 to 5 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +21 to +1 dBm RTPC : +21 to 9 dBm with 1 dB step
9470 AWY 4QAM
9470 AWY 16QAM
21
9413 AWY 4QAM 266 9413 AWY 16QAM
24 20 24
ATPC : +24 to +4 dBm RTPC : +24 to 6 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +20 to +0 dBm RTPC : +20 to 10 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +24 to +4 dBm RTPC : +24 to 6 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +21 to +1 dBm RTPC : +21 to 9 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +21 to +1 dBm RTPC : +21 to 9 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +20 to +0 dBm RTPC : +20 to 10 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +22 to +2 dBm RTPC : +22 to 8 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +19 to 1 dBm RTPC : +19 to 11 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +19 to 1 dBm RTPC : +19 to 11 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +16 to 4 dBm RTPC : +16 to 14 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +17 to 3 dBm RTPC : +17 to 13 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +14 to 6 dBm RTPC : +14 to 16 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +16 to 4 dBm RTPC : +16 to 14 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +13 to 7 dBm RTPC : +13 to 17 dBm with 1 dB step
9415 AWY 4QAM
728, 315, 420, 490, 475 (*) , 644 (*) values for 475 referred to the High Power version (see Tab. 61. on page 145)
21 21 20
9415 AWY16QAM
9418 AWY 4QAM 9418 AWY 16 QAM 9423 AWY 4QAM 9423 AWY 16QAM 9425 AWY 4QAM 1008 9425 AWY 16QAM 9428 AWY 4QAM 1008
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
22 1008,1010,340, 1560, 1092.5 19 19 1008,1200, 1232 16 17 14 16 13
9428 AWY 16QAM
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 51 / 332
Equipment
9438 AWY 4QAM 9438 AWY 16QAM
1260 1260
16 13
ATPC : +16 to 4 dBm RTPC : +16 to 14 dBm with 1 dB step ATPC : +13 to 7 dBm RTPC : +13 to 17 dBm with 1 dB step
Note 1: Output power at antenna port.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 52 / 332
Tx/Rx separation (MHz)
Output Output power setting (dBm) power ATPC range = 20 dBm (dBm) N.B. RTPC range = 30 dBm (Note 1)
12.1.4 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator FCC Channel Bandwidth Rule part 101 [MHz] ITUR/CEPT Rec. Channel Bandwidth [MHz] 3,5 7 5 5M00D7W 14 10 10M0D7W 28 20 20M0D7W 28 40 40M0D7W 3,5 7 5 5M0D7W 14 10 10M0D7W 14 20 20M0D7W 14M0D7W 14M0D7W 3M5D7W 7M0D7W 28M0D7W 28M0D7W 14M0D7W
Radio Type
99% Power Channel Bandwidth [MHz] 2,8 5,5 4,1 10,9 8,1 21,7 16,1 21,7 32 2,8 5,5 4,1 10,9 8,1 10,9 16,1
Emission Designator
Emission Designator
9400 AWY 4QAM 2E1 9400 AWY 4QAM 4E1 9400 AWY 4QAM 4DS1 9400 AWY 4QAM 8E1 9400 AWY 4QAM 8DS1 9400 AWY 4QAM 16E1 9400 AWY 4QAM 16DS1 9400 AWY 4QAM E3 9400 AWY 4QAM DS3 9400 AWY 16QAM 4E1 9400 AWY 16QAM 8E1 9400 AWY 16QAM 8DS1 9400 AWY 16QAM 16E1 9400 AWY 16QAM 16DS1 9400 AWY 16QAM E3 9400 AWY 16QAM DS3
3M5D7W 7M0D7W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 53 / 332
12.1.5 ETSI System Characteristics Data is split into following Tab. 13. to Tab. 16. according to capacity and BER value. Tab. 13. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1E3
GHz QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 103 BER THR 16xE1E3 (Received power)dBm At Antenna Port 103 BER THR 8xE1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH 16xE1E3 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH 8xE1 1+0 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic MAX INPUT POWER 103 BER (Received dBm) at antenna Port BACKGROUND BER at PRx nom. Level=35dBm Referred to Antenna Port 4 16 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 25 21 83 79 86 82 108 100 111 103 24 20 84 80 87 83 108 100 111 103 24 20 84 80 87 81 108 100 111 101 22 19 82 78 85 81 104 97 107 100 19 16 82 78 85 81 101 94 104 97 17 14 81 77 84 80 98 91 101 94 16 13 81 77 84 79 97 90 100 92 16 13 80 76 83 78 96 89 99 91 7/8 4 16 13 4 16
8E1 with BER 103

15 4 16 18 4 16 23 4 16 24/25 4 16 28/29 4 16 38 4 16
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
Transmitted Value Tolerance: " 2 dB Temperature Range > 33C + 55C /ODU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 54 / 332
Tab. 14. ETSI System Characteristics 16E1E3

GHz All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 106 BER THR 16xE1E3 (Received power)dBm At Antenna Port 106 BER THR 8xE1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH 16xE1E3 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH 8xE1 1+0 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic MAX INPUT POWER 106 BER (Received dBm) at antenna Port BACKGROUND BER at PRx nom. Level=35dBm Referred to Antenna Port 4 16 15 20 15 20 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 25 21 81 77 84 80 106 98 109 101 24 20 82 78 85 81 106 98 109 101 7/8 4 16 13 4 16
8E1 BER 106

15 4 16 18 4 16 23 4 16 24/25 4 16 28/29 4 16 38 4 16
24 20 82 78 85 79 106 98 109 99
22 19 80 76 83 79 102 95 105 98
19 16 80 76 83 79 99 92 102 95
17 14 79 75 82 78 96 89 99 92
16 13 79 75 82 77 95 88 98 90
16 13 78 74 81 76 94 87 97 89
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 55 / 332
Tab. 15. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1

GHz QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 103 BER THR 4xE1 (Received power)dBm At Antenna Port 103 BER THR 2xE1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH 4xE1 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH 2xE1 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic MAX INPUT POWER 103 BER (Received dBm) at antenna Port BACKGROUND BER at PRx nom. Level=35dBm Referred to Antenna Port 4 16 15 20 4 16 4 16 25 21 89 85 7/8 4 16
2E1 BER 103

13 4 16 15 4 16 18 4 16 23 4 16 24/25 4 16 28/29 4 16 38 4 16 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
24 20 90 86
24 20 90 86
22 19 88 84
19 16 88 83
17 14 87 82
16 13 87 81
16 13 86 79
92
93
93
91
91
90
90
89
4 16
114 106
114 106
114 106
110 103
107 99
104 96
103 94
102 92
117
117
117
113
110
107
106
105
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 56 / 332
Tab. 16. ETSI System Characteristics 4E1

GHz All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 106 BER THR 4xE1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port 106 BER THR 2xE1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH 4xE1 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH 2xE1 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic MAX INPUT POWER 106 BER (Received dBm) at antenna Port BACKGROUND BER at PRx nom. Level=35dBm Referred to Antenna Port 4 16 15 20 4 16 4 16 25 21 87 83 7/8 4 16
2E1 BER 106

13 4 16 15 4 16 18 4 16 23 4 16 24/25 4 16 28/29 4 16 38 4 16
24 20 88 84
24 20 88 84
22 19 86 82
19 16 86 82
17 14 85 81
16 13 85 81
16 13 84 80
90
91
91
89
89
88
88
87
4 16
112 104
112 104
112 104
108 101
105 98
102 95
101 94
100 93
115
115
115
111
108
105
104
103
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
15 20
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
E12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 57 / 332
12.1.6 ANSI System Characteristics Data is split into following Tab. 17. to Tab. 20. according to capacity and BER value. N.B. 7, 8, 13, 25 & 28 GHz ANSI systems are presently not supported. 8DS1 BER 103
18 4 16 23 4 16 38 4 16 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
Tab. 17. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3

GHz QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 103 BER THR 16xDS1 (Received power)dBm At Antenna Port 103 BER THR DS3 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port 103 BER THR 8xDS1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH 16xDS1 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH DS3 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH 8xDS1 1+0 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic 4 16 15 20 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 24 20 85 81 82 78 88 84 109 101 106 98 112 104 15 4 16
22 19 83 79 80 76 86 81 105 98 102 95 108 101
19 16 83 79 80 76 86 81 102 95 99 92 105 97
16 13 79 75 76 72 82 78 95 88 92 85 98 91
MAX INPUT POWER 103 BER (Received dBm) at antenna Port BACKGROUND BER at PRx nom. Level=35dBm Referred to Antenna Port
15 20
15 20
15 20
E12
E12
E12
E12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 58 / 332
Tab. 18. ANSI System Characteristics 16DS1 DS3

GHz All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 106 BER THR 16xDS1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port 106 BER THR DS3 (Received power)dBm At Antenna Port 106 BER THR 8xDS1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH 16xDS1 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH DS3 1+0 At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH 8xDS1 1+0 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic 4 16 15 20 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 4 16 24 20 83 79 80 76 86 82 107 99 104 96 110 102 15 4 16
8DS1 BER 106

18 4 16 23 4 16 38 4 16
22 19 81 77 78 74 84 80 103 96 100 93 106 99
19 16 81 77 78 74 84 80 100 93 97 90 103 96
16 13 77 73 74 70 80 76 93 86 90 83 96 89
15 20
15 20
15 20
E12
E12
E12
E12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 59 / 332
Tab. 19. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 103

GHz QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 103 BER THR 4xDS1 (Received power) dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 103TH 4xDS1 1+0 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic 4 16 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 4 16 24 20 22 19 19 16 16 13 15 4 16 18 4 16 23 4 16 38 4 16 All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
91
89
89
85
115
111
108
101
E12
E12
E12
E12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 60 / 332
Tab. 20. ANSI System Characteristics 4DS1 BER 106

GHz All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. QAM Nominal Characteristic TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER at antenna port (dBm) 106 BER THR 4xDS1 (Received power)dBm At Antenna Port Net System Gain dB 106TH 4xDS1 1+0 At Antenna Port Typical Characteristic 4 16 15 20 15 20 15 20 15 20 4 16 24 20 22 19 19 16 16 13 15 4 16 18 4 16 23 4 16 38 4 16
89
87
87
83
113
109
106
99
E12
E12
E12
E12
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 61 / 332
12.1.7 Protection switching system [1] EPS (Equipment Protection System) In 1+1 configurations, the system can support 3 levels of protection against hardware problems. All the switches are independent and have its own switching criteria. Available switches Tx EPS Select the IDU unit in Tx Not hitless Non revertive/Revertive Rx EPS Select the IDU unit in Rx Not hitless Non revertive/Revertive ODU switch (HSB) Select the ODU on line Not hitless Non revertive/Revertive
Switch vs. Configuration Configuration 1+1 FD 1+1HSB Tx EPS YES YES Rx EPS YES YES ODU switch NO YES
Details on EPS are given in: para.42.4.9 on page 250 (IDU switches) para.42.4.10 on page 252 (ODU switches) [2] RPS (Radio Protection System) RPS, hitlessswitch type, is equipped to provide protection against radio propagation problems. Details on RPS are given in: para.42.4.11 on page 254 (RPSRX logic management) para.42.4.12 on page 257 (Hitless Switch)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 62 / 332
12.2 Tributary interfaces

E1
E3 ITUT G.703 HDB3
DS1
DS3
Input / output electrical interface Code Impedance Jitter Generation Jitter Tolerance Jitter Transfer
BELLCORE GR499 AMI/B8ZS or LBO 100 bal B3ZS 75 unbal
75 unbal 120 bal
75 unbal
ITUT G.823 ITUT G.823 ITUT G.736 ITUT G.742 ITUT G.751
BELLCORE GR499 BELLCORE GR499 / ITUT G.824 BELLCORE GR253
12.3 Modem
Modulation Demodulation Equalizer type Channel coding Spectrum shaping 4/16 QAM Coherent 19tap FSE Reed Solomon (255,239) Raised cosine
12.4 Maximum capacity and Modulation type

A FLASH CARD is plugged into the IDU Main unit giving the maximum capacity for the tributaries and the Modulation Type. For details please refer to point [5] on page 27.
12.5 IDUODU cable

Coax. cable type (single) Coax. connector Filotex ET 390998 or equivalent N (50 ohm) 300 m (984 feet) for ETSI standard 150 m (492 feet) for ANSI standard
Guaranteed maximum distance between IDU and ODU Lightening protection Signals on the cable Gross bit rate on the cable:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ITUT K17 (current 333 A) DC Voltage/HDB3 Tx/HDB3 Rx (Note 1)
ETSI (2 to 16xE1/E3) ANSI (4 to 16xDS1/DS3)
39.168 Mbit/s 57.120 Mbit/s
Note 1: The HDB3 signal contains the main signal, auxiliary signal and IDUODU service channel.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 63 / 332
12.6 Manmachine interface

Visual 8+2 LEDs F interface for Personal Computer (WindowsTM) RS232C TMN interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseT TMN Data channel 64kbit/s interface RS422/G703 Interface for Telephone Service Channel
Other
12.7 Alarms
Equipment alarms Housekeeping alarms 3 outputs (IDU HW Failure alarm, ODU Main Failure alarm, ODU Spare Failure alarm) 7 inputs / 4 outputs
12.8 Power supply

$ 48 to $ 60 Vdc $20% or $ 24 Vdc $20% or $ 24 to $ 60 Vdc $20% (please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14) according to the IDU MAIN UNIT and IDU EXTENSION UNIT used. Polarity Max Power Consumption + or floating (isolated ground) 1+0 : v 40W 1+1 : v 80W
DC nominal voltage (primary)
12.9 Mechanical characteristics

Dimensions (H x W x D) 1+0 IDU 1+1 IDU ODU Antenna
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
H 1U 2U
Weight < 2.5 kg < 5.5 lb < 5 kg < 11 lb
43 x 210 x 443 mm 1.7 x 8.3 x 17.4 in 86 x 420 x 886 mm 3.4 x 16.6 x 34.8 in see Tab. 54. on page 138
Integrated with 30, 60, 90, 120 cm (1FT, 2FT, 3FT, 4FT) diameter; availability according to frequency (refer to Tab. 72. on page 156 for details) Separated with larger diameters
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 64 / 332
12.10 Environmental conditions

Main environmental aspects of Alcatel products are:
Energy consumption during manufacturing and use Materials harmfulness and recyclability Emission to air, water or soil related to the manufacturing and the use of the product Electromagnetic (EM) emissions Value recovery at the product end of life
12.10.1 Operating environmental conditions Storage Transport IDU Operation ODU ETS 300 019 class 1.3 ETS 300 019 class 2.3 ETS 300 019 class 3.2 Temperature range: 5C to +55C (23F to 131F) ETS 300 019 class 4.1, IP 67 Temperature range: 33C to +55C (27.4F to 131F)
12.10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility/safety EMC Safety Power supply ElectroStatic discharge Lightning protection ETS 300 385 class B grade B/FCC Part 15 subpart Bclass A EN 60 950 ETS 300 132 EN 55022 class B Symmetric protection implemented in ODU & IDU $ 5kV on cable ground according to IEC 100045 with 2 wave types: 1.2/50 s and 10/700 s 12.10.3 Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) WEEE management for Alcatel products is in compliance with the Directive 2002/96/EC On Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment. The starting date coming into force for the European directive is 13th August 2005 In the different countries the European directive is effective once transposed in the specific country legislation All Alcatel products fall under in Category 3 of Annex 1A of the WEEE directive (Directive 2002/96/EC) i.e. IT and Telecommunication equipment under item other products transmitting sound, images or other information by telecommunications. Alcatel products fall under WEEE directive name: Other product or equipment of transmitting sound, images or other information by telecommunications in Annex 1B. The marking
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
printed on the product denotes compliancy with the above Directive
(see para.B.7 on page 311). This mark will not cause any responsibility as all responsibilities will be defined by contract.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 65 / 332
12.11 Dismantling & Recycling

12.11.1 WEEE general information A new European directive was published on the 13th of February 2003 on Wastes of Electrical and Electronic Equipment ( WEEE ) identified as EU Directive 2002/96/EC. EU Directive 2002/96/EC sets rules for the collection and treatment of electrical and electronic equipment in Europe coming into force from August 13th 2005. Two regimes have been defined : Waste of household equipment Waste of professional equipment As a consequence this paragraph of this handbook focuses on professional equipment regime.
There are two ewaste stream to be considered : Historical ewaste or waste of equipment put on the market before August 13th 2005 Future waste or waste of equipment put on the market after 13th August 2005
The European directive introduce possible different responsibilities in the two cases, responsibilities that are anyway specified in the contract between customer and supplier in agreement with the transposition of the Directive in the Local Legislation. 12.11.2 Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling ALCATEL Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail are the documents: Environmental guide Ecodeclaration
As far as 9400AWY Rel.2 equipment is concerned, reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail are the documents: Tab. 21. Reference documentation for dismantling and recycling detail for 9400AWY R.2.0 equipment DOC. TYPE (N.B.)
Product
Code
Denomination
AWY/S
8BW036860000
BFZZA
9400 AWY/S ENVIRONMENTAL GUIDE
AWY/S N.B.
8BW036840000
EUZZA
9400AWY SCALABLE RADIO SYSTEM ECODECLARATION
DOC. TYPE for Alcatel internal use only
Such documents are available on specific request to your Alcatel local dealer. NOTE FOR ALCATEL INTERNAL USE cited documents, in Adobe Acrobat pdf format, can be retrieved from ePDM archive. Get highest available edition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 66 / 332
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS

For the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to, this section gives detailed operative information on: equipment items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) physical and logical position in the system unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the description on the access point usage (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) pinout description of connectors for Customer implementation summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces SECTION CONTENT SUMMARY INFORMATION FOR IDU & ODU Chapter 21 Station layouts It describes synthetically all available system configurations, layouts and user interfaces. For each configuration, a quick reference to the other parts of this or other sections is given, in order to retrieve detailed description of user interfaces, equipment provisioning and explanatory block diagrams. DETAILED INFORMATION FOR IDU Chapter 22 IDU part lists It gives reference information regarding the IDU equipments items, that are referenced to by the other parts of the handbook. Chapter 23 IDU provisioning It describes the IDU provisioning according to the system configurations. Chapter 24 IDU operative information It gives detailed operative information regarding the IDU shelfs units available with the equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to, for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes. Information given is relevant to assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, as well as the usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons). Chapter 25 Distributor subracks It presents the available and optionally equippeable subracks for system wiring. DETAILED INFORMATION FOR ODU Chapter 26 ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning It describes the ODU configurations and relevant provisioning. Chapter 27 ODU and related optional tools operative information It gives operative information, for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes regarding the ODU equipment and the Light service kit cable. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Chapter 28 Commercial Codes It provides the correspondence between the item Commercial Codes (and associated Commercial Descriptions) and the relevant Technical Codes (and associated Technical Descriptions) 137 PAGE
69
81
87
101
135
159
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
167
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 67 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
68 / 332
21 STATION LAYOUTS
This chapter describes synthetically all available system configurations, layouts and user interfaces envisaged for the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to. For each configuration, a quick reference to the other parts of this or other sections is given, in order to have detailed description of user interfaces, equipment provisioning and explanatory block diagrams. Please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship Information given in the following is: Constraints for 9400AWYIDU multiple equipping in a rack Hardware setting Hardware installation Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+0) Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) Introduction Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) IDU Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) ODU ODU (1+1) HSBSD or FDDA AP with two antennas ODU (1+1) HSB with one antenna (1338 GHz) ODU (1+1) HSB with one antenna (78 GHz) ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna on page 70 on page 70 on page 70 on page 71 on page 73 on page 73 on page 74 on page 77 on page 77 on page 78 on page 79 on page 80
Warning about interconnection cables drawn in Station Layout figures They are drawn just to show the endtoend points of each connection and must not be used for physically settingup the connections, that must be done taking into account the need of extracting any board without removing cables not strictly relevant to it. Refer to 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook for detailed installation information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc. Warning about equipment provisioning information The items listed are the main items. For complete installation purposes, other accessories, like mechanical components, adapters, etc. are necessary. Refer to 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook for exhaustive information on such items and their use.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 69 / 332
21.1 Constraints for 9400AWYIDU multiple equipping in a rack

Please refer to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook.
21.2 Hardware settings

[1] Hardware settings on IDU For standard operations, there is no hardware setting need by Customer. Notes: [2] The IDU MAIN unit is fit with dipswitch banks that are set infactory at a default configuration (details are given in para.24.7 on page 133). Dipswitch banks are present neither on IDU EXTENSION unit nor on tributary plugins.
Hardware settings on ODU No hardware settings are envisaged on 1338 GHz ODUs, while on 78 GHz ODUs a setting allows to choose the halfband (LOW or HIGH) for TX (see para.27.2 on page 162 for details).
21.3 Hardware installation

Please refer to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook for detailed installation information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 70 / 332
21.4 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+0)

Antenna
ODU
to IDU INTERFACES OF 8E1/DS1 IDU 1+0 optional distributor subrack to ODU Power supply OS 18 E1/DS1 NMS G.703 + Audio 2 NMS V.11 + Audio 1
User service channels Alarms Housekeeping INTERFACES OF 16E1/DS1 IDU 1+0 optional distributor subrack
to ODU Power supply OS 916 E1/DS1 18 E1/DS1 User service channels Alarms Housekeeping INTERFACES OF E3/DS3 IDU 1+0 optional distributor subrack to ODU Power supply OS E3/DS3 NMS G.703 + Audio 2 NMS V.11 + Audio 1
NMS G.703 + Audio 2 NMS V.11 + Audio 1
User service channels Alarms Housekeeping INTERFACES OF ETHERNET + 8E1/DS1 IDU 1+0 optional distributor subrack
to ODU Power supply Ethernet 18 E1/DS1 User service channels OS Alarms Housekeeping Fig. 21. Station layout of 9400AWY (1+0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 71 / 332
N.B.
Fig. 21. shows the solution with integrated antenna; antenna can be also external (see point e ) herebelow) Power supply: see para.24.4.1 on page 107 OS: see para.24.4.12 on page 120 ECT: (not shown in Fig. 21. ) see para.24.4.11 on page 119 Access: 18 E1/DS1 : see para.24.4.3 on page 108 916 E1/DS1 : see para.24.4.4 on page 109 E3/DS3 : see para.24.4.5 on page 110 Ethernet : see para.24.4.6 on page 110 User service channels : see para.24.4.7 on page 111 Alarms Housekeeping : see para.24.4.8 on page 114 NMS V.11 + Audio 1 : see para.24.4.9 on page 117 NMS G.703 + Audio 2 : see para.24.4.10 on page 118
Equipment provisioning: a) 1+0 IDU: b) c) d) e) 8 E1/DS1 : see para.23.1 on page 88 16 E1/DS1 : see para.23.2 on page 89 E3/DS3 : see para.23.3 on page 90 Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 : see para.23.4 on page 91
Optional distributor subrack: see chapter 25 on page 135 IDU accessories and installation materials: refer to the Installation Handbook ODU: see para.26.3 on page 140 Antenna: see paragraphs: 26.4.1 on page 150 (1+0 configuration with integrated antenna) 26.5 on page 156 (Integrated antenna part list) or 26.4.4 on page 154 (Configuration with separated antenna)
f)
Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials: see para.26.6 on page 158
Equipment block diagram: see para. 11.2.1 on page 37.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 72 / 332
21.5 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1)

21.5.1 Introduction In 9400AWY 1+1 system, IDU configurations and ODU configurations are independent from each other, and can be combined in any way. IDU 1+1 IDU EXTENSION UNIT front interconnections access IDU MAIN UNIT ODU CH 1 ODU CH 0
IDU CONFIGURATIONS: 1+1 & 8E1/DS1 1+1 & 16E1/DS1 1+1 & E3/DS3 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1/DS1
ODU CONFIGURATIONS: 1+1 HSB SD 1+1 HSB one antenna 1+1 FD Double Antenna AP 1+1 FD one antenna AP
Fig. 22. IDU and ODU configurations in 9400AWY 1+1 system For this reason: IDU 1+1 station layouts are described in para.21.5.2 on page 74 ODU 1+1 station layouts are described in para.21.5.3 on page 77
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 73 / 332
21.5.2 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) IDU Following Fig. 23. thru Fig. 26. show layouts and connections of IDU configurations previously defined.
Power supply (2 connections): see para.24.4.1 on page 107 OS: see para.24.4.12 on page 120 ECT: (not shown in figures) see para.24.4.11 on page 119 Access: 18 E1/DS1 : see para.24.4.3 on page 108 916 E1/DS1 : see para.24.4.4 on page 109 E3/DS3 : see para.24.4.5 on page 110 Ethernet : see para.24.4.6 on page 110 User service channels : see para.24.4.7 on page 111 Alarms Housekeeping : see para.24.4.8 on page 114 NMS V.11 + Audio 1 : see para.24.4.9 on page 117 NMS G.703 + Audio 2 : see para.24.4.10 on page 118
Equipment provisioning: a) 1+1 IDU: b) c) 8 E1/DS1 : see para.23.5 on page 92 16 E1/DS1 : see para.23.6 on page 94 E3/DS3 : see para.23.7 on page 96 Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 : see para.23.8 on page 98
Optional distributor subrack: see chapter 25 on page 135 IDU accessories and installation materials: refer to the Installation Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 74 / 332
INTERFACES OF 8E1/DS1 IDU 1+1

optional distributor subrack to ODU CH 0
Power supply
IDU equipment block diagram: see Fig. 11. on page 40. Fig. 23. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & 8E1/DS1
INTERFACES OF 16E1/DS1 IDU 1+1 optional distributor subrack to ODU CH 0
Power supply
IDU equipment block diagram: see Fig. 13. on page 42. Fig. 24. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & 16E1/DS1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 75 / 332

OS
to ODU CH 1 NMS G.703 + Audio 2 NMS V.11 + Audio 1
18 E1/DS1 User service channels
Alarms Housekeeping
to ODU CH 1
916 E1/DS1 OS 18 E1/DS1 User service channels Alarms Housekeeping
INTERFACES OF E3/DS3 IDU 1+1 optional distributor subrack to ODU CH 0

Power supply
IDU equipment block diagram: see Fig. 16. on page 44. Fig. 25. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & E3/DS3
INTERFACES OF Ethernet + 8E1/DS1 IDU 1+1 optional distributor subrack to ODU CH 0
Power supply
IDU equipment block diagram: see Fig. 11. on page 40. Fig. 26. Station layout of IDU 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1/DS1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 76 / 332

OS
to ODU CH 1 E3/DS3 NMS G.703 + Audio 2 NMS V.11 + Audio 1
User service channels Alarms Housekeeping

OS
to ODU CH 1 NMS G.703 + Audio 2 NMS V.11 + Audio 1
18 E1/DS1 Ethernet User service channels Alarms Housekeeping
21.5.3 Layouts and connections of 9400AWY (1+1) ODU
21.5.3.1 ODU (1+1) HSBSD or FDDA AP with two antennas Antenna (2) Antenna (1)
ODU CH 0 to IDU EXTENSION UNIT N.B.
Figure shows the solution with integrated antennas; antennas can be also external (see point b ) herebelow) Fig. 27. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSBSD or FDDA AP with two antennas
Equipment provisioning: a) b) ODU (x2): see para.26.3 on page 140 Antenna (x2): see paragraphs: c) 26.4.1 on page 150 (1+0 configuration with integrated antenna) 26.5 on page 156 (Integrated antenna part list) or 26.4.4 on page 154 (Configuration with separated antenna)
Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials (x2): see para.26.6 on page 158
ODU Equipment block diagram: see: Fig. 17. on page 45 (1+1 HSBSD) Fig. 19. on page 46 (1+1 FDDA AP)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 77 / 332
21.5.3.2 ODU (1+1) HSB or with one antenna (1338 GHz) COUPLER
ANTENNA
ODU CH 0
ODU CH 1
to IDU EXTENSION UNIT
to IDU MAIN UNIT
Fig. 28. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB with one antenna (1338 GHz) Equipment provisioning: a) b) ODU (x2): see para.26.3.2 on page 144 Antenna and coupler: see paragraphs: 26.4.2 on page 152 [1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (1338 GHz)] 26.5 on page 156 (Integrated antenna part list)
c)
ODU Equipment block diagram: see: Fig. 18. on page 45 (1+1 HSB)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 78 / 332
21.5.3.3 ODU (1+1) HSB with not integrated antenna (78 GHz)
ODU CH 1
COUPLER
ANTENNA
ODU CH 0
to IDU MAIN UNIT to IDU EXTENSION UNIT Fig. 29. Station layout of ODU (1+1) HSB with not integrated antenna (78 GHz) Equipment provisioning: a) b) ODU (x2): see para.26.3.1 on page 141 Antenna and Coupler: c) antenna: at Customer choice Tab. 69. on page 153 (Coupler and related items part list)
ODU Equipment block diagram: see: Fig. 18. on page 45 (1+1 HSB)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 79 / 332
21.5.3.4 ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna Double Polar Antenna
Fig. 30. Station layout of ODU (1+1) FDAP with one double polar external antenna Equipment provisioning: a) b) ODU (x2): see para.26.3 on page 140 Connection of Double Polar External Antenna: see para.26.4.4 on page 154 (Configuration with separated antenna) Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials: see para.26.6 on page 158
c)
ODU Equipment block diagram: see Fig. 20. on page 46
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 80 / 332
22 IDU PART LIST For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship. On issue date of this handbook, P/Ns of IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units for 2460V power supply are not available.
This chapter gives reference information regarding the IDU equipments items, that are referenced to by the other parts of the handbook. For each item this information is given in following Tab. 22. : Ref.[x] Technical Code is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item Technical part number of the item N.B.: The correspondance between Commercial Codes and associated Technical Codes, if any, is given in Chapter 28 Commercial Codes on page 167, which describes also the usage of Technical Codes and correspondent Commercial Codes. The last two Technical Code letters stand for a feasible alternative, they might differentiate two items even though still functionally compatible. For this reason the indicated Technical Code does not include the last two letters (replaced by **). Technical Description Technical Description of the item. The correspondance between Commercial Descriptions and associated Technical Descriptions, if any, is given in Chapter 28 Commercial Codes on page 167. Label used by Software to identify the item (see para.42.1.2.4 on page 230). Max quantity for each terminal. Note: the effective types and quantities of the listed items are given in chapter 23 on page 87 IDU provisioning, according to the envisaged system configurations.
Remote inventory label
Max Q.ty
N.B.
explanatory note in Tab. 23. on page 86
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 81 / 332
Tab. 22. IDU part list Ref. Technical Code Technical Description Remote inventory label Max Q.ty N.B.
ETSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (48/60V POWER SUPPLY) [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] 3DB 06602 AB** 3DB 06603 AB** 3DB 06604 AB** 3DB 06605 AB** 3DB 06613 AB** 3DB 06614 AB** 3DB 06615 AB** 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU E3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU E3 48/60V PSU M4860S M4860S + P8E1 M4860S + P1E3 M4860S + P2DATAS E4860S E4860S+ P8E1 E4860S+ P1E3 1 1
ETSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (24V POWER SUPPLY) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] 3DB 06616 AB** 3DB 06617 AB** 3DB 06618 AB** 3DB 06619 AB** 3DB 06623 AB** 3DB 06624 AB** 3DB 06620 AB** 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 16E1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU E3 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 24V PSU EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU EXT IDU 16E1 24V PSU EXT IDU E3 24V PSU table continues M24S M24S+ P8E1 M24S + P1E3 M24S + P2DATAS E24S E24S+ P8E1 E24S+ P1E3 1 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 82 / 332
Ref.
Technical Code
Technical Description
Max Q.ty
N.B.
ANSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (48/60V POWER SUPPLY) [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] 3DB 06790 AA** 3DB 06791 AA** 3DB 06792 AA** 3DB 06793 AA** 3DB 06794 AA** 3DB 06795 AA** 3DB 06796 AA** 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU DS3 48/60V PSU M4860S M4860S + P8DS1 M4860S + P1DS3 M4860S + P2DATAS E4860S E4860S+ P8DS1 E4860S+ P1DS3 1 1
ANSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS (24V POWER SUPPLY) [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] 3DB 06797 AA** 3DB 06798 AA** 3DB 06799 AA** 3DB 06800 AA** 3DB 06802 AA** 3DB 06803 AA** 3DB 06801 AA** 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 16DS1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU DS3 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU EXT IDU 16DS1 24V PSU EXT IDU DS3 24V PSU FLASH CARD [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD table continues 1 M24S M24S+ P8DS1 M24S + P1DS3 M24S + P2DATAS E24S E24S+ P8DS1 E24S+ P1DS3 1 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 83 / 332
Ref.
Technical Code
Max Q.ty
N.B.
CABLES FOR 1+1 FRONT INTERCONNECTIONS [35] [36] [37] [38] [39] 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06632 AA** 3CC13659 AA** 3DB 06593 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 E3/DS3 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS [40] [41] [42] [43] [44] [45] 3DB 05583 AA** 3DB 05585 AA** 3CC 08061 AA** 3CC 08062 AA** 3CC 07810 AA** 3CC 08061 AB** DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.0/2.3 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.6/5.6 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM non EMC 3U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM EMC DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR BNC UPGRADE KITS [46] [47] [48] [49] [50] 3DB 06608 AA** 3DB 06609 AA** 3DB 06610 AA** 3DB 10042 AA** 3DB 10043 AA** 16E1 UPGRADE KIT E3 UPGRADE KIT 10/100BT UPGRADE KIT 16DS1 UPGRADE KIT DS3 UPGRADE KIT EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES [51] [52] [53] [54] 3CC 07946 AA** 3DB 01398 AA** 3DB 01397 AA** 3DB 01399 AA** Telephone Handset Maintenance Tool Kit Installation Kit Tool Station Kit Tool table continues 1 1 1 1 P8E1 P1E3 P2DATAS P8DS1 P1DS3 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 2 2 1
f b, f g h
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 84 / 332
Ref.
Technical Code
Technical Description SOFTWARE PACKAGES
Max Q.ty
N.B.
[55] [56]
3DB 06690 AA** 3DB 06690 AB** 3DB 04799 AC** 3DB 04799 AE** 3DB 04799 AF**
SWP REG. 9400AWY R2.0 CDROM SWP REG. 9400AWY R2.0.2 CDROM SWP OPTICSIM WTD SNMP V218 CDROM SWP OPTICSIM WTD SNMP V220 CDROM SWP OPTICSIM WTD SNMP V221 CDROM OEM SOFTWARE LICENCES
1 1
i j k l m
3DB 06819 AA** 3DB 06820 AA** 3DB 06821 AA**
SWL ULS R2 FEE SWLLCT 9400AWY R2.0 FEE SWLRCT 9400AWY R2.0 FEE RACKS
3DB 04656 AA** 3DB 04657 AA** 1AD 03905 0001
ETSI rack H 2200 ETSI rack H 2000 RACK ASSEMBLY 19 INCHES DOCUMENTATION
3DB 06687 AA**
DCP 9400AWY 2.0 CD_ROM
INSTALLATION MATERIALS: refer to Installation Handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 85 / 332
Tab. 23. Notes to Tab. 22. N.B. Explanation With respect to ED.01 of this handbook, all P/Ns of ETSI IDU MAIN AND EXTENSION UNITS: for 48/60V POWER SUPPLY (REF.[1] to [7] in Tab. 22. on page 82) and for 24V POWER SUPPLY (REF.[8] to [14] in Tab. 22. on page 82) have been changed: from 3DB xxxxx AA** to 3DB xxxxx AB** E.g. the P/N of 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU (REF.[1] in Tab. 22. on page 82) has been changed: from 3DB 06602 AA** to 3DB 06602 AB** WARNING: The use of the units with the new P/N (3DB xxxxx AB) is mandatory when the used SWP version is 2.0.1 The use of the units with the old P/N (3DB xxxxx AA) is possible only when the used SWP version is = 2.0.0
b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
Please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship The possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be supported by each flash card type is described in tables following point [5] on page 27 Cables Ref.[36] and [37] in alternative (HP= High Performance) See chapter 25 on page 135 See para.24.6 on page 125 See chapter 32 on page 177 See para.33.2.2 on page 180 For versions 2.0.0 and 2.0.1 For versions 2.0.2 For version 2.0.0 For version 2.0.1 For versions 2.0.2 Refer to CT Operators Handbook for details See para. C.2.1 on page 318 for details
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 86 / 332
23 IDU PROVISIONING For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship. On issue date of this handbook, IDU provisioning with IDU MAIN and EXTENSION units for 2460V power supply is not available.
This chapter describes the IDU provisioning according to the system configurations: Configuration Tributaries 8 E1 / DS1 16 E1 / DS1 1+0 E3 / DS3 Ethernet + 8E1 / DS1 8 E1 / DS1 16 E1 / DS1 1+1 E3 / DS3 Ethernet + 8 E1 / DS1 23.7 23.8 96 98 23.3 23.4 23.5 23.6 90 91 92 94 paragraph 23.1 23.2 page 88 89
Note for all tables: Technical Code Technical part number of the item N.B.: The correspondance between Commercial Codes and associated Technical Codes, if any, is given in Chapter 28 Commercial Codes on page 167, which describes also the usage of Technical Codes and correspondent Commercial Codes. The last two Technical Code letters stand for a feasible alternative, they might differentiate two items even though still functionally compatible. For this reason the indicated Technical Code does not include the last two letters (replaced by **). Technical Description Technical Description of the item. The correspondance between Commercial Descriptions and associated Technical Descriptions, if any, is given in Chapter 28 Commercial Codes on page 167.
The mechanical structure adopted comply with ETSI/19 standard practice. This IDU can be also inserted in a standard ETSI rack, or placed on a desk, or mounted on a wall.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to the Installation Handbook for the provisioning of items that depend on the installation choices.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 87 / 332
23.1 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning

a b
Fig. 31. 1+0 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition a) 1+0 & 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 24. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 24. 1+0 & 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) Item (pos = position in Fig. 31. ) Power ETSI pos Technical Description Technical Code Supply tributaries 48/60 V 24 V 8E1 (nb1) 8E1 (nb1) a 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD
3DB 06602 AB** 3DB 06616 AB** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA**
Ref. (N.B.) [1] [8] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)
4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD

8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD
any
nb1
8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 4 QAM FLASH CARD

16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD
1
(choice)
b)
1+0 & 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 25. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 25. 1+0 & 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) Item (pos = position in Fig. 31. ) Power ANSI pos Technical Description Technical Code Supply tributaries 48/60 V 24 V 8DS1 (nb1) 8DS1 (nb1) a 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU
3DB 06790 AA** 3DB 06797 AA** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA**
Ref. (N.B.) [15] [22] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)

any
nb1

1
(choice)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(N.B.)
reference to column Ref. in Tab. 22. on page 82.
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb1 (IDU basic), to Tab. 6. on page 28
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 88 / 332

a
Fig. 32. 1+0 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU: composition a) 1+0 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 26. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 26. 1+0 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) Item (pos = position in Fig. 32. ) Power ETSI pos Technical Description Technical Code Supply tributaries 48/60 V 24 V 16E1 (nb2) 16E1 (nb2) a 1+0 IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16E1 24V PSU
Ref. (N.B.) [2] [9] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)

any
nb2

1
(choice)
b)
Tab. 27. 1+0 & 16DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) Item (pos = position in Fig. 32. ) Power ANSI pos Technical Description Technical Code Supply tributaries 48/60 V 24 V 16DS1 (nb2) 16DS1 (nb2) a 1+0 IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16DS1 24V PSU
Ref. (N.B.) [16] [23] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)

any
nb2

1
(choice)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(N.B.)
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb2 (IDU with tributary 916 E1/DS1), to Tab. 7. on page 29
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 89 / 332
23.3 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning

a b
Fig. 33. 1+0 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition a) 1+0 & E3 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 28. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 28. 1+0 IDU & E3 equipment provisioning (ETSI) Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V any ETSI tributaries E3 (nb3) E3 (nb3) nb3 Item (pos = position in Fig. 33. ) pos a Technical Description 1+0 IDU E3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU E3 24V PSU 4 QAM FLASH CARD b
Technical Code 3DB 06604 AB** 3DB 06618 AB** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA**
Ref. (N.B.) [3] [10] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
b)
1+0 & DS3 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 29. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 29. 1+0 IDU & DS3 equipment provisioning (ANSI) Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V any ANSI tributaries DS3 (nb3) DS3 (nb3) nb3 Item (pos = position in Fig. 33. ) pos a Technical Description 1+0 IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU DS3 24V PSU 4 QAM FLASH CARD b
Technical Code 3DB 06792 AA** 3DB 06799 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA**
Ref. (N.B.) [17] [24] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
(N.B.)
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb3 (IDU with tributary E3/DS3), to Tab. 8. on page 30 WARNING: E3/DS3 tributaries can be supported only by: 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 90 / 332
23.4 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning
a
Fig. 34. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition a) 1+0 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 30. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 30. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) Item (pos = position in Fig. 34. ) Power ETSI pos Technical Description Technical Code Supply tributaries 48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) 24 V Ethernet (nb4) a 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 24V PSU
Ref. (N.B.) [4] [11] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)

any
nb4

1
(choice)
b)
1+0 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 31. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 31. 1+0 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI) Item (pos = position in Fig. 34. ) Power ANSI pos Technical Description Technical Code Supply tributaries 48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) a 24 V Ethernet (nb4) 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V PSU
Ref. (N.B.) [18] [25] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34]
Q.ty 1
(choice)

any
nb4

1
(choice)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(N.B.)
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb4 (IDU with tributary Ethernet), to Tab. 9. on page 31
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 91 / 332

c e f a b
a)
1+1 & 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 32. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 32. 1+1 & 8E1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V 48/60 V 24 V ETSI tributaries 8E1 (nb1) 8E1 (nb1) 8E1 (nb1) 8E1 (nb1) Item (pos = position in Fig. 35. ) pos a c Technical Description 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD any nb1 b 8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD any e (N.B.) f d 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1 Technical Code 3DB 06602 AB** 3DB 06616 AB** 3DB 06613 AB** 3DB 06623 AB** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06632 AA** 3CC13659 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [1] [8] [5] [12] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [39] 1 1
(choice)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 92 / 332
Fig. 35. 1+1 & 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition
Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
1
(choice)
b)
Tab. 33. 1+1 & 8DS1 IDU IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)
Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V 48/60 V 24 V
ANSI tributaries 8DS1 (nb1) 8DS1 (nb1) 8DS1 (nb1) 8DS1 (nb1)
Item (pos = position in Fig. 35. ) pos a c Technical Description 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD Technical Code 3DB 06790 AA** 3DB 06797 AA** 3DB 06794 AA** 3DB 06802 AA** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06632 AA** 3CC13659 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [15] [22] [19] [26] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [39] 1 1
(choice)
Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
any
nb1
8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD
1
(choice)
any
100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1
e f
(N.B.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 93 / 332

c e e f a b
a)
1+1 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 34. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 34. 1+1 & 16E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V 48/60 V 24 V ETSI tributaries 16E1 (nb2) 16E1 (nb2) 16E1 (nb2) 16E1 (nb2) Item (pos = position in Fig. 36. ) pos a c Technical Description 1+0 IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16E1 24V PSU EXT IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 16E1 24V PSU 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD any nb2 b 8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD any e (N.B.) f d 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1 Technical Code 3DB 06603 AB** 3DB 06617 AB** 3DB 06614 AB** 3DB 06624 AB** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06632 AA** 3CC13659 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [2] [9] [6] [13] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [39] 1 2
(choice)
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb2 (IDU with tributary 916 E1), to Tab. 7. on page 29
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 94 / 332
Fig. 36. 1+1 & 16 E1/DS1 IDU: composition
Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
1
(choice)
b)
Tab. 35. 1+1 & 16DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)

Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V 48/60 V 24 V
ANSI tributaries 16DS1 (nb2) 16DS1 (nb2) 16DS1 (nb2) 16DS1 (nb2)
Item (pos = position in Fig. 36. ) pos a c Technical Description 1+0 IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16DS1 24V PSU EXT IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 16DS1 24V PSU 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD Technical Code 3DB 06791 AA** 3DB 06798 AA** 3DB 06795 AA** 3DB 06803 AA** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06632 AA** 3CC13659 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [16] [23] [20] [27] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [39] 1 2
(choice)
Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
any
nb2
1
(choice)
any
e f
(N.B.)
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb2 (IDU with tributary 916 DS1), to Tab. 7. on page 29
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 95 / 332
23.7 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU composition and equipment provisioning

c e f a b
a)
1+1 & E3 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 36. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 36. 1+1 & E3 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V 48/60 V 24 V any ETSI tributaries E3 (nb3) E3 (nb3) E3 (nb3) E3 (nb3) nb3 any (N.B.) Item (pos = position in Fig. 37. ) pos a c Technical Description 1+0 IDU E3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU E3 24V PSU EXT IDU E3 48/60V PSU EXT IDU E3 24V PSU 4 QAM FLASH CARD b d e f 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 E3/DS3 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1 Technical Code 3DB 06604 AB** 3DB 06618 AB** 3DB 06615 AB** 3DB 06620 AB** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06593 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [3] [10] [7] [14] [33] [34] [35] [38] [39] Q.ty 1
(choice)
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb3 (IDU with tributary E3), to Tab. 8. on page 30 WARNING: E3 tributary can be supported only by: 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 96 / 332
Fig. 37. 1+1 & E3/DS3 IDU: composition
1
(choice)
1
(choice)
1 2 1
b)
1+1 & DS3 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 37. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 37. 1+1 & DS3 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)

Power Supply 48/60 V 24 V 48/60 V 24 V any
ANSI tributaries DS3 (nb3) DS3 (nb3) DS3 (nb3) DS3 (nb3) nb3
Item (pos = position in Fig. 37. ) pos a c Technical Description 1+0 IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU DS3 24V PSU EXT IDU DS3 48/60V PSU EXT IDU DS3 24V PSU 4 QAM FLASH CARD b d e f 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 E3/DS3 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1 Technical Code 3DB 06792 AA** 3DB 06799 AA** 3DB 06796 AA** 3DB 06801 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06593 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [17] [24] [21] [28] [33] [34] [35] [38] [39] Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
1
(choice)
1 2 1
any
(N.B.)
For Capacity and modulation supported according to IDU type and Flash Card, refer: nb3 (IDU with tributary DS3), to Tab. 8. on page 30 WARNING: DS3 tributary can be supported only by: 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 97 / 332
23.8 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU composition and equipment provisioning
c e f a b
a)
1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 38. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8E1 IDU equipment provisioning (ETSI) Power Supply ETSI tributaries Item (pos = position in Fig. 38. ) pos Technical Description 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 24V PSU c EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD any nb4 b 8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD any e (N.B.) f d 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1 Technical Code 3DB 06605 AB** 3DB 06619 AB** 3DB 06613 AB** 3DB 06623 AB** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06632 AA** 3CC13659 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [4] [11] [5] [12] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [39] 1 1
(choice)
48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) 24 V 48/60 V 24 V Ethernet (nb4) 8E1 (nb4) 8E1 (nb4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 98 / 332
Fig. 38. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8 E1/DS1 IDU: composition
Q.ty 1
(choice)
1
(choice)
1
(choice)
b)
1+1 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning shown in Tab. 39. below is done according to the voltage of primary power supply:
Tab. 39. 1+1 & Ethernet + 8DS1 IDU equipment provisioning (ANSI)
Power Supply
ANSI tributaries
Item (pos = position in Fig. 38. ) pos Technical Description 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD Technical Code 3DB 06793 AA** 3DB 06800 AA** 3DB 06794 AA** 3DB 06802 AA** 3DB 06571 AA** 3DB 06572 AA** 3DB 06606 AA** 3DB 06607 AA** 3DB 06573 AA** 3DB 06574 AA** 3DB 06592 AB** 3DB 06632 AA** 3CC13659 AA** 3DB 06594 AA** Ref. (N.B.) [18] [25] [19] [26] [29] [30] [31] [32] [33] [34] [35] [36] [37] [39] 1 1
(choice)
Q.ty
48/60 V Ethernet (nb4) a 24 V 48/60 V 24 V Ethernet (nb4) 8E1 (nb4) 8E1 (nb4) c
1
(choice)
1
(choice)
any
nb4
1
(choice)
any
e f
(N.B.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 99 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
100 / 332
24 IDU OPERATIVE INFORMATION For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding the IDU shelfs units available with the equipment version this handbook issue is relevant to, for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes. Information given is relevant to assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, as well as the usage description of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons). This chapter is organized as follows: N.B. Cautions to avoid equipment damage IDU Main Unit front and rear views and access points IDU Extension Unit front and rear views and access points Description of User interfaces and connectors pinout Flash Card Installation of tributary plugins IDU Main unit dipswitches For detailed operative information regarding: equipment installation and commissioning, please refer to: 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide equipment maintenance, please refer to section 3 MAINTENANCE on page 173. on page 102 on page 103 on page 105 on page 107 on page 124 on page 125 on page 133
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 101 / 332
24.1 Cautions to avoid equipment damage

a) Unit assemblies Each of the IDU MAIN UNIT and IDU EXTENSION UNIT is assembled inside its own box and must be considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly is supplied by Alcatel as it is and must never be disassembled , with the exception of operations described in para.24.6, that must be carried out exactly as described. b) Antistatic protection device kit Whenever is necessary to handle spare parts and boards out of their own box, this kit (see Fig. 146. on page 310) must be always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoid the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges. c) Screw fixing In normal operation conditions, all screws (for unit box closing, cable fixing, etc.) must be always tightened to avoid item detachment and to ensure the equipment EMIEMC performance. The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 % 2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking. d) IDUODU cable disconnection / connection Before to disconnect or connect the IDUODU cable (at IDU or ODU side) switch off the corresponding IDU Main Unit or IDU Extension Unit. e) Craft Terminal connection To connect the CT cable (at IDU Main Units F or OS Ethernet interface and/or PC side): verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off it) connect suitable cable to IDU Main Units F or OS Ethernet interface and PC side now the PC can be safely switched on. f) Craft Terminal disconnection To disconnect the CT cable (at IDU Main Units F or OS Ethernet interface and/or PC side): perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications (details in para.34.3.6 on page 195) close all other running applications, if any switch off the PC now the cable can be safely disconnected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 102 / 332
24.2 IDU Main Unit front and rear views and access points
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 20 Fig. 39. IDU Main Unit front and rear views Tab. 40. IDU Main Unit external interfaces and access points Ref. Fig. 39. (1) Connector or item detail SubD 3 Male Interface / Explanation Station Battery input ON/OFF switch: general power supply switch connector for 100 pin SCSI flat cable (used only in 1+1 configurations) according to equipped plugin (if any): when no plugin equipped, the slot is closed by a metal plate (inside the panel rear side) when 916 E1/DS1 plugin is equipped when E3/DS3 plugin is equipped
Details para.24.4.1 on page 107 I O ON OFF
(2)
(3)
no pin usage by Customer
metal plate is mandatory to ensure EMIEMC performance para.24.4.4 on page 109 para.24.4.5 on page 110 para.24.4.6 on page 110
(4)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 40. continues ...
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 103 / 332
when Ethernet plugin is equipped
.... Tab. 40. continues Ref. Fig. 39. (5) (6) (7) Connector or item detail SubD 15 Female SubD 15 Female N 50 ohm Interface / Explanation Alarms Housekeeping NMS V.11 + Audio 1 for IDUODU cable Alarm attending pushbutton: this pushbutton turns OFF LEDs MAJ/MIN and turns ON yellow LED ATTD Lamp Test pushbutton: it allows to HW test the LEDs of the unit Equipment Controller Reset pushbutton Details para.24.4.8 on page 114 para.24.4.9 on page 117 para.24.4.2 on page 107 para.35.5.2.2 on page 202
(8)
(9)
para.34.2.1 on page 185 possible use inside corrective maintenance
(10)
(11)
EOW telephone RJ 11
chapter 32 on page 177
(12)
OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT
para.24.4.12 on page 120
(13)
Debug RJ45 for Factory use only para.24.4.11 on page 119 para.24.4.3 on page 108 para.24.4.7 on page 111 para.24.4.10 on page 118 para.24.4.13 on page 121 para.24.5 on page 124 for factory use Fig. 147. on page 311
(14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) + (20) (A)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SubD 9 Female SubD 37 Female SubD 15 Female SubD 15 Female
ECT RS232 18 E1/DS1 User Service Channels NMS G.703 + Audio 2 LEDs Flash Card
(B) (C)
label label
Data Matrix codification unit identification
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 104 / 332
24.3 IDU Extension Unit front and rear views and access points
1
B Fig. 40. IDU Extension Unit front and rear views Tab. 41. IDU Extension Unit external interfaces and access points Ref. Fig. 40. (1) Connector or item detail SubD 3 (male) Interface / Explanation Station Battery input ON/OFF switch: general power supply switch connector for 100 pin SCSI flat cable according to equipped plugin (if any): when no plugin equipped, the slot is closed by a metal plate (inside the panel rear side) when 916 E1/DS1 plugin is equipped when E3/DS3 plugin is equipped (5) Tab. 41. continues ... N 50 ohm for IDUODU cable
Details para.24.4.1 on page 107 I O ON OFF
(2)
(3)
no pin usage by Customer
(4)
metal plate is mandatory to ensure EMIEMC performance para.24.4.4 on page 109 para.24.4.5 on page 110 para.24.4.2 on page 107
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 105 / 332
... . Tab. 41. continues Ref. Fig. 40. (6) Connector or item detail Interface / Explanation Lamp Test pushbutton: it allows to HW test the LEDs of the unit SubD 37 Female SubD 15 Female label label 18 E1/DS1 User Service Channels LEDs Data Matrix codification unit identification Details para.34.2.1 on page 185 para.24.4.3 on page 108 para.24.4.7 on page 111 para.24.4.14 on page 123 for factory use Fig. 147. on page 311
(7) (8) (9) (B) (C)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 106 / 332
24.4 Description of User interfaces and connectors pinout

24.4.1 Power Supply connector pinout Present on the front panel of the: IDU Main Unit (position (1) in Fig. 39. on page 103) IDU Extension Unit (position (1) in Fig. 40. on page 105) Tab. 42. Power supply connections
Pin A1 A2 A3
Function + BATTERY GROUND BATTERY
24.4.2 Connector for IDUODU cable Present on the front panel of the: IDU Main Unit (position (7) in Fig. 39. on page 103) IDU Extension Unit (position (5) in Fig. 40. on page 105) The ODU is connected to the IDU side through this connector (male N 90 50 ohm) by a suitable cable.
ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) The Ntype connector carries +48 DC voltage for ODU power supply. Do not connect measuring instruments directly.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 107 / 332
24.4.3 E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pinout Present on the front panel of the: IDU Main Unit (position (15) in Fig. 39. on page 103) IDU Extension Unit (position (7) in Fig. 40. on page 105) For E1/DS1 tributaries the same input and output wires are used for 120 ohm (balanced) and 75 ohm (unbalanced) (see Tab. 43. herebelow); the selection between the two options is possible with CT/OS. Tab. 43. E1/DS1 tributaries (1 to 8) connector pinout pin 1
Description Not Used IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. GND Not Used Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Pin # 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pin # 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
Description Not Used Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Not Used Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib.
in 75 ohm unbalanced configuration Out Trib.n is the ground of Trib.n.
For system wiring solutions, refer to chapter 25 on page 135 Distributor subracks
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 108 / 332
24.4.4 E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pinout Present on the front panel of the: IDU Main Unit (position (4) in Fig. 39. on page 103) IDU Extension Unit (position (4) in Fig. 40. on page 105) when the 916 E1 plugin or the 916 DS1 plugin is equipped. For E1/DS1 tributaries the same input and output wires are used for 120 ohm (balanced) and 75 ohm (unbalanced) (see Tab. 44. herebelow); the selection between the two options is possible with CT/OS. Tab. 44. E1/DS1 tributaries (9 to 16) connector pinout
pin 1
Description Not Used IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ IN+ Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. GND Not Used Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Out+ Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pin # 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN
Description Not Used Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Not Used Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Out Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. Trib. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
In 75 ohm unbalanced configuration Out Trib.n is the ground of Trib.n.
For system wiring solutions, refer to chapter 25 on page 135 Distributor subracks
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 109 / 332
24.4.5 E3/DS3 tributary Present on the front panel of the: IDU Main Unit (position (4) in Fig. 39. on page 103) IDU Extension Unit (position (4) in Fig. 40. on page 105) when the E3 plugin or the DS3 plugin is equipped.
Two coaxial 1.0/2.3 Siemens connectors are dedicated to the E3/DS3 input/output; the impedance is 75 ohm unbalanced. The line code is HDB3. If the connector required is a BNC, a suitable adapter must be used. The adapter is a 6 cm cable with a 1.0/2.3 locking connector and a BNC connector. 24.4.6 Ethernet tributaries Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (4) in Fig. 39. on page 103) when the Ethernet plugin is equipped.
For the Ethernet user data interfaces the following table summarizes the meaning of the LEDs integrated in the RJ45 connectors: Tab. 45. RJ45 connectors leds for Ethernet user data interfaces Display Function Link and activity status
Color
Ledoff
Ledon
Led blinking
LEFT LED
Green
Link down No TX/RX activity detected
Link up
RIGHT LED
Yellow
activity
TX/RX activity detected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 110 / 332
24.4.7 User service channels (pinout and description) Present on the front panel of the: IDU Main Unit (position (16) in Fig. 39. on page 103) IDU Extension Unit (position (8) in Fig. 40. on page 105) User service channel can be used in one of the following modes (selectable by CT/OS): 64Kb/s V11 codirectional (data+clock); 64Kb/s codirectional G.703 asynchronous (i.e. TX and RX data are not necessarily synchronous. This mode includes DCE behavior); 64Kb/s V11 contradirectional (data+clock); 9.6Kb/s asynchronous V24/V28; 4.8Kb/s asynchronous V24/V28; 9.6Kb/s V11; 4.8Kb/s V11.
The pin function is shown in the table below. Tab. 46. User service channel connector pinout
pin 1
Pin # 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14 8 15
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Signal COD_RX + COD_RX COD_TX + COD_TX RX_ASY TX_ASY CC_RX + CC_RX RX_CK + RX_CK CC_TX + CC_TX CC_TCK + CC_TCK GND
Direction INPUT INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT INPUT INPUT BID BID OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT /
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 111 / 332
For V11 codirectional mode, refer to Fig. 41. for the interface description vs pinout.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL V11 CODIR < USER RADIO >
USER EQUIPMENT CC_RX + CC_RX RX_CK + RX_CK CC_TX + CC_TX CC_TCK + CC_TCK
IDU AWY
DATA CLOCK
DATA CLOCK
Fig. 41. User service channel: V11 codirectional interface For V11 contradirectional DCE mode, refer to Fig. 42. for the interface description vs pinout. Note that V11 contradirectional DTE mode (as the userequipment interface) is not supported.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL V11 CONTRADIR DCE < USER USER SUBORDINATE EQUIPMENT (DTE) CC_RX + CC_RX RX_CK + RX_CK CC_TX + CC_TX CC_TCK + CC_TCK RADIO > IDU AWY DCE
DATA CLOCK
DATA CLOCK
Fig. 42. User service channel: V11 contradirectional interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 112 / 332
For G.703 mode, refer to Fig. 43. for the interface description vs pinout.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL G.703
< USER USER EQUIPMENT
RADIO > IDU AWY
COD_RX+ DATA&CLOCK COD_RX
COD_TX+ COD_TX
DATA&CLOCK
Fig. 43. User service channel: G.703 interface For V24/V28 mode, refer to Fig. 44. for the interface description vs pinout.
USER SERVICE CHANNEL V28 < USER USER EQUIPMENT RADIO >
IDU AWY
DATA&CLOCK
RX_ASY
TX_ASY
DATA&CLOCK
Fig. 44. User service channel: V24/V28 interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 113 / 332
24.4.8 Alarms Housekeeping (pinout and description) Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (5) in Fig. 39. on page 103). The AlarmsHousekeeping SubD15 connector (pinout in following Tab. 47. ) is divided in: 3 summarizing discrete alarms equipment outputs (A_1 to A_3); see point [1] below 4 housekeeping controls equipment outputs (HK_O1 to HK_O4); see point [2] on page 115 6 housekeeping alarms equipment inputs (HK_I1 to HK_I6; see point [4] on page 116 1 common wire (COM) 1 ground (GND). Tab. 47. Alarms Housekeeping connector pinout pin 1 Pin 6 13 7 14 8 15 4 11 5 12 9 1 2 3 10 Signal HK_I1 HK_I2 HK_I3 HK_I4 HK_I5 HK_I6 HK_O1 HK_O2 HK_O3 HK_O4 COM A_1 A_2 A_3 GND OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT / Direction INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
[1]
SUMMARIZING DISCRETE ALARMS The 3 summarizing discrete alarms (equipment outputs) are defined as follows: A_1 IDU HW Failure alarm ( = IDU Main (or Extension unit) Card fail/missing + Loss of IDUODU cable + Loss of Tributaries) ODU Main Failure alarm ( = ODU Tx Failure + ODU Rx Failure) ODU Spare Failure alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A_2 A_3
For electrical characteristics refer to point [3] on page 115.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 114 / 332
[2]
HOUSEKEEPING CONTROLS For the 4 housekeeping controls (equipment outputs), it is possible to choose through CT not only the manual setting of each one of them, but also the association to one of the system alarms available in the CT menu lists (including: Major Alarm, Minor Alarm, Loss of Tributaries, Loss of IDUODU cable, Remote Defect Indication, Local Defect Indication, ODU alarm, Service Affecting Alarm, Signal Failure Alarm). For electrical characteristics refer to point [3] herebelow.
[3]
SUMMARIZING DISCRETE ALARMS & HOUSEKEEPING CONTROLS ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS The presence of an active output alarm corresponds to a closed relay contact with a common wire. The relay is compliant with the following electrical specification: alarm present the relay is closed: |V2| 2V, |I2| 50mA (the limit on the current defines the maximum current supported by the IDU circuit) alarm not present the relay is open: |I2| 0.2mA, |V2| 60V The limit on the voltage means that the customer is not allowed to force in this condition too large V2.
IDU
OUTn
ooo ooo
OUT2
I1
OUT1
V1
OUTCommon
Fig. 45. Equipment outputs (summarizing and housekeeping) Note 1: logic can be independently changed for each input and output (the relay is closed when the alarm is not present and is opened when the alarm is present) through CT configuration while for Summarizing outputs the default configuration is the only possibility. Note 2: when the power supply is down (and also when the power supply is on, but the SW hasnt yet initialized the HW), all the relays of the outputs of the alarms/housekeeping are in the open state (HW default condition).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 115 / 332
[4]
EQUIPMENT INPUTS The IDU is able to detect the status of commands coming from customers circuits. A common (in) signal is supplied by the customers circuit, and this signal is different from the one defined for equipment outputs. The customer can use two different schemes to provide the command: [case 1] relay [case 2] open collector Case 1 (relay)
IDU
ooo
in n
ooo
customer
I3 V3
in 1
out
V4
common (in)
customer ground Fig. 46. Equipment inputs relay scheme alarm present the customer relay is closed: 2V V3 0V, |I3| 10mA This means that the customers circuit guarantees that |V3| 2V and is allowed to drain from the IDU a 10mA max current; alarm not present the customer relay is open: |I3| 0.2mA. This means that the maximum current drained by the customers circuit is 0.2mA.
Case 2 (open collector)
IDU
ooo
in n
ooo
customer
I3 V3
in 1
V4
common (in)
customer ground
Fig. 47. Equipment inputs open collector scheme

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The IDU supplies a suitable negative voltage to the customers circuit: alarm present the customer transistor conduces (= closed): 2V V4 0V, |I3| 10mA. alarm not present the customer transistor doesnt conduce (=open): |I3| 0.2mA. This limits the max current that the customers circuit can drain.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 116 / 332
24.4.9 NMS V.11 Audio 1 (pinout and description) Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (6) in Fig. 39. on page 103).
The (NMS_V11+Audio1) interface has 9 pins dedicated to NMS and 6 pins dedicated to EOW analog party line. The NMS_V11 channel is a 64Kb/s; its working mode can be selected between: DTE: the data in and data out have to be synchronous, data out being the slave, CODIR (asynchronous): TX and RX are totally asynchronous (this mode includes DCE behavior).
Expected/transmitted Clock falling edge is in the middle of the data. Audio1 outputs can be squelched by CT/OS selection. Tab. 48. NMSV.11 + Audio 1 connector pinout
pin 1
Description RS422 data in (+) RS422 clock in (+) RS422 data out (+) RS422 clock out (+) GND NMS Audio1 signal from user (+) Audio1 signal to user (+) GND Audio
Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin # 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Description RS422 data in () RS422 clock in () RS422 data out () RS422 clock out () Audio1 signal from user () Audio1 signal to user () Not used
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 117 / 332
24.4.10 NMS G.703 Audio 2 (pinout and description) Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (17) in Fig. 39. on page 103). The (NMS_G703+Audio2) interface has 5 pins dedicated to NMS and 6 pins dedicated to EOW analog party line. The NMS_G703 channel is a 64Kb/s; its working mode can be selected between: DTE: G703 data in and G703 data out have to be synchronous, G703 data out being the slave, CODIR (asynchronous): G703 data in and G703 data out are totally asynchronous (this mode includes DCE behavior), Inframe: this configuration both disables the NMS_G703 interface and enables the insertion/extraction into/from the first E1/DS1 of the 64Kbit/s channel comingfrom/towards the uP. The insertion/extraction is relative to the first slot of the first tributary even if there is the possibility in the IDU ASIC to configure the desired slot. This setting is not applicable with unframed E1/DS1.
Audio2 outputs can be squelched by CT/OS selection. Tab. 49. NMSG.703 + Audio 2 connector pinout
pin 1
Description G703 data in (+) Not used G703 data out (+) Not used GND NMS Audio2 signal from user (+) Audio2 signal to user (+) GND Audio
Pin # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pin # 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Description G703 data in () Not used G703 data out () Not used Audio2 signal from user () Audio2 signal to user () Not used
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 118 / 332
24.4.11 ECT RS232 connector pinout Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (14) in Fig. 39. on page 103), and used to connect the Equipment Craft Terminal, through a suitable cable (supplied with the equipment). Tab. 50. ECT connections
pin 1 RS 232 (PC side) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RS 232 (IDU MAIN side) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 119 / 332
24.4.12 OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT connector pinout Present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (12) in Fig. 39. on page 103).
N.B.
Leds are not operative. Tab. 51. OS (or ECT) connections RJ45 (IDU MAIN side) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Tx + Tx Rx + Not used Not used Rx Not used Not used Color used White/Orange Orange White/Green Blue White/Blue Green White/Brown Brown RJ45 (OS side) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 120 / 332
24.4.13 IDU Main Unit LEDs summary Eight LEDs are present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (18) in Fig. 39. on page 103):
GREEN
RED
RED
GREEN
YELLOW
1) ON 2) RDI 3) MIN 4) EOW 5) ODU W 6) ATTD 7) MAJ 8) LDI
= Power ON (green) = Remote Defect Indication (red) = Minor Alarm (red) = Engineering Order Wire (bicolor: yellow if busy; green if free) = ODU Working (green) = Attended (yellow) = Major Alarm (red) = Local Defect Indication (red) Fig. 48. LEDs on the IDU Main Unit front panel
[1]
ON This green LED is ON when the Station Battery is connected, the ON/OFF switch is ON, and the internal DC/DC is working properly. RDI The Remote Defect Indication is a local indication of the Remote Equipment Failure alarms requiring consequent operator intervention. It is transmitted from the remote station to the local via the aggregate radio frame. In (1+0) configuration, RDI is formed in the remote station by the following roots : Loss of Signal of PDH Tributaries (E1, DS1, E3, DS3) Data plugin Card Fail Data plugin Card Missing E1/DS1 plugin Card Fail E1/DS1 plugin Card Missing E3/DS3 plugin Card Fail E3/DS3 plugin Card Missing Main Card Fail ODU Card Fail Transmission Function Failure (TxFail) Receiving Function Failure (RxFail) Provisioned Frequency incompatible with actual HW Provisioned TX Power incompatible with actual HW In (1+1) configuration, RDI is formed in the remote station by the following roots : Loss of Signal of PDH Tributaries (E1, DS1, E3, DS3) Cable Loss IDU (for both ODUs) Data plugin Card Fail 03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 121 / 332
[2]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED

GREEN
RED
RED
YELLOW
[3]
MIN Minor Alarm is the sum of the alarms to which the customer associates Low Severity weight through CT EOW This LED refers to the use of the EOW. Refer to chapter 32 on page 177 for details. N.B. In 1+1 configuration, the LED EOW lights on (yellow or green) if and only if the Main board is the active one as far as the EPS protection is concerned.
[4]
[5]
ODUW The ODUW led ON identifies ODU TX activity. It is OFF in case of: IDUODU Cable Loss alarm Mute function activated K_TPS command switchingoff related ODU in 1+1 HSB configuration ATTD The attended LED is ON when the acknowledgement button has been pushed MAJ Major Alarm is the sum of the alarms to which the customer associates High Severity (MAJOR and CRITICAL) weight by CT LDI The Local Defect Indication (LDI) has the purpose to show Local Equipment Failure requiring consequent actions by operators. The LDI roots are: Loss of Signal of PDH Tributaries (E1, DS1, E3, DS3) Cable Loss IDU Data plugin Card Fail Data plugin Card Missing E1/DS1 plugin Card Fail E1/DS1 plugin Card Missing E3/DS3 plugin Card Fail E3/DS3 plugin Card Missing Main Card Fail Extension Card Fail Extension Card missing ODU Card Fail Transmission Function Failure (TxFail) Receiving Function Failure (RxFail) Provisioned Frequency incompatible with actual HW Provisioned TX Power incompatible with actual HW
[6] [7]
[8]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The lamp test pushbutton (position (9) in Fig. 39. on page 103) allows the HW test of all LEDs.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 122 / 332
Data plugin Card Missing E1/DS1 plugin Card Fail E1/DS1 plugin Card Missing E3/DS3 plugin Card Fail E3/DS3 plugin Card Missing Main Card Fail Extension Card Fail Extension Card missing ODU Card Fail (for both ODUs) Transmission Function Failure (TxFail, for both ODUs) Receiving Function Failure (RxFail, for both ODUs) Provisioned Frequency incompatible with actual HW (for both ODUs) Provisioned TX Power incompatible with actual HW (for both ODUs)
24.4.14 IDU Extension Unit LEDs summary Two LEDs are present on the front panel of the IDU Extension Unit (position (9) in Fig. 40. on page 105):
GREEN
GREEN
1) ON
2) ODU W
Power ON (green) This green LED is ON when the Station Battery is connected, the ON/OFF switch is ON, and the internal DC/DC is working properly. ODU Working (green). The ODUW led ON identifies ODU TX activity. It is OFF in case of: IDUODU Cable Loss alarm Mute function activated K_TPS command switchingoff related ODU in 1+1 HSB configuration Fig. 49. LEDs on the IDU Extension Unit front panel
The lamp test pushbutton (position (6) in Fig. 40. on page 105) allows the HW test of all LEDs.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 123 / 332
24.5 Flash Card

24.5.1 General Refer to: point [1] on page 24 for a brief functional description point [5] on page 27 for the possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be supported by each flash card type. The Flash Card is housed inside the IDU Main Unit shelf (see position (19) in Fig. 39. on page 103). Fig. 50. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction CONNECTOR SIDE
INSERTION
TOP SIDE
Fig. 50. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) Whenever you have to handle flash card(s), wear always the Antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 146. on page 310) and connect its termination to a grounded structure, to avoid the possible damage of the flash card contents for electrostatic discharges. As shown in position (20) in Fig. 39. on page 103, a suitable metal cover, fixed to the IDU Main Unit shelf by three screws, is envisaged to ensure equipment EMIEMC performance and to avoid item detachment:
24.5.2 Flash Card identification The P/Ns for the possible Flash Card types are specified in the sublist FLASH CARD in Tab. 22. on page 82, which indicates, for each P/N, also the Flash Card Name : a) b) the Flash Card P/N is reported on the label affixed on it; moreover, the Flash Card Name is affixed on the label present on the front panel of the IDU Main Unit (position (A) in Fig. 39. on page 103):
flash card name label
24.5.3 Flash Card upgrade

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to the 9400AWY CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 (REF.[D] on page 319), chapter Flash Card upgrade .
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 124 / 332
24.6 Installation of tributary plugins

Please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship
24.6.1 Introduction When Customer orders a 9400AWY equipment, usually , if tributary plugins are included in the order, IDU Main unit and IDU Extension unit are delivered with the required plugins already mounted. In this case this procedure has no use. This procedure is used whenever, after the installation of a 9400AWY equipment with no plugin equipped, Customer needs to upgrade it adding tributary plugin. Fig. 51. on page 127 shows the tributary plugins presently available. Notice that: in 1+0 configuration, you can equip any of the plugin types into the IDU Main unit in 1+1 configuration, you can upgrade the system in one of the following ways: upgrade from 8 to 16 E1 tributaries: you must install the 916 E1/DS1 PLUGIN into both the: IDU Main unit IDU Extension unit upgrade to E3 tributaries: you must install the E3/DS3 PLUGIN into both the: IDU Main unit IDU Extension unit upgrade to Ethernet tributaries: you must install the ETHERNET PLUGIN into the IDU Main unit only.
Following Tab. 52. gives the compatibility between the upgrade kits and the IDU units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 125 / 332
Tab. 52. Upgrade Kits and IDU units compatibility UPGRADE KIT ETSI
16E1 UPGRADE KIT 3DB 06608 AA REF.[46] ETSI UNITS 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06602 AB REF.[1] EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06613 AB REF.[5] 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU 3DB 06616 AB REF.[8] EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU 3DB 06623 AB REF.[12] ANSI UNITS 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06790 AA REF.[15] EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 3DB 06794 AA REF.[19] 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 3DB 06797 AA REF.[22] EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 3DB 06802 AA REF.[26] E3 UPGRADE KIT 3DB 06609 AA REF.[47]
ANSI
16DS1 UPGRADE KIT 3DB 10042 AA REF.[49] DS3 UPGRADE KIT 3DB 10043 AA REF.[50]
10/100BT UPGRADE KIT 3DB 06610 AA REF.[48]
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
A = Allowed
NA = Not Allowed
REF.[x] in Tab. 22. on page 82
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 126 / 332
ETSI & ANSI
E3/DS3 PLUGIN supplied with the E3/DS3 UPGRADE KIT
connector for connection to board
arrows show position of 3 screws for plugin fixing to the board
arrows show position of 2 screws for plugin fixing to the front panel 916 E1/DS1 PLUGIN supplied with the 16 E1/DS1 UPGRADE KIT
N.B. this plugin has 2 connectors for connection to board
ETHERNET PLUGIN supplied with the 10/100BT UPGRADE KIT
Fig. 51. Tributary plugin views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 127 / 332
24.6.2 Procedure Drawings used to show operations are relevant to the IDU Main unit. Operations to be carried out for IDU Extension unit are exactly the same. Screw fixing In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:

Unit uninstallation and reinstallation In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall or reinstall the IDU unit (MAIN or EXTENSION) from/in the shelf, wall or desk assembly, please refer to the instructions given in the: 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook The following operations concern the IDU unit (MAIN or EXTENSION) to be upgraded: [1] Isolate the power supply, disconnect Craft Terminal [see point f ) on page 102] and disconnect all cables. Uninstall the unit and place it on a workbench If present, dismount both fixing brackets (Fig. 52. ), there are two screws for each:
[2] [3]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 52. Dismounting the fixing brackets
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 128 / 332
[4]
Undo the side screws (two on each side) shown in Fig. 53. : 2 screws for box cover fix
2 screws for box cover fix Fig. 53. Cover unfix [5] Rotating the removed fixing brackets into both the suitable covers side holes, slide the box cover out from the box base, as shown in Fig. 54. :
use of fixing bracket to release the cover Fig. 54. Release and sliding out the cover [6]
sliding out the cover
Wear the antistatic protection armlet and connect its termination to a grounded structure (see Fig. 146. on page 310). ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 129 / 332
[7]
Now, you can remove the cover (Fig. 55. ):
Fig. 55. Removing the cover [8] Dismount the metal plate which closes the plugin devoted hole (Fig. 56. ). In case the 916 E1/DS1 PLUGIN or the E3/DS3 PLUGIN has to be installed, take the two removed screws for their fixing.
unscrew the 2 screws ... .. and remove the metal plate (inside the panel rear side), ...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 56. Dismounting the metal plate
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 130 / 332
[9]
Get the plugin to be installed and prepare it for the insertion into the board. As far as the ETHERNET PLUGIN or the E3/DS3 PLUGIN is concerned, refer to Fig. 51. on page 127. The 916 E1/DS1 PLUGIN must be prepared as shown in figure below (i.e. without screw columns)
NO
YES Fig. 57. 916 E1/DS1 Tributary plugin preparation [10] Insert and fix the plugin as shown in Fig. 58. N.B. As far as the 916 E1/DS1 PLUGIN is concerned, use the two screw columns to fix it to the front plate.
.. insert the plugin in the board connector(s) and fix it to main board by three screws , ...
.. fix plugin to the front panel by the 2 screws or screw columns

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 58. Tributary plugin insertion and fix
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 131 / 332
[11] Reinsert the cover (reverse operation of Fig. 55. on page 130)
[12] Slide in the cover (reverse operation of Fig. 54. on page 129. The fixing brackets use is not necessary) [13] Now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet [14] Fix the cover (reverse operation of Fig. 53. on page 129) [15] If they were present, mount both fixing brackets (reverse operation of Fig. 52. on page 128) [16] Upgrade kit identification label After this upgrading, the Unit identification label placed on the box rear side [position (C) in Fig. 39. on page 103 for the IDU Main Unit, and in Fig. 40. on page 105 for the IDU Extension Unit] is no longer right to correctly identify the assembly as a whole. This could impact on sparepartstock management and maintenance. For this reason: if the upgrade kit is supplied with a suitable selfadhesive label (under study), stick it just on side of that already existing otherwise create a label writing the upgrade kit P/N on a selfadhesive sticker, and stick it just on side of that already existing.
[17] Reinstall the unit [18] Complete upgrade operations with: system cabling (it is different from that previous to upgrading). Refer to the Installation Handbook, according to the new hardware configuration system data redefinition (it is different from that previous to upgrading). Refer to the Operators Handbook and to the LineUp Guide, according to the new hardware configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 132 / 332
additional identification label of the upgrade kit
existing identification label of the basic unit
24.7 IDU Main unit dipswitches

Fig. 59. on page 134 shows the position of the dipswitchbanks placed on IDU MAIN unit top side; they are accessible opening the IDU MAIN unit box as explained in para.24.6 on page 125. In Fig. 59. , each dipswitchbank enlarged view shows the number of switches (24) and their ON position (ON means closed switch, OFF means open switch). Tab. 53. below indicates the standard and special setting of such dipswitchbanks. Usually, for standard operations, it is not necessary to access these dipswitchbanks. Units delivered from Alcatel factory have these dipswitchbanks set in the standard position.
Tab. 53. Setting of dipswitchbanks on IDU MAIN unit SPECIAL POSITION BANK SWITCH STANDARD POSITION
FOR ALCATEL INTERNAL USE ONLY

SETTING MEANING AND USAGE
1&2 1 I4 2 1&2 1&3&4 I5 2 I6 I7 ALL ALL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 133 / 332

OFF OFF ON Allows the MIB scratch. both ON Allows the MIB scratch and prevents EC from start / restart. OFF ON OFF OFF Note: in board new versions, this bank could be no longer present.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
I5
03 I4 position FRONT SIDE
FRONT SIDE
I7
I4
Fig. 59. Dipswitchbanks on IDU MAIN unit
3DB 06687 BA AA
3DB06395AAAA HDZZQ Ed.02)
332
(internal reference
I6
134 / 332
25 DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACKS
For the physical connection of the User signal cables to the main tributaries connectors of the IDU Main and Extension units, two main solutions are envisaged: usage of the Customer Plant Distributor racks, connected to the IDU main tributaries connectors by means of Customer own cables or cables supplied by Alcatel; usage of Alcatel distributor subracks, to be housed in the same rack where 9400AWY IDU shelf is installed. Following Fig. 60. thru Fig. 65. show the types of Alcatel distributor subracks optionally available for this purpose. For further information and detailed usage instructions, please refer to the 9400AWY Rel.2 Installation handbook.
Assembly P/N: 3DB 05583 AA (REF.[40] in Tab. 22. on page 82) Fig. 60. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.0/2.3
Assembly P/N: 3DB 05585 AA (REF.[41] in Tab. 22. on page 82) Fig. 61. Assembly view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 135 / 332
Assembly P/N: 3CC 08061 AA (REF.[42] in Tab. 22. on page 82) Fig. 62. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.6/5.6
Assembly P/N: 3CC 08062 AA (REF.[43] in Tab. 22. on page 82) Fig. 63. Front view of 1U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM non EMC
Assembly P/N: 3CC 07810 AA (REF.[44] in Tab. 22. on page 82) Fig. 64. Front view of 3U DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM EMC
Assembly P/N: 3CC 08061 AB (REF.[45] in Tab. 22. on page 82)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 65. Front view of DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR BNC
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 136 / 332
26 ODU AND ANTENNA CONFIGURATIONS, PART LISTS AND PROVISIONING

For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
This chapter describes the ODU configurations and relevant provisioning: ODU general description: refer to point a ) on page 33 ODU mechanical design and identification ODU configurations ODU part lists 78 GHz ODU part lists 1338 GHz ODU part lists on page 138 on page 139 on page 140 on page 141 on page 144 on page 149 on page 156 on page 158
Antenna configurations Integrated antenna part list Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 137 / 332
26.1 ODU mechanical design and identification

The ODU consists of one or two cabinets including the modem + transceiver + branching of a channel. Two mechanical solutions are adopted: one for all frequency bands from 13 to 38 GHz, where the branching (diplexer) is internal to the ODU cabinet; each of this type of ODU is identified by one Technical Code only another for all frequency bands from 7 to 8 GHz, where ODU is composed by two independent units: the BRANCHING assembly (containing the diplexer) and the TRANSCEIVER assembly (containing the RF section); each of this type of ODU is identified by two Technical Codes, one for the BRANCHING assembly and another for the TRANSCEIVER assembly. To read the BRANCHING assembly identification label it is necessary to separate the BRANCHING assembly from the TRANSCEIVER assembly.
Tab. 54. ODU dimensions and weights 1338 GHz Frequency TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING
235 x 235 x 72 mm (9.25 x 9.25 x 2.8in)
78 GHz TRANSCEIVER
248 x 257 x 93 mm (9.76 x 10.1 x 3.7in)
BRANCHING
235 x 235 x 73.5 mm (9.25 x 9.25 x 2.9in)
TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING
248 x 257 x 156.5 mm (9.76 x 10.1 x 6.6in)
Dimensions Weight
3.9 kg (8.58 lb)
4.2 kg (9.24 lb)
3.2 kg (7.04 lb)
7.4 kg (16.28 lb)
13 ... 38 GHz
78 GHz
BRANCHING
BRANCHING IDENTIFICATION LABEL (INSIDE) (see Fig. 77. on page 164) TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING ODU IDENTIFICATION LABEL (see Fig. 148. on page 312) TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER IDENTIFICATION LABEL (see Fig. 148. on page 312)
Fig. 66. ODU types, identification, dimensions and weights The ODUs are delivered with the nose adapter in case of configurations with the separated antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 138 / 332
26.2 ODU configurations

The available outdoor configurations are listed in Tab. 55. herebelow:
Tab. 55. ODU configurations

Outdoor configuration ODU ODU coupler ANTENNA APPLICATIONS AND ADVANTAGES
1+0 1+1 HSB
1 x ODU 2 x ODUs at same frequency
NO 1/10 dB asymmetric
1 x antenna single polar 1 x antenna single polar
Nonprotected Protection against failures
2 x ODUs at 1+1 HSB SD same frequency 2 x ODUs at different frequencies 2 x ODUs at different frequencies
NO
2 x antennas single polar Protection against failures. Improvement of performances versus multipath propagation
1+1 FD AP
NO
1 x antenna double polar 2 x antennas single polar in AP configuration (same or crossed polarization)
1+1 FD DA N.B.
NO
For explanatory diagrams, refer to para.11.2 on page 37 System configurations.
Legend: AP: DA: FD: HSB: SD:
Alternate Polar Double Antenna Frequency diversity Hot Stand By Space Diversity
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 139 / 332
26.3 ODU part lists

Note for all tables: Technical Code Technical part number of the item N.B.: The correspondance between Commercial Codes and associated Technical Codes, if any, is given in Chapter 28 Commercial Codes on page 167, which describes also the usage of Technical Codes and correspondent Commercial Codes. The last two Technical Code letters stand for a feasible alternative, they might differentiate two items even though still functionally compatible. For this reason the indicated Technical Code does not include the last two letters (replaced by **). Technical Description (if any) Technical Description of the item. The correspondance between Commercial Descriptions and associated Technical Descriptions, if any, is given in Chapter 28 Commercial Codes on page 167.
Note: The ODU technical Codes listed in the following tables include always the solar shield REF.[57] in Tab. 73. on page 158. For: 78 GHz ODU, refer to para.26.3.1 on page 141 1338 GHz ODU, refer to para.26.3.2 on page 144
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 140 / 332
26.3.1 78 GHz ODU part lists 26.3.1.1 General

The 7/8 GHz diplexer included in the available BRANCHING assemblies refers to ITUR F.385, 386 and RF special CUSTOMERS channelling with Tx/Rx separation specified in following Tab. 57. and Tab. 59. Each diplexer is a three port passive device with two bandpass filters as described hereafter (physical arrangement is shown in Fig. 76. on page 163):
Port A Port C Port B
Each BRANCHING assembly has two different variants by duplex spacing, depending on the RF_Tx output frequency band as described on the table below : 3DB Variant 3DB xxxxx AA** 3DB xxxxx AB** Channel 1_1p 2_2p
The arrangement between each filters on the same branching device is described below:
f1 2.5 dB
foL
f2
f3
foH
f4 frequencies
70 dB
attenuation
fr SHIFTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 141 / 332
26.3.1.2 7 GHz ODU part list Tab. 56. 7 GHz Transceiver assemblies 3DB 06691 AA** 3DB 06692 AA** TRX 9470 7.17.75 GHZ LHB TRX 9470 7.257.9 GHZ UHB
Technical Code
Tab. 57. Branching assemblies for 7 GHz ODU BRANCHING ASSEMBLY Technical Code 3DB 10060 AA** 3DB 06774 AA** 3DB 06774 AB** 3DB 06775 AA** 3DB 06775 AB** 3DB 06780 AA** 3DB 06780 AB** 3DB 06781 AA** 3DB 06781 AB** 3DB 06782 AA** 3DB 06782 AB** 3DB 06783 AA** 3DB 06783 AB** 3DB 06784 AA** 3DB 06784 AB** 3DB 06785 AA** 3DB 06785 AB** 3DB 10059 AA** 3DB 06776 AA** 3DB 06776 AB** 3DB 06777 AA** 3DB 06777 AB** 3DB 06778 AA** 3DB 06778 AB** 3DB 06779 AA**
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Filter 1 MHz (Lower Band) Low Limit f1 7107,0 7428,0 7484,0 7442,0 7442,0 7498,0 7498,0 7124,5 7194,5 7249,5 7319,5 7274,5 7344,5 7424,5 7494,5 7549,5 7619,5 7574,5 7644,5 7187,0 7443,0 7499,0 7414,0 7470,0 7107,0 7163,0 7428,0 7540,0 High Limit f2 7163,0 7512,0 7568,0 7526,0 7526,0 7583,0 7583,0 7194,5 7264,5 7319,5 7389,5 7344,5 7414,5 7494,5 7564,5 7619,5 7689,5 7644,5 7714,5 7243,0 7527,0 7583,0 7498,0 7554,0 7191,0 7247,0 7540,0 7652,0
Filter 2 MHz (Upper Band) Low Limit f3 7261,0 7582,0 7638,0 7596,0 7596,0 7652,0 7652,0 7285,5 7355,5 7410,5 7480,5 7435,5 7505,5 7585,5 7655,5 7710,5 7780,5 7735,5 7805,5 7355,0 7611,0 7667,0 7596,0 7652,0 7303,0 7359,0 7673,0 7785,0 High Limit f4 7317,0 7666,0 7722,0 7680,0 7680,0 7743,0 7743,0 7355,5 7425,5 7480,5 7550,5 7505,5 7575,5 7655,5 7725,5 7780,5 7850,5 7805,5 7875,5 7411,0 7695,0 7751,0 7680,0 7736,0 7387,0 7443,0 7785,0 7897,0
Shifter menu on CT 1 line per couple (Shifter, CF) 154C 154A 154A 154B 160 154B 160 161A 161A 161B 161B 161C 161C 161D 161D 161E 161E 161F 161F 168B 168 168 182 182 196 196 245 245 7212,0 7547,0 7603,0 7561,0 7561,0 7620,5 7620,5 7240,0 7310,0 7365,0 7435,0 7390,0 7460,0 7540,0 7610,0 7665,0 7735,0 7690,0 7760,0 7299,0 7569,0 7625,0 7547,0 7603,0 7247,0 7303,0 7606,5 7718,5
Technical Description BRANCHING 7GHZ ...

... CH11P P.SH. 154_C MHz ... CH11P P.SH. 154_A MHz ... CH22P P.SH. 154_A MHz ... CH11P P.SH.154_B MHz ... CH11P P.SH.160 MHz ... CH22P P.SH.154_B MHz ... CH22P P.SH.160 MHz ... CH11P P.SH.161_A MHz ... CH22P P.SH.161_A MHz ... CH11P P.SH.161_B MHz ... CH22P P.SH.161_B MHz ... CH11P P.SH.161_C MHz ... CH22P P.SH.161_C MHz ... CH11P P.SH.161_D MHz ... CH22P P.SH.161_D MHz ... CH11P P.SH.161_E MHz ... CH22P P.SH.161_E MHz ... CH11P P.SH.161_F MHz ... CH22P P.SH.161_F MHz ... CH11P P.SH.168_B MHZ ... CH11P P.SH.168 MHZ ... CH22P P.SH.168 MHZ ... CH11P P.SH.182 MHZ ... CH22P P.SH.182 MHZ ... CH11P P.SH.196 MHZ ... CH22P P.SH.196 MHZ ... CH11P P.SH.245 MHZ ... CH22P P.SH.245 MHZ
3DB 06779 AB**
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 142 / 332
26.3.1.3 8 GHz ODU part list Tab. 58. 8 GHz Transceiver assemblies
Technical Code 3DB 06693 AA** 3DB 06694 AA**
Technical Description TRX 9470 7.78.4 GHZ LHB TRX 9470 8.08.5 GHZ UHB
Tab. 59. Branching assemblies for 8 GHz ODU BRANCHING ASSEMBLY Technical Code Technical Description
BRANCHING 8GHZ ...
... CH11P P.SH.119 MHz Filter 1 MHz (Lower Band) Low Limit f1 8282.5 8282.5 8324.5 8324.5 8204.2 8274.2 8064.0 8148.0 7905.0 8017.0 High Limit f2 8328.0 8328.0 8370.0 8370.0 8274.2 8344.2 8162.0 8246.0 8024.0 8136.0 Filter 2 MHz (Upper Band) Low Limit f3 8405.0 8405.0 8447.0 8447.0 8355.8 8425.8 8272.0 8356.0 8171.0 8283.0 High Limit f4 8450.5 8450.5 8492.5 8492.5 8425.8 8495.8 8370.0 8454.0 8290.0 8402.0 Shifter menu on CT 1 line per couple (Shifter, CF) 119 126 119 126 151 151 208 208 266 266 294 305 311 311 8366.5 8366.5 8408.5 8408.5 8315.0 8385.0 8217.0 8301.0 8097.5 8209.5
3DB 06789 AA**
... CH11P P.SH.126 MHz ... CH22P P.SH.119 MHz
3DB 06789 AB**

... CH22P P.SH.126 MHz
3DB 06787 AA** 3DB 06787 AB** 3DB 10073 AA** 3DB 10073 AB** 3DB 06788 AA** 3DB 06788 AB**
... CH11P P.SH.151 MHz ... CH22P P.SH.151 MHz ... CH11P P.SH.208 MHZ ... CH22P P.SH.208 MHZ ... CH11P P.SH.266 MHZ ... CH22P P.SH.266 MHZ ... CH11P P.SH.294/305/311 MHZ
3DB 06786 AA**
7732.875
7851.475
8044.195
8162.795
7947.835
8066.435 8063.740
3DB 06786 AB**
... CH22P P.SH.294/305/311 MHZ
7851.475
7970.075
8157.405
8281.395
294 305
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 143 / 332
26.3.2 1338 GHz ODU part lists The following tables report the Technical Code of the available 1338 GHz ODUs with the following information from left to right: Column 1: Column 2 & 3: Column 4 to 7: Shifter (MHz) Tx and Rx subbands Tx & Rx frequency ranges at RF interface (MHz)
Tab. 60. 13 GHz ODU RF interface (MHz) 1 Technical Code 3CC 13690 AA** 3CC 13691 AA** 3CC 13688 AA** 3CC 13689 AA** 266 Shifter 2 Tx 1p 2p 1 2 3 Rx 1 2 1p 2p 4 5 6 RF Rx min 12750 12865 13016 13131 7 RF Rx max 12865 12980 13131 13246
RF Tx min RF Tx max 13016 13131 12750 12865 13131 13246 12865 12980
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 144 / 332
Tab. 61. 15 GHz ODU RF interface (MHz)

1 Technical Code 3CC 13694 AA** 3CC 13695 AA** 3CC 13692 AA** 3CC 13693 AA** 3CC 13698 AA** 3CC 13699 AA** 3CC 13696 AA** 3CC 13697 AA** 3CC 13702 AA** 3CC 13703 AA** 3CC 13700 AA** 3CC 13701 AA** 3CC 14079 AA** 3CC 14080 AA** 3CC 14077 AA** 3CC 14078 AA** 3CC 13706 AA** 3CC 13707 AA** 3CC 13704 AA** 3CC 13705 AA** 3CC 13710 AA** 3CC 13708 AA** 3CC 13711 AA** 3CC 13709 AA** 3CC 13713 AA** 3CC 13712 AA** 728 644 640 490 475 475 High Power 420 315 Shifter
2 Tx 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 1 1p 1 1p 1
3 Rx 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 1p 1 1p 1 1p
6 RF Rx min 14648 14760 14963 15075 14500 14710 14920 15130 14500 14660 14975 15135 14500 14660 14975 15135 14400 14625 14890 15115 14500 15140 14500 15144 14500 15228
7 RF Rx max 14760 14872 15075 15187 14720 14930 15140 15350 14660 14875 15135 15350 14660 14875 15135 15350 14635 14860 15125 15350 14712 15352 14706 15350 14620 15348
RF Tx min RF Tx max 14963 15075 14648 14760 14920 15130 14500 14710 14975 15135 14500 14660 14975 15135 14500 14660 14890 15115 14400 14625 15140 14500 15144 14500 15228 14500 15075 15187 14760 14872 15140 15350 14720 14930 15135 15350 14660 14875 15135 15350 14660 14875 15125 15350 14635 14860 15352 14712 15350 14706 15348 14620
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 145 / 332

1 Technical Code 3CC 13470 AA** 3CC 13471 AA** 3CC 13468 AA** 3CC 13469 AA** 3CC 12993 AA** 3CC 12994 AA** 3CC 12991 AA** 3CC 12992 AA** 3CC 13716 AA** 3CC 13717 AA** 3CC 13714 AA** 3CC 13715 AA** 3CC 14474 AA** 3CC 14475 AA** 3CC 14472 AA** 3CC 14473 AA** 3CC 12996 AA** 3CC 12995 AA** 3CC 13948 AA** 3CC 13947 AA** 1560 ANSI 1560 ETSI 1092.5 340 1010 1008 Shifter
2 Tx 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 1 1p 1
3 Rx 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 1p 1 1p
6 RF Rx min 17700 18195 18708 19203 17700 18195 18710 19205 18581.75 18701.75 18921.75 19041.75 17727.50 18222.50 18820.00 19315.00 17700 19260 17700 19260
7 RF Rx max 18195 18690 19203 19698 18195 18690 19205 19700 18698.25 18818.25 19038.25 19158.25 18085.00 18580.00 19177.50 19672.50 18140 19700 18140 19700
RF Tx min RF Tx max 18708 19203 17700 18195 18710 19205 17700 18195 18921.75 19041.75 18581.75 18701.75 18820.00 19315.00 17727.50 18222.50 19260 17700 19260 17700 19203 19698 18195 18690 19205 19700 18195 18690 19038.25 19158.25 18698.25 18818.25 19177.50 19672.50 18085.00 18580.00 19700 18140 19700 18140
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 146 / 332

1 Technical Code 3CC 13720 AA** 3CC 13721 AA** 3CC 13718 AA** 3CC 13719 AA** 3CC 13724 AA** 3CC 13725 AA** 3CC 13722 AA** 3CC 13723 AA** 3CC 14390 AA** 3CC 14391 AA** 3CC 14388 AA** 3CC 14389 AA** 3CC 13728 AA** 3CC 13729 AA** 3CC 13726 AA** 3CC 13727 AA** 1232 1200 ETSI 1200 ANSI 1008 Shifter
2 Tx 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2
3 Rx 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p
6 RF Rx min 22001.75 22300.00 23008.00 23308 .00 21200 21820 22400 23020 21201.75 21781.75 22401.75 22981.75 21198 21783 22430 23020
7 RF Rx max 22315.00 22600.00 23323.00 23598.25 21780 22400 22980 23600 21818.25 22398.25 23018.25 23598.25 21783 22368 23010 23600
RF Tx min RF Tx max 23008.00 23308 .00 22001.75 22300.00 22400 23020 21200 21820 22401.75 22981.75 21201.75 21781.75 22430 23020 21198 21783 23323.00 23598.25 22315.00 22600.00 22980 23600 21780 22400 23018.25 23598.25 21818.25 22398.25 23010 23600 21783 22368
Tab. 64. 25 GHz ODU RF interface (MHz) 1 Technical Code 3CC 13736 AA** 3CC 13737 AA** 3CC 13734 AA** 3CC 13735 AA** 1008 Shifter 2 Tx 1p 2p 1 2 3 Rx 1 2 1p 2p 4 5 6 RF Rx min 24540 24994 25548 26002 7 RF Rx max 24994 25448 26002 26456
RF Tx min RF Tx max 25548 26002 24540 24994 26002 26456 24994 25448
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 147 / 332

1 Technical Code 3CC 13740 AA** 3CC 13741 AA** 3CC 13738 AA** 3CC 13739 AA** 1008 Shifter
2 Tx 1p 2p 1 2
3 Rx 1 2 1p 2p
6 RF Rx min 27540 27994 28548 29002
7 RF Rx max 27994 28448 29002 29456
RF Tx min RF Tx max 28548 29002 27540 27994 29002 29456 27994 28448
Tab. 66. 38 GHz ODU RF interface (MHz) 1 Technical Code 3CC 12989 AA** 3CC 12990 AA** 3CC 12987 AA** 3CC 12988 AA** 3CC 13054 AA** 3CC 13055 AA** 3CC 13052 AA** 3CC 13053 AA** 3CC 13934 AA** 3CC 13933 AA** 700
Canada
2 Tx 1p 2p
3 Rx 1 2 1p 2p 1 2 1p 2p 2 2p
6 RF Rx min 37050 37620 38310 38880 38600 38950 39300 39650 38900 39600
7 RF Rx max 37620 38180 38880 39440 38950 39300 39650 40000 39100 39800
Shifter
RF Tx min RF Tx max 38310 38880 37050 37620 39300 39650 38600 38950 39600 38900 38880 39440 37620 38180 39650 40000 38950 39300 39800 39100
1260
1 2 1p
700 ANSI
2p 1 2 2p 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 148 / 332
26.4 Antenna configurations

The ODU can be connected to:
an integrated antenna of 30 cm (1FT) or 60 cm (2FT) or 90 cm (3FT) or 120 cm (4FT) diameter. a separated antenna, if larger diameters are necessary. In this case, the antenna is interconnected by a flextwist directly to the ODU, or the coupler, depending on the protection used.
For the outdoor section the following 1+1 configuration are presently implemented: for 13 to 38 GHz systems only, HSB configuration is available with a 1 dB/10 dB asymmetrical coupler and 1 antenna: this configuration optimizes the infrastructure using only one antenna, a 10 dB coupling has been chosen to minimize the losses on the normal path (1 dB only). for 7/8 GHz systems only, present HSB configuration is available with a 3 dB symmetrical coupler and 1 antenna without coupler and 2 antennas: this configuration adds a natural Space Diversity and improves the link budget avoiding coupler losses on the standby path. without coupler and 1 dual polarization antenna: this configuration allows a polarization diversity, minimizes the antenna and avoids coupler losses on the standby path.
The pole mounting versions are given in the following Tab. 67. for each configuration: Tab. 67. Pole Mounting versions Version 1+0 with integrated antenna 1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (1338 GHz) 1+1 HSB configuration with hybrid coupler and not integrated antenna (78 GHz) Configuration with separated antenna see para 26.4.1 page 150 26.4.2 page 152 26.4.3 page 153 26.4.4 page 154
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 149 / 332
26.4.1 1+0 configuration with integrated antenna The following Fig. 67. and Fig. 68. show the 1+0 configuration with a 30 cm (1FT) antenna in both vertical and horizontal configurations. The modification of the polarization is obtained by rotating the ODU and the nose of the antenna.
78 GHz
antenna
IDU connector
INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING (Technical Code REF.[59] in Tab. 73. on page 158
13 ... 38 GHz
antenna
360 mm (14.17 in)
IDU connector 620 mm (24.41 in) 390 mm (15.35 in)
Fig. 67. View of ODU with integrated antenna (V polarization)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 150 / 332
78 GHz
antenna
IDU connector
INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING (Technical Code REF.[59] in Tab. 73. on page 158
13 ... 38 GHz
antenna
IDU connector measures as Fig. 67. Fig. 68. View of ODU with integrated antenna (H polarization)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 151 / 332
26.4.2 1+1 HSB configuration with coupler and integrated antenna (1338 GHz) See Fig. 69. below. The 2 ODUs are interconnected through a 1 dB /10 dB coupler. The coupler is fixed on the 1+0 pole mounting with 4 catches. The 2 ODUs are connected to the coupler with their catches. The modification of the polarization is done on the coupler by rotating rings at antenna port and on the antenna by rotating the nose (the ODUs are always in the same position). Different couplers are available, as shown in Tab. 68. herebelow:
Tab. 68. Available couplers (1338 GHz) Frequency band Coupler type Waveguide (3 ports) WR 62 WR 42 WR 28 Coupling loss Coupler Technical Code
13, 15 GHz 18, 23, 25 GHz 28, 38 GHz
10 dB 10 dB 10 dB Coupler
1 dB / 10 dB 1 dB / 10 dB 1 dB / 10 dB antenna
3CC 13472 AB** 3CC 13473 AB** 3CC 13474 AB**
360 mm (14.17 in)
535 mm (21.83 in) 620 mm (24.41 in) Fig. 69. Coupler (1338 GHz)
COUPLER VIEW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 152 / 332
26.4.3 1+1 HSB configuration with hybrid coupler and not integrated antenna (78 GHz)
(a)
(b)
flange to antenna
(back)
(d2)
flanges for flex twist cables
(c2)
(d1)
NOT INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING (Technical Code REF.[60] in Tab. 73. on page 158
(c1)
Tab. 69. Available couplers and related items (78 GHz) position in figure above Technical Code 3DB 05365 AA** 3DB 05366 AA** 3DB 06767 AA** 3DB 10006 AA** 3DB 01459 AA** 1AF 02749 AB** Technical Description 3DB COUPLER 7.17.7 GHz 3DB COUPLER 7.78.5 GHz 10DB COUPLER 7.18.5 GHz PDR84 Connection KIT WR112 ADAPTER KIT (nose adapter for not integrated antenna) FLEXTWIST Quantity
(a) (b) (c1) & (c2) (d1) & (d2)
1 (choice) 1 2 2
Fig. 70. Coupler and related items (78 GHz)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 153 / 332
26.4.4 Configuration with separated antenna The ODU is fixed on a dedicated pole mounting for separated antenna. A nose adapter (different Technical Codes depending on the waveguide dimension, see Tab. 70. below) is used to connect the ODU and the flextwist.
78 GHz
13 ... 38 GHz
NOSE ADAPTER
(under)
NOT INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING (P/N REF.[60] in Tab. 73. on page 158
Fig. 71. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna Tab. 70. Nose adapters for ODU with separated antenna Technical Code 3DB 01459 AA** 1AB 14609 0003 1AB 14609 0002 3DB 02082 AA** Technical Description 78 GHz: WR112 ADAPTER KIT (nose adapter for not integrated antenna) 1315 GHz: WR62 NOSE ADAPTER (NOT INT ANTENNA) 182325 GHz: NOSE ADAPTER (NOT INT ANTENNA) 2838 GHz: NOSE ADAPTER (NOT INT ANTENNA)
Concerning the interface between the ODU output flange and the suggested antenna flange, the following Tab. 71. details for each product the standard wave guide to be used and the suggested flange for the external antenna. Please note that the use of 600 mm flex twist is not suggested for antennas bigger than 3ft (90 cm diameter), due to mechanical reasons. The suggested way to make the RF connection is to use the elliptical wave guide fitted with flanged connectors.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 154 / 332
Tab. 71. ODU Output flanges with external antenna Equipment and Range (GHz) ODU Output Flange A 9470 AWY 78 9413 AWY 12.7 13.3 9415 AWY 14.2 15.4 9418 AWY 17.7 19.7 9423 AWY 21.2 23.6 9424 AWY 24.2 25.3 9425 AWY 24.5 26.5 9428 AWY 27.3 31.3 9431 AWY 31.0 31.3 9438 AWY 37.0 40.0 UDR84 C.E.I. R84 E.I.A. WR112 B PDR84 FLEXTWIST Technical Code 1AF 11977 AA** C UBR84
Suggested Antenna Flange
D PBR84
UBR140 UBR140 UBR220 UBR220 UBR220 UBR220 UBR320 UBR320
R140 R140 R220 R220 R220 R220 R320 R320
WR62 WR62 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR42 WR28 WR28
PBR140 PBR140 PBR220 PBR220
3CC 05751 AC** 3CC 05750 AC**
UBR120 UBR140 UBR220 UBR220
PBR120 PBR140 PBR220 PBR220 PBR220 PBR220 PBR320 PBR320
3CC 05749 AC** PBR220 PBR220 PBR320 PBR320 UBR220 UBR220 UBR320 UBR320
3DB 00682 AA**
UBR320
R320
WR28
PBR320
UBR320
PBR320
L=1000 mm for 78 GHz L=600 mm for 1338 GHz
N.B.
If the flextwist is not provided by Alcatel, the user must carefully choose the type of the connection guide in order to limit as much as possible galvanic couples between antenna/flextwist and flextwist/ODU contact surfaces that can induce rust. For this purpose please note that the surfaces are: chromiumplated at ODUs output flange side tinplated at flextwists flange side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 155 / 332
26.5 Integrated antenna part list

Tab. 72. Part list of available integrated antennas Frequency (GHz) 7 8
2FT 2FT 3FT
Technical Code 3DB 00677 AA** 3DB 00675 AA** 1AF 11293 AA** 1AF 11284 AA**
Technical Description 7GHZ 2FT SP INTEGRATED ANTENNA 8GHZ 2FT SP INTEGRATED ANTENNA INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 7.1/8.5GHZ SP INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 4FT 7.1/8.5GHZ SP
7&8 4FT
1FT
1AF 01893 AA** 1AF 10018 AA**
13GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW 13GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 13GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 12.7/13.2GHZ SP INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 4FT 12.7/13.2GHZ SP 15GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 15GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW 15GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 15GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 14.2/15.3GHZ SP INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 4FT 14.2/15.3GHZ SP 18GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 18GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW 18GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 18GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 17.7/19,7GHZ SP INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 4FT 17.7/19.7GHZ SP 23GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 23GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW 23GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 23GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 21.2/23.6GHZ SP INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 4FT 21.2/23.6GHZ SP
2FT 13 3FT 4FT 1AF 01894 AA** 1AF 11289 AA** 1AF 11286 AA** 1AF 10018 KA** 1FT 1AF 01891 AA** 1AF 10018 AB** 15 2FT 1AF 01892 AA** 3FT 4FT 1AF 11285 AA** 1AF 11482 AA** 1AF 10018 LA** 1FT 1AF 01741 AA** 1AF 10018 AC** 18 2FT 1AF 01742 AA** 3FT 4FT 1AF 11290 AA** 1AF 11291 AA** 1AF 10018 AD** 1FT 1AF 01735 AA** 1AF 10018 AE** 23
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2FT 1AF 01736 AA** 3FT 4FT 1AF 11292 AA** 1AF 11288 AA**
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 156 / 332
Frequency (GHz)
1FT
Technical Code 1AF 10018 AF** 1AF 01737 AA** 1AF 10018 AH**
Technical Description 25GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 25GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW 25GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 25GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 3FT 24.2/26.5GHZ SP INT. ANT. COMPACT LINE 4FT 24.2/26.5GHZ SP 28GHZ 1FT SP INTEGRATED ANTENNA 28GHZ 2FT SP INTEGRATED ANTENNA
25
2FT 1AF 01738 AA** 3FT 4FT 1FT 1AF 11518 AA** 1AF 11287 AA** 3DB 00658 AA** 3DB 00659 AA**
28 2FT
1AF 10018 AJ** 1FT 1AF 01739 AA** 38 1AF 10018 AG** 2FT 1AF 01740 AA**
38GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 38GHZ 1FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW 38GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA RFS 38GHZ 2FT SP INTEGR. ANTENNA ANDREW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 157 / 332
26.6 Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials

Tab. 73. Part list of ODU accessories and installation materials Technical Description and notes EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES FOR ODU SOLAR SHIELD Depicted in Fig. 73. on page 160 and Fig. 74. on page 161 [57] 3CC 13476 AA** N.B. Note: The ODU Technical Codes listed in the previous tables include the solar shield. 1 Max Q.ty
Ref.[x] Ref.
is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item Technical Code
[58]
3CC 13477 AA**
LIGHT SERVICE KIT CABLE This item includes a cable used to connect the ODU to a digital multimeter so as to have a dc voltage proportional to the RF Rx level. See para.27.3 on page 165 for details. INSTALLATION MATERIALS FOR ODU
[59]
3CC 10752 AA**
INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING For usage examples, see Fig. 67. , Fig. 68. , Fig. 69. on pages 150151152 NON INTEGRATED ANTENNA POLE MOUNTING For usage examples, see Fig. 70. and Fig. 71. on pages 153154
[60]
1AB 12851 0002
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 158 / 332
27 ODU AND RELATED OPTIONAL TOOLS OPERATIVE INFORMATION

This chapter gives operative information, for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes regarding: ODU, herebelow 78 GHz ODU additional information on page 162 Light service kit cable on page 165 Please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship
27.1 ODU operative information

27.1.1 General, views and access points Refer to: para. 11.1.3 on page 33 for a brief functional description of ODU. chapter 26 on page 137 for composition and P/Ns Fig. 73. (for 1338 GHz) and Fig. 74. (for 78 GHz) on pages 160161 show ODU views and access points. The external interfaces are listed in Tab. 74. below, with the corresponding connector. Tab. 74. ODU external interfaces Ref. in Fig. 73. and Fig. 74. (1) (2) (3) Interface Connector Further information Tab. 75. herebelow
RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler Connector for IDU/ODU cable Connector for Light service kit cable
waveguide male N 50 ohm 12pin LEMO (Fig. 72. on page 160)
para.27.3 on page 165
Tab. 75. RF interface FREQUENCY GHz Waveguide type N.B. 78 WR112 1315 WR62 1825 WR42 2838 WR28
for further information, refer to para.26.4 on page 149
N.B.
For detailed operative information regarding: equipment installation and commissioning, please refer to: 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide equipment maintenance, please refer to section 3 MAINTENANCE on page 173 of this handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 159 / 332
7 8 1 12 9 2
KEY
6 11 10 3 5 4
Fig. 72. ODU LEMO connector pinout
(4)
TRANSCEIVER + BRANCHING
SOLAR SHIELD (1) (A) (A)
(A) (3)
(A)
(2)
(A) Levers (4) to fix/unfix ODU assembly to antenna or coupler (1) (2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler Connector for IDU/ODU cable Connector for Light service kit cable ODU identification label (see Fig. 148. on page 312) Fig. 73. ODU views (1338 GHz)
(3) (4)
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 160 / 332
BRANCHING
(4) TRANSCEIVER (B) (1) (B) (A) SOLAR SHIELD
(A) (A) (B)
(3)
(2) (A) (B)
(A) 4 levers to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to transceiver (B) 4 levers to fix/unfix branching assembly (diplexer) to antenna or coupler (1) (2) (3) (4) RF interface for connection of antenna or coupler Connector for IDU/ODU cable Connector for Light service kit cable TRANSCEIVER identification label (see Fig. 148. on page 312) Fig. 74. ODU views (78 GHz) 27.1.2 ODU hardware settings No hardware settings are envisaged on 1338 GHz ODUs, while on 78 GHz ODUs a setting allows to choose the halfband (LOW or HIGH) for TX (see para.27.2 on page 162 for details). 27.1.3 ODU identification
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Through the Solar Shield window are visible the ODU or TRANSCEIVER identification label and the Vertical or Horizontal polarization mounting. In case of 78 GHz ODU, the BRANCHING identification label (Fig. 77. on page 164) can be viewed only separating the TRANSCEIVER from the BRANCHING.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 161 / 332
27.2 78 GHz ODU additional operative information

27.2.1 78 GHz ODU composition The 9400AWY in 7 and 8 GHz bands (9470AWY) is provided with a new ODU mechanical arrangement in order to minimize the parts number required. As shown in Fig. 75. below, the 9470AWY ODU assembly is composed, unlike the existing ones in the other frequency bands, by two boxes, one for diplexer system (BRANCHING) and the other for the all other active functions (TRANSCEIVER) connected together to form the ODU. An ORING present in the TRANSCEIVER box guarantees the ODU assembly pressurization.
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
ORING
Fig. 75. 78 GHz ODU composition The TRANSCEIVER box is very similar to the existing ones 9400AWY ODU used in the other frequency bands, but without the diplexer system. The BRANCHING box provides the interface between the pole mounting/antenna and the TRANSCEIVER. The favorite solution foresees the possibility to change in field a spare part TRANSCEIVER without disconnecting the BRANCHING box from the pole mounting/antenna. The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes fixing and unfixing are obtained through the four levers (A) shown in Fig. 74. on page 161.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 162 / 332
27.2.2 78 GHz ODUs TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling Fig. 76. below shows the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces:
(A) BRANCHING box label informative content

described in Fig. 77. on page 164
(B) (HIGH FREQ) and (C) (LOW FREQ) RF interfaces on BRANCHING box (D) (TX) and (E) (RX) RF interfaces on TRANSCEIVER box
The TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes can be coupled in two alternative ways (1800rotated with respect to each other): BRANCHING boxs (B) (HIGH FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER boxs (D) (TX) in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the HIGH frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft Terminal (see field D in Fig. 77. on page 164); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding LOW frequency range; BRANCHING boxs (C) (LOW FREQ) coupled to TRANSCEIVER boxs (D) (TX) in this case the TX part of the transceiver uses the LOW frequency range of the Shifter set by Craft Terminal (see field D in Fig. 77. on page 164); obviously the RX part of the transceiver uses the corresponding HIGH frequency range.
(D)
TRANSCEIVER
BRANCHING (A) (B)
(C) (E)
Fig. 76. 78 GHz ODUs TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling surfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 163 / 332
27.2.3 Label affixed inside the 78 GHz ODU BRANCHING box
3DB 06775 AAAA 01 3DB 06775 AAXX
A B C
154_B 160
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
7442 7596 7442.5 7602.5
7526 7680 7512.5 7673.5
SYMBOL OR WRITING A9400 CE 12345 (example) !

ALCATEL
MEANING Equipment Acronym & Alcatel Logo European Community logo Notified body Not harmonized frequency logo 2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Logo (see para.12.10.3 on page 65)
PN/ICS 3DB 06775 AAAA 01 (example) A Logistical Item 3DB 06775 AAXX (example) B S/N CW 050609001 (example) C
Factory Technical Code + ICS Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128 Technical Code for Customer Technical Code for Customer, bar code 128 Factory Serial number Factory Serial number bar code 128 the field Shifter MHz indicates the possible frequency bands that can be used with this branching assembly. The choice between different shifters is done by Craft Terminal (refer to Operators Handbook for details). For additional functional information, please refer to para.41.2 on page 218. for each Shifter MHz, the TX LOW and HIGH rows indicate the frequency range assumed by transceiver TX section, according to the TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes coupling described in para.27.2.2 on page 163
D (shown numbers as examples)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 77. Label affixed inside the 78 GHz ODU BRANCHING box
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 164 / 332
27.3 Light service kit cable operative information

Fig. 78. herebelow shows this optional cable (P/N REF.[58] in Tab. 73. on page 158):
A F
B G
2 3 4 5
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
Black B Red C D
6 7 8 9 10
11
12
12
C 6 11 5 7 12 8
D 7 12 8 6 11 5
4 10
1 9 2
1 9 2
View following F LEMO wire 6 = ground Fig. 78. Light service kit cable Connector usage:
3 View following G
4 10
(A) LEMO connector, to be plugged into LEMO connector on ODU (see Fig. 73. on page 160 and Fig. 74. on page 161) (B) LEMO connector, for ALCATEL internal use only. banana plugs (C) and (D) : output is a 0 to +3V dc voltage proportional to the radio Rx field. During equipment lineup, through a multimeter it is possible to easily point the antenna until the measured voltage is the maximum, corresponding to the maximum radio Rx field. Actual Rx field value can be measured by means of the Craft Terminal (see CT Operators Handbook). For further information, please refer to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide (E) RS232 connector, for ALCATEL internal use only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 165 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
166 / 332
28 COMMERCIAL CODES
In all other parts of this handbook, Technical Codes are used to identify items.
In general, one Commercial Code is envisaged for each Technical Code or, in some cases, for a group of them. USAGE OF TECHNICAL AND COMMERCIAL CODES: the Technical Code is the P/N that is phisically labelled on the item for its identification. the Commercial Code is used for item ordering processes: it is not labelled on the item but it is labelled on the item shipment package.
Following Tab. 76. provides the correspondence between the item Commercial Codes (and associated Commercial Descriptions) and the relevant Technical Codes (and associated Technical Descriptions). NOTES: besides Technical Codes present in chapters 22 IDU part lists, 23 IDU provisioning and 26 ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning of this handbook, also Technical Codes relevant to installation materials not listed in this manual, but in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook, are given; presently, not all Technical Codes have the correspondent Commercial Codes. In case no Commercial Code exists for an item, use its Technical Code for item ordering process purpose.
Tab. 76. Correspondence between the item Commercial Codes and associated Technical Codes
Commercial code Commercial description Technical code Technical description
3EJ14500AAAA 3EJ14500BAAA 3EJ14500CAAA 3EJ14500DAAA 3EJ14500EAAA 3EJ14500FAAA 3EJ14501AAAA 3EJ14502AAAA 3EJ14503AAAA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4E1DS1 4 QAM SWKEY 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM SWKEY 8E1/DS1 4 QAM SWKEY 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM SWKEY 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4 QAM SWKEY 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16 QAM SWKEY MAIN IDU 8E1 48V MAIN IDU 16E1 48V MAIN IDU E3 48V MAIN IDU 8E1 DATA 48V EXTENSION IDU 8E1 48V
3DB06571AA** 3DB06572AA** 3DB06606AA** 3DB06607AA** 3DB06573AA** 3DB06574AA** 3DB06602AA** 3DB06603AA** 3DB06604AA** 3DB06605AA** 3DB06613AA**
4E1DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 4E1DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4 QAM FLASH CARD 8E1/DS1 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4 QAM FLASH CARD 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16 QAM FLASH CARD 1+0 IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU E3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8E1 48/60V PSU
3EJ14504AAAA 3EJ14505AAAA
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 167 / 332
Commercial code
Commercial description
Technical code
Technical description
3EJ14506AAAA 3EJ14507AAAA 3EJ14508AAAA 3EJ14509AAAA 3EJ14510AAAA 3EJ14511AAAA 3EJ14512AAAA 3EJ14513AAAA 3EJ14514AAAA 3EJ14501BAAA 3EJ14502BAAA 3EJ14503BAAA 3EJ14504BAAA 3EJ14505BAAA 3EJ14506BAAA 3EJ14507BAAA 3EJ14508BAAA 3EJ14509BAAA 3EJ14510BAAA 3EJ14511BAAA 3EJ14512BAAA 3EJ14513BAAA 3EJ14514BAAA 3EJ14529AAAA 3EJ14529BAAA 3EJ14530AAAA 3EJ14530BAAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EXTENSION IDU E3 48V MAIN IDU 8E1 24V MAIN IDU 16E1 24V MAIN IDU E3 24V MAIN IDU 8E1 DATA 24V EXTENSION IDU E3 24V EXTENSION IDU 8E1 24V EXTENSION IDU 16E1 24V MAIN IDU 8DS1 48V MAIN IDU 16DS1 48V MAIN IDU DS3 48V MAIN IDU 8DS1 DATA 48V EXTENSION IDU 8DS1 48V EXTENSION IDU 16DS1 48V EXTENSION IDU DS3 48V MAIN IDU 8DS1 24V MAIN IDU 16DS1 24V MAIN IDU DS3 24V MAIN IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V EXTENSION IDU DS3 24V EXTENSION IDU 8DS1 24V EXTENSION IDU 16DS1 24V UPGRADE KIT to 16E1 UPGRADE KIT to 16DS1 UPGRADE KIT to E3 UPGRADE KIT to DS3 UPGRADE KIT to ETHERNET SWL ULS R2
3DB06615AA** 3DB06616AA** 3DB06617AA** 3DB06618AA** 3DB06619AA** 3DB06620AA** 3DB06623AA** 3DB06624AA** 3DB06790AA** 3DB06791AA** 3DB06792AA** 3DB06793AA** 3DB06794AA** 3DB06795AA** 3DB06796AA** 3DB06797AA** 3DB06798AA** 3DB06799AA** 3DB06800AA** 3DB06801AA** 3DB06802AA** 3DB06803AA** 3DB06608AA** 3DB10042AA** 3DB06609AA** 3DB10043AA** 3DB06610AA** 3DB06819AA**
EXT IDU E3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 16E1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU E3 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 8E1 DATA 24V PSU EXT IDU E3 24V PSU EXT IDU 8E1 24V PSU EXT IDU 16E1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU 16DS1 48/60V PSU EXT IDU DS3 48/60V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 16DS1 24V PSU 1+0 IDU DS3 24V PSU 1+0 IDU 8DS1 DATA 24V PSU EXT IDU DS3 24V PSU EXT IDU 8DS1 24V PSU EXT IDU 16DS1 24V PSU 16E1 UPGRADE KIT 16DS1 UPGRADE KIT E3 UPGRADE KIT DS3 UPGRADE KIT DATA UPGRADE KIT SWL ULS R2 FEE
3EJ14531AAAA 3EJ14532AAAA
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 168 / 332
EXTENSION IDU 16E1 48V
3DB06614AA**
EXT IDU 16E1 48/60V PSU
Commercial code
Technical code
3EJ14533AAAA
SWLLocal Craft Terminal 9400AWY R2.0 SWLRemote Craft Terminal 9400AWY R2.0 9400AWY R2.0 Documentation CD_ROM 9400AWY R2.0 CD ROM
3DB06820AA** 3DB06821AA** 3DB06687AA** 3DB06690AA** 3DB04799AC**
SWLLCT 9400AWY R2.0 FEE SWLRCT 9400AWY R2.0 FEE 9400AWY R2.0 ProdDoc CD_ROM SWP 9400AWY R2.0 CD ROM SWP OPTICSIM WTD SNMP V218 CDROM SWP OPTICSIM WTD SNMP V220 CDROM SWP OPTICSIM WTD SNMP V221 CDROM 100 wire SCSI cable for 1+1 HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable cable equip interconnection E3/DS3 cable for 1+1 User Service Channel cable for 1+1 Station Kit Tool Maintenance Tool Kit Stretching screw Installation Kit Tool 1+0 Table/ETSI Rack Mounting Kit IDU Table/Wall Mounting Kit 3U Cabinet Grounding Kit DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.0/2.3 CABLE 8XE1/DS1 IDU/DISTR1.0/2.375 OHM UNB DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM CABLE 8XE1/DS1 IDU/DISTR 120 OHM BAL
3EJ14534AAAA 3EJ14535AAAA 3EJ14536AAAA
3EJ14537AAAA
SWP OPTICSIM WTD SNMP
3DB04799AE** 3DB04799AF**
3EJ12500AAAA 3EJ12501AAAA 9400UXC142 3EJ12502AAAA 3EJ12503AAAA 3EJ11500AAAA 3EJ11501AAAA 3EJ11510AAAA 3EJ11502AAAA 3EJ11503AAAA 3EJ11504AAAA 3EJ11505AAAA 3EJ11506AAAA
Additional cable for 1+1 configuration HP 37 wires 8E1/DS1 cable for 1+1 2 Mbit 1+1 interco. cable full protect. Access IDU 34Mb Additional cable for 1+1 configuration Station Kit Tool Maintenance Tool Kit Stretching screw Installation Kit Tool 1+0 Table/ETSI Rack Mounting Kit IDU Table/Wall Mounting Kit 3U Cabinet Grounding Kit DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 1.0/2.3 CABLE 8XE1/DS1 IDU/DISTR1.0/2.375 OHM DISTRIBUTOR SUBRACK FOR 120 OHM 1U EMC CABLE 8XE1/DS1 IDU/DISTR 120 OHM
3DB06592AB** 3DB06632AA** 3CC13659AAAB 3DB06593AA** 3DB06594AA** 3DB01399AA** 3DB01398AA** 3CC14292AA** 3DB01397AA** 3DB06612AA** 3DB06683AA** 3CC08166AA** 3DB05583AA**
3EJ12504AAAA
3DB10008AA**
3EJ11507AAAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3DB05585AA**
3EJ12505AAAA
3DB10007AA**
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 169 / 332
Commercial code
Technical code
3EJ12506AAAA 3EJ12507AAAA 3EJ12508AAAA 3EJ12518AAAA 3EJ12519AAAA 3EJ12509AAAA 3EJ12510AAAA 3EJ12511AAAA 3EJ12512AAAA
NMS/AUDIO CABLE L=1.6 m NMS/AUDIO CABLE L=6.4 m AWY/Melodie (SNMP) NMS Audio cable 1,6m AWY/Melodie (SNMP) NMS Audio cable 6.4m 2MHz coax 75OHM cable L=1m RS232 CT cable RJ45 8p connector ethernet cable w/o connector CABLE 8XE1/DS1 SUB_D IDU/CUST DISTR ETSI rack H 2200 ETSI rack H 2000 FILOTEX COAX CABLE 50 OHM indoroutdoor cable connection set 2 pieces 120 OHM 8X2 TWISTED PAIR 100 OHM 8X2 TWISTED PAIR 8E1DS1 SUB D37 connector male ADAPTER CABLE 1.0/2.3 MALEBNC FEMALE ADAPTER CABLE 1.0/2.3 MALE1.6/5.6 FEMALE Flex Twist WR112 PDR84/UBR84 L=1 m Flex Twist WR112 PDR84/PDR84 L=1 m Flextwist 13Ghz 60 cm Flextwist 15Ghz 60 cm
3DB05922AA** 3DB05923AA** 3DB10063AA** 3DB10064AA** 1AC001100013 1AB054120027 1AB074610008 1AC016760003
NMS/AUDIO CABLE L=1.6 m NMS/AUDIO CABLE L=6.4 m AWY/Melodie (SNMP) NMS Audio cable 1,6m AWY/Melodie (SNMP) NMS Audio cable 6.4m 2MHz 75OHM cable L=1m RS232 CT cable RJ45 8p connector cable 4 pair shielded 75 OHM COAX CABLE 8XE1/DS1 IDU/DISTR NO CONNECTORS L=15M ETSI rack H 2200 ETSI rack H 2000 FILOTEX COAX CABLE 50 OHM FILOTEX CONN.MALE N 90 50 OHM 120 OHM 8x2 twisted pair cable 100 OHM CABLE for 8XDS1 8E1DS1 SUB D37 connector ADAPT.CABLE 1.0/2.3 MALEBNC FEMALE ADAPT.CABLE 1.0/2.3MALE1.6/5.6FEMAL E Flex Twist WR112 PDR84/UBR84 L=1 m Flex Twist WR112 PDR84/PDR84 L=1 m 13 GHz Flex Twist G.O. 15 GHz Flex Twist G.O.
3EJ12517AAAA 3EJ11508AAAA 3EJ11509AAAA 9400UXI202 9400UXI203 3EJ12513AAAA 3EJ12513BAAA 3EJ12514AAAA 3EJ12515AAAA
3DB10003AA** 3DB04656AA** 3DB04657AA** 1AC001100022 1AB095530021 1AC011980001 1AC021980001 3DB05953AA** 3DB05850AA**
3EJ12516AAAA
3DB05851AA**
ACC112F181 3EJ10506AAAA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1AF11977AA** 1AF02749ABA** 3CC05751AC** 3CC05750AC**
9413UXI103 9415UXI103
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 170 / 332
Alarm/Service Channel cable
3DB05594AA**
HAHC/SC cable
Commercial code
Technical code
9425UXI103
Flextwist 18/23/25Ghz 60 cm WR28 PBR320/UBR320 L=0.6M Universal Round Collar
3CC05749AC** 3DB00682AA** 3DB03455AA**
18/23/25 GHz Flex Twist G.O. 28/32/38 GHz Flex Twist g.o. Universal Round Collar 28/32/38 GHz NoseAdapter (noniantenna) Non integrated pole mounting FLEXTWIST ARM SUPPORT 2838GHZ WR112 adapter kit (nose adapter for not int antenna) PDR84 Connection KIT Non Integrated Pole Mounting
ACCB28F633 included in ACCB28F633
3DB02082AA** 9438UXI102 non integrated pole mounting and nose 1AB128510002 3EJ10500AAAA FLEXTWIST ARM SUPPORT 2838GHZ 3DB00692AA** 3DB01459AA** 3EJ10501AAAA OUT DOOR FIX POLEMOUNTING 7/8GHz 3DB10006AA** 1AB128510002
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 171 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
172 / 332
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE
It contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 31 Maintenance Policy It introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance. Chapter 32 Set and use of EOW functions It explains how to configure and use the Engineering OrderWire functions of the equipment. Chapter 33 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts It describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment. Chapter 34 First Level Maintenance It describes the First Level Maintenance (system state display) of the equipment. Chapter 35 Second Level Maintenance It describes the preventive and corrective maintenance of the equipment.
PAGE 175
177
179
185
197
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 173 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
174 / 332
31 MAINTENANCE POLICY
This chapter introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
31.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators

The maintenance procedures described in the following chapters are based on the following considerations: The possibility of carrying out routine and corrective maintenance is based on the availability of: a suitable set of instruments and accessories a suitable set of spare parts These matters are described in chapter 33 on page 179. Maintenance can be classified as: First Level Maintenance: ROUTINE (system state check)
Second Level Maintenance: PREVENTIVE (periodic set of measurements and checks) CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair)
First level maintenance consists of a set of simple operations by means of which a First Level Maintenance Operator can acknowledge the state of the system and decide whether or not the intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required in order to bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions by troubleshooting and unit replacement, if necessary. In this philosophy: First Level Maintenance Operator should not be authorized to change the equipment status; he should be only authorized to display it or to make some simple tests through the Craft Terminal, if expressly authorized by the Station Manager. These actions are described in chapter 34 on page 185. Second Level Maintenance Operator is authorized to make all actions necessary to repair the system; moreover he should only be authorized to carry out routine maintenance. These actions are described in chapter 35 on page 197. With regard to the access to the Craft Terminal functionalities, notice that, starting from SWP version 2.0.2 and according to point 44.1.1 on page 274 (Security management), it is possible to use the following operator profiles:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
viewer for the First Level Maintenance Operator craftPerson for the Second Level Maintenance Operator.
The twostation layout typical of a radio link requires often that different operators can communicate with each other to solve problems. The EOW functions of this equipment give a simple way for this communication need. This matter is described in chapter 32 on page 177.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 175 / 332
31.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill

First Level Maintenance Personnel must have received: an adequate technical background on telecommunications. Experience in first level maintenance activities is a must; an adequate presentation on the equipment this handbook refers to; detailed instructions on what to do and/or who must be contacted in the case should he find the equipment not in its normal conditions.
31.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill

Second Level Maintenance Personnel must have received an adequate technical background on telecommunications. Experience in maintenance activities is a must. In particular, Second Level Maintenance Personnel must be familiar: with the equipment this handbook refers to and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.C.2.1 on page 318 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 176 / 332
32 USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS

Please refer to chapter 31 on page 175 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. This chapter explains how to configure and use the EOW (Engineering OrderWire) function of the equipment.
32.1 Setting information

The telephone handset (P/N REF.[51] in Tab. 22. on page 82) allows to carry out EOW in/out calls at IDU side. It uses DTMF (tone) dialling. a) Connection diagram STATION A
ODU
STATION B
ODU
1 4 7 *
2 5 8 0
3 6 9 #
IDU MAIN UNIT
IDU MAIN UNIT
3 6 9 #
1 4 7 0
2 5 8 *
OFF ON
OFF ON
Telephone handset N.B.
Telephone handset
each Telephone handset has its own phone number. Phone number can be in the 10 to 99 range. Telephone handsets must have different phone numbers.
Physical connection on IDU: connect Telephone handset RJ11 plug to TPH connector on the IDU MAIN unit [ (12) in Fig. 39. on page 103 ]. b) N.B. Telephone handset view
To safeguard against EMC problems, remember to clip the isolating ferrite core on the cable. This is supplied with the handset or in the main IDU connector kit. Caution: to operate, set the handset switch to FV.
Set switch to FV
ON/OFF switch Isolating ferrite core
RJ 11 connector
c)
Telephone handset keyboard KEY MEANING Force unlocking of the line Engage line
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
* #
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA 332
177 / 332
d)
Telephone handset phone number display/setting Display/setting is done through the Craft Terminal with the following menus: display: Configuration System Settings Overhead Phone Parameter setting: Configuration System Settings Overhead Phone Parameter phone number Apply Refer to CT Operators Handbook for details.
e)
Ways of Calling : two different ways of calling are possible: SELECTIVE: OMNIBUS: a connection between two users (dial a number: 10 to 99) a unidirectional connection with all the users (dial digits 00)
f)
LEDs indication: EOW (GREEN): free line EOW (YELLOW): busy line Flashing YELLOW: received and recognized call N.B. position of green/yellow LED on IDU MAIN unit:
EOW
GREEN YELLOW
GREEN
RED
RED
GREEN
RED
RED
YELLOW
32.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone handset connected to the IDU Main unit
a) To Call from Handset: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) b) Check that line is free (EOWfree green LED on the MAIN unit is on) Set Handset ON/OFF switch to ON On keypad, press # to engage line Check that EOWbusy yellow LED on the MAIN unit is on On keypad, dial twodigit number of station to be called (or 00 for omnibus call) Ring tone is audible in the handset, wait for answer
To Answer Call at Handset: 1) 2) EOWbusy yellow LED on the MAIN unit flashes and audible tone is present If not connected, connect handset to IDU, set ON/OFF switch to ON, press # on keypad, speak
c)
To End Call from Handset: 1) 2) On keypad, press * Move handset ON/OFF switch to OFF
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 178 / 332
33 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 33.1 Introduction

Please refer to chapter 31 on page 175 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. This chapter describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment, and and is organized as follows: Instruments and accessories herebelow, including: Software tools herebelow Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools on page 180 Set of spare parts Types of Spare Parts Number of Spare Parts General rules on spare parts management on page 182, including: on page 182 on page 183 on page 183
Please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship
33.2 Instruments and accessories

33.2.1 Software tools There is a local Craft Terminal (PC) which permits to display all the alarms and which manages the Equipment. Its implementation is described in the Craft Terminal Operators Handbook. When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks. With reference to Fig. 39. on page 103: connection with the PC is achieved through connector (14) available on the IDU MAIN unit; through connector (12) the same unit can be connected to an Operation System associated to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out by the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 179 / 332
33.2.2 Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools For the P/Ns of these Kit Tools, please see REF.[52], [53] and [54] in Tab. 22. on page 82. a) The Installation Kit Tool includes various types of common usage fixed spanners, standard and crosshead screwdrivers, polygon spanners, polygon tube spanners, special fixed spanners, a torque wrench, etc. The Maintenance Kit Tool is practically equal to the Station Kit Tool, with the addition of the Antistatic wristband. The Station Kit Tool is a bag additionally containing various types of cables and cable adapters.
b)
c)
The detailed item list of these Kit Tools is given in the Installation Handbook, paragraph Installation Tools required. N.B. These Kit Tools are standardized kits for the use with all ALCATEL WTD equipment types: they contain also items that are not used in 9400AWY environment (they are not described in this manual).
Some special items are listed in Tab. 77. below, which gives also reference to figures where they are depicted. Tab. 77. Special items of the Kit Tools SPECIAL ITEM COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRISTBAND Antistatic wristband Antistatic applications cord Plug with crocodile pliers Female button termination SPECIAL EXTRACTORS Unhook tool for 1.0/2.3 coax SPECIAL TOOLS AND ITEMS FOR ODU Lever for ODU mounting/dismounting Fig. 80. on page 181 Fig. 79. below para.B.5 on page 310 DESCRIPTION
Fig. 79. Special extractor to remove the coaxial cables 1.0/2.3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 180 / 332
When, in ODU configurations 1+1 with coupler, you must dismount and then mount one of the two ODUs for maintenance purposes, the following operations: UNBLOCK BEFORE DISMOUNT One at a time, unblock the four ODU blocking levers (A) pushing up the restraint spring (B) and, contemporarily, turning down the lever (C). BLOCK AFTER MOUNT Block the four ODU blocking levers (A) may produce vibrations that could cause synch loss or other electrical disturbances to the other ODU still working.
Using the special lever:
allows to do the same unblock/block operations without producing vibrations. The following photographs should clarify the correct lever handling and usage.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 80. Lever for ODU mounting/dismounting
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 181 / 332
33.3 Set of spare parts

33.3.1 Types of Spare Parts The unit replacement procedures described in paragraph Corrective Maintenance of chapter Second Level Maintenance in this section presume that the units present in the sparepart stock correspond exactly to the plugin replaceable units that are equipped in the system (i.e. with the same Part Number). 33.3.2 P/Ns to be used for Spare Parts provisioning Please take notice that, in order to order spare parts, the Commercial Codes defined in Chapter 28 Commercial Codes on page 167 must always be used.
33.3.3 ODU Spare Parts The suggested spare parts should be at least those containing electronic parts; in general the spare part types are: for 13 to 38 GHz: the complete ODU. For the P/Ns refer to para. 26.3.2 on page 144. for 78 GHz: the TRANSCEIVER assembly. For the P/Ns refer to: Tab. 56. on page 142 (7 GHz) Tab. 58. on page 143 (8 GHz)
As a matter of fact, all items listed in Tab. 22. on page 82 can be considered items to be provisioned as spare parts. 33.3.4 IDU Spare Parts The set of spare parts for the IDU is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable units. The suggested spare parts should be at least those containing electronic parts; in general the spare part types are: IDU Main unit, for both (1+0) and (1+1) systems IDU Extension unit, for (1+1) systems only Flash card, for both (1+0) and (1+1) systems
As a matter of fact, all items listed in Chapter 26 ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning on page 137 can be considered items to be provisioned as spare parts. a) Spare parts for IDU Main and Extension units
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case a terminal has IDU Main and/or Extension units equipped with plugin, and you order as spare parts such units separately from the plugin, take into account that, when the IDU Main or Extension faulty unit must be replaced, the spare part box has first to be opened, then the plugin must be installed, at last box must be closed.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 182 / 332
b)
Spare parts for Flash Card There are six possible types of Flash Cards. For details refer to:
point [5] on page 27 (possible combinations of interface types and numbers that can be supported by each of the six types of flash cards) sublist FLASH CARD in Tab. 22. on page 82 (P/Ns of Flash Cards) para.24.5 on page 124 (operative information for Flash Cards) para.42.3.2.2 on page 238 (Flash Card content).
For the sparepartstock, Customer should provision at least one Flash Card for each type (P/N) of Flash Card equipped in systems in service. For cost saving, as alternative to provision the various types, the 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM FLASH CARD flash card type could be provisioned instead. Read important information regarding the spare Flash Card management in Operators Handbook (from ED.03) section MAINTENANCE, chapter Spare Flash Card management and replacement procedures.
33.3.5 Number of spare parts The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) but also during MTTR (Mean Time To Repair); the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available. 33.3.6 General rules on spare parts management Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment. It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year. If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp. Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges. If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site, make sure that the following is observed: the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes; the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas); if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept, make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 183 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
184 / 332
34 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE 34.1 Introduction

Please refer to chapter 31 on page 175 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. This chapter describes the First Level Maintenance of the equipment and is organized as follows: System state display by visual indications Craft Terminal interface common used commands below on page 187
34.2 System state display by visual indications

34.2.1 LED test To be sure to have correct indications, carry out the LED test of IDU MAIN unit, pushing pushbutton (9) in Fig. 82. on page 186: while pushed, all leds of the MAIN unit should be turned on. In 1+1 system, perform the same test also on the IDU Extension Unit, pushing pushbutton (6) in Fig. 81. below: while pushed, all leds of EXTENSION unit should be turned on. 34.2.2 Alarm LEDs on the IDU MAIN unit All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the IDU MAIN unit which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate, as shown in Fig. 82. on page 186. 34.2.3 Alarm LEDs on the Extension unit (2) ON/OFF switch
ON
(6) LED test

GREEN
LED ON (green)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Normal status ON (if the ON/OFF switch is on)
Fig. 81. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU Extension unit for maintenance purposes
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 185 / 332
GREEN
RED
RED
RED
RED
YELLOW
(2) ON/OFF switch
LDI
MAJ
ATTD
(8) Alarm attending
(9) LED test
(10) Reset
(14) F interface for Craft Terminal Action A A A A
LED on Green LED ON Red LED LDI Red LED RDI Red LED MAJ
Meaning If off (and if the ON/OFF switch is on) there is a problem in the station battery or in the MAIN unit There is a failure in the equipment There is a failure in the remote station Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected. Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm (internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g. something is wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic protection switch). Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator (by pushbutton (8) or by Craft Terminal) has attended the alarm (for details, see para. 35.5.2.2 on page 202).
Red LED MIN
Yellow LED ATTD
ACTION: A B The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required. The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required Fig. 82. LEDs and pushbutton on IDU MAIN unit for maintenance purposes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 186 / 332
(12) Ethernet (or OS) interface for Craft Terminal
ON
RDI
MIN
34.3 Craft Terminal interface commonly used commands

This paragraph explains how to login the CT application and sums up the common used commands for system status display and checks. For screen interpretation, click on their relevant HELP button and/or refer to the CT Operators Handbook. N.B. This operation should be done by the First Level Maintenance Operator only if expressly authorized by the Station Manager.
34.3.1 Craft Terminal (CT) connection and startup 1) connect Craft Terminal (CT) to Equipment Following cautions stated in point e ) on page 102, plug the suitable cable to PC and to (see Fig. 82. on page 186): 2) ECT connector (14) on the IDU MAIN unit or OS connector (12) on the IDU MAIN unit
CT start power on CT and wait for PC startup Start Alcatel 1320CT ; note: if choice Alcatel 1320CT is not available, PC is not configured as Craft Terminal: Software Package loading is necessary. After a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen will appear, showing all Network Elements that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol ? (it means that they are not supervised)
Fig. 83. Network Element Synthesis screen Note: the symbol indicates the NE to which CT is locally connected by cable
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 187 / 332
34.3.2 Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE) From screen Network Element Synthesis (Fig. 83. on page 187), perform the following (as shown in Fig. 84. below): (1) select interested Network Element (usually, the NE locally connected by cable) clicking once left mouse button on it (2) while NE selected, choose Supervision Start
Fig. 84. Selection of a NE and start of its supervision (under exploration) and then colored (it
Wait until the symbol ? becomes at first
means NE in supervised state), as shown in Fig. 85. below
Fig. 85. NE in supervised state
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 188 / 332
34.3.3 Exploring the Alarms of the NE From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state (Fig. 85. on page 188), perform the following (as shown in Fig. 86. below): (1) select interested Network Element (usually, the NE locally connected by cable) clicking once left mouse button on it (2) while NE selected, choose Supervision Show NE alarms
2 1
Fig. 86. Show alarms of a supervised NE After a while, summary alarm screen and a confirmation box to click into will appear:
After a while, the detailed alarm screen will appear:
For screen interpretation, click on their relevant HELP button and/or refer to the CT Operators Handbook. At the end close all the alarm screens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 189 / 332
34.3.4 Network Element login 1) From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state (Fig. 85. on page 188), perform the following (as shown in Fig. 87. below): (1) select interested Network Element (usually, the NE locally connected by cable) clicking once left mouse button on it (2) while NE selected, choose Supervision Show Equipment
2 1
Fig. 87. Login of a supervised NE 2) Login. For SWP versions: < 2.0.2, after a while, the NE JUSM screen appears (Fig. 89. on page 191) 2.0.2, the login screen appears (Fig. 88. below). Type: in UserName field: as communicated by the Station Manager in Password field: as communicated by the Station Manager Then click Apply
1 2
Fig. 88. Login screen if the login is accepted, after a while, the NE JUSM screen appears (Fig. 89. on page 191)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 190 / 332
34.3.5 Checks The NE JUSM screen (Fig. 89. below) is available after the NE login (para.34.3.4 on page 190).
MENU BAR
Fig. 89. Loggedin NE JUSM screen Various checks are possible selecting the specific matters of the menu bar, as shown in following Fig. 90. to Fig. 94. For screen interpretation, click on their relevant HELP button and/or refer to the CT Operators Handbook. At the end close all the alarm screens.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 191 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 90. Checks on Radio domain Alarms Fig. 91. Checks on Radio domain Configuration
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
RADIO MENU BAR
192 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Fig. 92. Checks on Radio domain Frequency
03
Fig. 93. Checks on Radio domain RTPC & ATPC
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
193 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
Fig. 94. Checks on Radio domain Power Measurement
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
194 / 332
34.3.6 NE Logoff To logout the NE or before disconnecting the CTNE interface cable:
close the NE JUSM window (Fig. 89. on page 191) clicking then, in the Network Element Synthesis Window (Fig. 95. below), stop the NE supervision as follows: (1) select NE to be logged out with mouse left button (2) while NE selected, choose Supervision Stop
Fig. 95. NE Stop Supervision NE will go to not supervised state, with symbol ? as shown in Fig. 83. on page 187.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 195 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
196 / 332
35 SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE 35.1 Introduction

Please refer to chapter 31 on page 175 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment maintenance. Second level maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability. Second level maintenance is classified as: ROUTINE or PREVENTIVE (periodic set of measurements and checks, independently of troubles) CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair, in case of troubles)
This chapter describes the routine and corrective maintenance operations and is organized as follows: Warnings on page 198, including: EMC norms Safety rules Cautions to avoid equipment damage Routine (preventive) Maintenance Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU on page 199, including: on page 199 on page 200
Corrective Maintenance on page 201, including: General flowchart on page 201 Alarm acknowledgment and attending on page 202 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications on page 203 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal on page 204 IDU Unit replacement on page 206 ODU replacement on page 212 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form on page 213
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are: chapter 11 on page 21 chapter 24 on page 101 chapter 27 on page 159 chapter 31 on page 175 chapter 33 on page 179 chapter 34 on page 185 System description IDU operative information ODU operative information Maintenance Policy Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts First Level Maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 197 / 332
35.2 Warnings
35.2.1 EMC norms
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA. B.4.3 ON PAGE 309 35.2.2 Safety rules The Safety Rules stated in para.B.3 on page 302 describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety. Please read them carefully before starting each action on the equipment.
SAFETY RULES
General Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical connections while the equipment is inservice. Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame) Electrical safety DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, lowvoltage, lowimpedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. 35.2.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage Read carefully para.24.1 on page 102.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 198 / 332
35.3 Routine (preventive) Maintenance

Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement. Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance. The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and obtaining performance data. The Performance Monitoring Application, described in para. 35.5.4.3 on page 204, allows this function. 35.3.1 Routine (preventive) Maintenance every year It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly: [1] Mechanical checks Check that: the units, the cables, the mounting fixtures are inserted and connected correctly. Grounding check Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded (for 9400AWY shelves, see para.B.3.6 on page 306. Power cables check
[2]
[3]
SAFETY RULES DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, lowvoltage, lowimpedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. Make these operations: Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded. Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground). [4] Operative checks Visual check: During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in para.34.2 on page 185. Checks by Craft Terminal Refer to the specific instructions of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 LineUp Guide. N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
some suggested checks are indicated in para.34.3 on page 187.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 199 / 332
35.4 Consequences of unit extraction in the IDU

Generally, a unit can be extracted from the system for the following reasons: to replace it with a spare part during corrective maintenance to check a spare part taken from the spare part stock to restore the suspected faulty unit (after its successful replacement with a spare unit during corrective maintenance) to verify that it is really faulty.
The extraction of a unit has always some consequences on system behavior and performance that the Maintenance Operator must know in advance: a) Consequences of the MAIN unit extraction The time taken to extract the MAIN unit must be short and should be limited to the time strictly necessary for operation and maintenance purposes; it causes: interruption of the traffic on channel 1 in (1+1) configurations, all protections are lost the NE not to be supervised because the Equipment controller is installed in this unit.
Note for (1+1) configurations: before extracting the unit make sure that the traffic is transmitted over channel 0 (on the Extension unit). Otherwise, force with the CT the traffic onto channel 0.
b)
Consequences of the Extension unit extraction The time taken to extract the Extension unit must be short and should be limited to the time strictly necessary for operation and maintenance purposes; it causes: interruption of the traffic on channel 0 all protections lost
Note: before extracting the unit make sure that the traffic is transmitted over channel 1 (on the MAIN unit). Otherwise, force with the CT the traffic onto channel 1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 200 / 332
35.5 Corrective Maintenance

35.5.1 General flowchart
START Alarm acknowledgment and attending (para.35.5.2 page 202)
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications (para.35.5.3 page 203) TroubleShooting starting via Craft Terminal (para.35.5.4 page 204). Identification of a unit to be replaced.
IDU unit replacement (para.35.5.5 page 206)
ODU replacement (para.35.5.6 page 212)
System check via Craft Terminal Try again with another unit N Fault repaired ?
Y If possible, restore replaced unit in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal, to verify that is really faulty Possible intermittent failure N Fixed fault ? Y Restore spare part in the system and perform system check via Craft Terminal
Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together with Repair Form compiled (para......)
END Fig. 96. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 201 / 332
35.5.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending 35.5.2.1 Alarm acknowledgment Refer to Fig. 96. on page 201, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. The need for Operator intervention is notified: locally (on the front of the equipment or in the station): when one of the alarm LEDs MAJ MIN on the MAIN unit front plate lights up.
remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending operation (see para. 35.5.2.2 below). This operation has the scope of notifying locally in the station and remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
35.5.2.2 Alarm Attending See Fig. 82. on page 186: the detected alarm condition can be stored through the Alarm attending pushbutton on the MAIN unit. This operation will turn OFF the LEDs MAJ / MIN and will light up the yellow LED ATTD on the MAIN unit (Attended). The local Operator could also attend the alarm via the craft terminal. a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs MAJ / MIN. when the fault has been repaired, the yellow LED (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones (if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms have occurred in the mean time) will turn off.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 202 / 332
35.5.3 Troubleshooting starting with visual indications Refer to Fig. 96. on page 201, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. Some problems may be localized through the LEDs indicated in para. 34.2 on page 185. In any case, the inspection through the Craft Terminal is recommended before any unit replacement. Flowchart of Fig. 97. indicates LEDs on the MAIN unit that should be considered first. START
N END
MAJOR, MINOR, LDI or RDI LED on the MAIN unit is ON Y
Try login NE by Craft Terminal
Y Login successful ? Carry out procedure in para.35.5.4 page 204
Proceed as specified in CT Operators Handbook (from Ed.03), chapter Troubleshooting, paragraph: Warnings on the troubleshooting Problems with the Craft Terminal
Fig. 97. Troubleshooting starting with visual indications
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 203 / 332
35.5.4 Troubleshooting via Craft Terminal Refer to Fig. 96. on page 201, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. The ECT/RECT application includes several types of functions for system maintenance (used in lineup operations, too), as depicted in the following table: FUNCTION Alarm surveillance Loopbacks Operators Controls of the protection switches Tx mute functions Performance Monitoring Event Log Additional information on other handbooks FUNCTION DESCRIPTION para.35.5.4.1 on page 204 para. 35.5.4.2 on page 204 para. 35.5.4.3 on page 204 para. 35.5.4.4 on page 205 para. 35.5.4.5 on page 205 para. 35.5.4.6 on page 205 para.35.5.4.7 on page 205
35.5.4.1 Alarm surveillance The Alarm surveillance available with the CT allow the Operator to examine the alarms currently present in the equipment or in the link or in the PDH network. The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the section Maintenance of the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK. The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit. Having located the suspected faulty unit, replace it with a spare one (refer to para. 35.5.5 on page 206).
35.5.4.2 Loopbacks The loopbacks (settable by CT) give the possibility to perform some functional tests, thus making the fault location and maintenance tests faster and easier. The loopbacks are explained in para. 42.6 on page 261. To implement the loopbacks, refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
35.5.4.3 Operators Controls of the protection switches In certain troubleshooting conditions, changing the state of the protection switches can be useful to fix problems. Details on protection switches and on relevant Operators Controls, for each system configuration, are given in the suitable paragraphs of para. 42.4 on page 242.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In this chapter are described the logic actions that can be carried out. For further information and operative procedures, refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 204 / 332
35.5.4.4 Tx mute function (local and remote) This facility allows to switch off the transmitter. This facility can be useful during commissioning to avoid producing interference if the frequency is not yet properly set. For further information and operative procedures, refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
35.5.4.5 Performance Monitoring The Performance Monitoring is responsible for quality events counting and reporting. For further information and operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
35.5.4.6 Event Log The generic events occurred and discriminated by the NE are stored in one or more Event Log files. The ELB (Event Log Browsing) application embedded in the 9400AWY SWP allows the Operator to read such log files, in order to have historical data that can be useful to troubleshoot the equipment or the link or the PDH network, in case of multiple alarm conditions or intermittent alarms. The event log file examination is quite complex; it is reserved to Alcatel skilled personnel as a debug tool (only using filters on the not meaningful events, it is possible to understand the meaning of the stored data). For further information and operative procedures, refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
35.5.4.7 Additional information on other handbooks Lineup Guide gives summary instructions on how to use many of the functions explained before, in order to carry out equipment functional checks as a whole, in particular as far as checks on radio hop are concerned. Interference investigation procedure describes in detail how to test the radio hop in order to find possible interferences.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 205 / 332
35.5.5 IDU unit replacement Refer to Fig. 96. on page 201, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. Specific instructions/cautions according to the unit type are given in the paragraphs listed in Tab. 78. below. Tab. 78. IDU unit replacement procedures UNIT IDU MAIN unit IDU EXTENSION unit PARAGRAPH 35.5.5.1 35.5.5.2 PAGE 207 210
please refer to Operators Handbook (from ED.03) section FLASH CARD (housed on MAIN unit) MAINTENANCE, chapter Spare Flash Card management and replacement procedures.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 206 / 332
35.5.5.1 IDU MAIN unit replacement procedure
ON/OFF switch
Flash Card label
Equipment Controller Reset pushbutton
Flash Card
Flash Card cover
possible additional identification label of the upgrade kit (see point [16] on page 132)
Identification label
Fig. 98. Details for IDU MAIN unit or FLASH CARD replacement General warnings: Screw fixing In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:

Unit uninstallation and installation In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall or reinstall the IDU MAIN unit from/in the shelf, wall or desk assembly, please refer to the instructions given in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook. Procedure: [1] Note for 1+1 configurations: If possible, before removing the IDU MAIN defective unit, by Craft Terminal ensure that: traffic is forced to channel 0 for mux, Radio and transmitter the scheme protection is closed to NON REVERTIVE MODE If the local Craft Terminal is connected, perform the logoff, then switch it off If possible, verify that also remote Craft Terminal(s) and Supervision Operating System(s) are disconnected from the equipment
[2] [3]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 207 / 332
[4]
On the unit identification label present at unit rear side (see Fig. 98. above) read the unit Technical Code and the Power Supply nominal voltage (read also notes in point [16] on page 132, for the possible additional identification label of the upgrade kit) Get a spare unit with the same Technical Code (see para.33.3.6 on page 183 for general cautions) verifying also that its labelled Power Supply nominal voltage comply with that of the IDU Main unit to be replaced. N.B. If the unit to be replaced is equipped with an optional tributary plugin (916E1/DS1 plugin, or E3/DS3 plugin, or Data plugin), according to the spare part policy described in para.33.3.4 point a ) on page 182, you must at first install the spare tributary plugin into the spare IDU Main unit basic, as described in para.24.6 on page 125 (obviously deinstallation and reinstallation steps do not apply).
[5]
[6]
Turn off the front panel power switch (position O, see Fig. 98. on page 207): of the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced of the IDU MAIN spare unit
[7]
if possible, switch off the circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected to the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced. Disconnect all cables from the front panel of the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced. Notes:
[8]
SAFETY RULES If operation indicated in previous point [7] has not been carried out, a TNV2 (battery) voltage could be present on Station Battery input (cable side); do not touch the pins when unplugged. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. before removing cables ensure they are labeled in (1+1) configurations, leave the: flat cable and the splitcables connected to the IDU EXTENSION unit user interface cables connected to the split cables In this way, the tributary and user service channels traffic interruption is avoided (it continues on channel 0 through the IDU EXTENSION unit)
[9]
Uninstall the IDU MAIN unit to be replaced and place it on the workbench
[10] Wear the antistatic protection armlet and connect its termination to a grounded structure (see Fig. 146. on page 310). ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 208 / 332
[11] Carry out the following operations on the IDU MAIN defective unit (see Fig. 98. on page 207): remove the Flash Card cover extract the Flash Card (it will be mounted in the spare IDU Main unit) restore the Flash Card cover
[12] Carry out the following operations on the IDU MAIN spare unit (see Fig. 98. on page 207): remove the Flash Card cover insert the Flash Card you have extracted from the IDU MAIN defective unit in previous step [11] restore the Flash Card cover
[13] Now you can take off the antistatic protection armlet. [14] Install the IDU MAIN spare unit [15] Reconnect the cables on the front panel exactly as they were connected before the faulty unit was extracted. N.B. SAFETY RULES: see point [8] on page 208
[16] if switched off in step [7] on page 208, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable connected to the new IDU MAIN unit. [17] Turn on power on the new IDU MAIN unit (position I, see Fig. 98. on page 207) [18] Wait for the unit configuration (about 2 minutes). [19] Check the system status using LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal. [20] Note for 1+1 configurations: by Craft Terminal, remove any forced switches on channel 1 that could have been set in step [1] on page 207 [21] Flash Card identifier label affixing Please read para.24.5.2 on page 124. If the inserted IDU MAIN spare unit has no Flash Card identifier label sticked on it or the label does not match the flash card effectively inserted, put a label with the correct information (if not available, create a label writing the information on a selfadhesive sticker). End of IDU MAIN unit replacement procedure
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 209 / 332
35.5.5.2 IDU EXTENSION unit replacement procedure
possible additional identification label of the upgrade kit (see point [16] on page 132) Fig. 99. Details for IDU EXTENSION unit replacement General warnings: Screw fixing In all described operations, the screw tightening torque must be:
Identification label

Unit uninstallation and installation In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall or reinstall the IDU EXTENSION unit from/in the shelf, wall or desk assembly, please refer to the instructions given in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook Procedure: [1] If possible, before removing the IDU EXTENSION defective unit, by Craft Terminal ensure that: traffic is lockout to channel 1 for mux, Radio and transmitter the scheme protection is closed to NON REVERTIVE MODE. On the unit identification label present at unit rear side (see Fig. 99. above) read the unit Technical Code and the Power Supply nominal voltage (read also notes in point [16] on page 132, for the possible additional identification label of the upgrade kit) Get a spare unit with the same Technical Code (see para.33.3.6 on page 183 for general cautions) verifying also that its labelled Power Supply nominal voltage comply with that of the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced. N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[2]
[3]
If the unit to be replaced is equipped with an optional tributary plugin (916E1/DS1 plugin, or E3/DS3 plugin), according to the spare part policy described in para.33.3.4 point a ) on page 182, you must at first install the spare tributary plugin into the spare IDU Extension unit basic, as described in para.24.6 on page 125 (obviously deinstallation and reinstallation steps do not apply).
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 210 / 332
ON/OFF switch
[4]
Turn off the front panel power switch (position O, see Fig. 99. on page 210): of the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced of the IDU EXTENSION spare unit
[5]
if possible, switch off the circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected to the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced. Disconnect all cables from the front panel of the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced. Notes: SAFETY RULES If operation indicated in previous point [5] has not been carried out, a TNV2 (battery) voltage could be present on Station Battery input (cable side); do not touch the pins when unplugged. DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals. before removing cables ensure they are labeled leave the: flat cable and the splitcables connected to the IDU MAIN unit user interface cables connected to the split cables In this way, the tributary and user service channels traffic interruption is avoided (it continues on channel 1 through the IDU MAIN unit)
[6]
[7] [8] [9]
Uninstall the IDU EXTENSION unit to be replaced Install the IDU EXTENSION spare unit Reconnect the cables on the front panel exactly as they were connected before the faulty unit was extracted. N.B. SAFETY RULES: see point [6] above
[10] if switched off in step [5] on page 211, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable connected to the new IDU EXTENSION unit. [11] Turn on power on the new IDU EXTENSION unit (position I, see Fig. 99. on page 210) [12] Wait for the unit configuration (about 2 minutes). [13] Check the system status through LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal. [14] Note: by Craft Terminal, remove any lockout switches on channel 0 that could have been set in step [1] on page 210.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
End of IDU EXTENSION unit replacement procedure
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 211 / 332
35.5.6 ODU replacement General warnings: ODU unit uninstallation and installation In all described operations, when it is necessary to uninstall the faulty ODU and install the spare ODU, please refer to possible additional instructions given in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook. Procedure: [1] Get a spare ODU unit or, in case of 78 GHz ODU, a spare TRANSCEIVER box with the same Technical Code of that to be replaced Note for (1+1) configurations: before replacing the ODU make sure that the traffic is transmitted over the other channel. Otherwise, force with the CT the traffic onto the other channel. Switch off the ODU by using the ON/OFF switch of the relevant IDU unit: for channel 1, operate on MAIN unit (position O, see Fig. 98. on page 207) for channel 0, operate on EXTENSION unit (position O, see Fig. 99. on page 210) ATTENTION (caution to avoid equipment damage) this avoids a possible unrecoverable unknown condition of the spare ODU, when connected in next step [7] [4] [5] [6] If present, remove the solar shield (see Fig. 73. on page 160 and Fig. 74. on page 161) Disconnect the IDUODU cable at ODU side. Change the ODU. NOTES: in case of ODU configurations 1+1 with coupler, use lever shown in Fig. 80. on page 181; in case of 78 GHz ODUs: a ) remove the faulty TRANSCEIVER box in the following way (refer to Fig. 74. on page 161): 1 ) leave the BRANCHING box attached to antenna or coupler, i.e. do not open levers (B) 2 ) unblock the four levers (A) and separate gently the faulty TRANSCEIVER box from the BRANCHING box 3 ) verify the coupling between TRANSCEIVER and BRANCHING boxes (see para.27.2.2 on page 163), i.e. if the TRANSCEIVER boxs (D) (TX) is coupled to the: BRANCHING boxs (B) (HIGH FREQ) or BRANCHING boxs (C) (LOW FREQ) b ) install the spare TRANSCEIVER box in the following way: 4 ) verify the presence and correct positioning of the ORING on the spare TRANSCEIVER box (see Fig. 75. on page 162) 5 ) gently couple the spare TRANSCEIVER box on the BRANCHING box in the same position you have verified in step 3 ) above 6 ) fix the spare TRANSCEIVER box to the BRANCHING box using the four levers (A) (refer to Fig. 74. on page 161)
[2]
[3]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 212 / 332
[7] [8]
Reconnect the IDUODU cable at ODU side. If was present, mount the solar shield that was removed in step [4] above Switch on the ODU by using the ON/OFF switch (position I of the relevant IDU unit (MAIN or EXTENSION unit) that has been switched off in step [3] above.
[9]
[10] Check with the CT that there are no alarms.
35.6 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form

Refer to Fig. 96. on page 201, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance general flowchart. 35.6.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center The complete faulty unit (complete ODU assembly, or TRANSCEIVER box in case of 78 GHz ODU, or IDU Main or Extension Unit including plugin, if any) must be sent back to the Alcatel repair center. Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only. 35.6.2 Repair Form filling To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 100. on page 214. The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 213 / 332
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK
SUBRACK
SLOT
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
INSTALLATION / TURN ON CLEAR FAULT
REASON FOR REPAIR

DROP IN PERFORMANCE
PRESUMED CAUSE
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE FAULT STILL PRESENT AFTER REPAIR
NAME OF SENDER
COMMENTS
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND A STANDARD REPAIRING BD SUBSTITUTED QUALITY ALERT I SX NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE NOT REPAIRABLE (REJECTED) M UPGRADE I MECHANICAL V1 SOLDERING / WIRING C
FAULTS DETECTED
COMPONENT FL PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD V1 CORROSION V3 OTHER DIRT V2 ADJUSTMENT P
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 100. Repair form
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 214 / 332
SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

It provides the secondlevel description of 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment.
SECTION CONTENT Chapter 41 Radio transmission features It describes the Radio Transmission features: Frequency Agility, ATPC, ATPC, Internal service channels, User service channels Chapter 42 System description It gives the detailed description of the equipment features and subsystems that have not been given in the previous part of this handbook. Chapter 43 IDU Data Interface plugin It describes in detail the implementation and working environment of the Ethernet accesses. Chapter 44 Network management and interworking It describes the network management and interworking available for the equipment control. Chapter 45 Alarms It describes the alarms managed in the SWP version this handbook issue refers to.
PAGE
217
225
265
273
281
In all chapters, possible references to DS1 and DS3 interfaces (that are not supported by the SWP version this handbook issue refers to) are given just for general information purposes and are subject to change.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 215 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
216 / 332
41 RADIO TRANSMISSION FEATURES For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
This chapter describes the Radio Transmission features: Frequency Agility Frequency shifter management Transmitted power control: ATPC function Transmitted power control: RTPC function Internal service channels User service channels on page 218 on page 218 on page 219 on page 222 on page 222 on page 223
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 217 / 332
41.1 Frequency Agility

The Frequency Agility feature gives the Operator the possibility to set via ECT the frequency of a single Transceiver within a chosen subband to select the RF working channel. This implies benefits for spare parts, order processing and frequency coordination.
41.2 Frequency shifter management
The configuration of radio Tx frequency and radio Rx frequency is done by setting the radio Tx frequency. The NE automatically calculates the Rx frequency based on a shifter value (specific for the diplexer installed on ODU). Each ODU can manage only one shifter (fixed shifter) or a list of predefined shifter (flexible shifter), but, due to the inability to read the shifter information from the diplexer Remote Inventory, the shifter value (and the central frequency) to use in case of flexible shifter management is chosen by managing system in a list of allowed shifter value and central frequency. This list is known by ODU based on frequency band (read from Remote Inventory). The list is sent by ODU to IDU , one entry for each couple shifter valuecentral frequency allowed and for each radio channel. Also in case of fixed shifter the list is managed (with only one entry) to allow shifter management independent from ODU type. The managing system chooses the shifter value to use. Associated to each couple shifter valuecentral frequency (and based on frequency subband read from Remote Inventory) the Tx frequency range is reported to allow the radio TX frequency setting. Rx frequency is calculated automatically by the NE using Tx frequency configured by the managing system and the shifter value (fixed or configured by the managing system). In a few cases, the Rx frequency can be modified by the managing system in a range of 5.000 KHz around the Rx frequency calculated automatically by the NE (but inside the Rx frequency range associated to couple shifter valuecentral frequency configured). Thats just the same of the use a new shifter value not included in the predefined list. To resume: the configuration of frequency parameters of a radio channel is done by setting in a first time the couple shifter valuecentral frequency (by managing system for flexible shifter and the only value for fixed shifter) and then the Tx frequency (and eventually the Rx frequency). There are no default values for shifter valuecentral frequency and Tx and Rx frequency values. Shifter valuecentral frequency and Tx frequency are explicitly configured by managing system, while Rx frequency it is automatically calculated. In case of IDUODU communication never activated, due to ODU never connected or never responding, it is not possible to configure shifter value (and central frequency) and Tx frequency. In case of Shifter value (and central frequency) not configured, a default value is applied (7.000.00040.000.000 KHz or maximum hardware range known by ODU) for Tx frequency range to allow to configure in one shot all frequency parameters. The configuration of shifter valuecentral frequency is allowed only on local station (during the installation phase). An Incompatible Frequency alarm is raised in the following cases: when a Tx Frequency value not included on the allowed Tx Frequency Range is configured; when a shifter valuecentral frequency not included in the allowed list is configured; when, on configuring a new shifter valuecentral frequency, the Tx Frequency is no longer included on the new allowed Tx Frequency Range.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 218 / 332
41.3 Transmitted power control: ATPC function

The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in conditions of fading. In radio link systems the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into account the following advantages: reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is supplied for small percentage of time improvement of the average condition of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be revealed only in conditions of fading possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Backoff on the power transmitter taking into account what mentioned above ATPC Working principle The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the transmitted power between a transmitter and a receiver connected in a radio link. With reference to the Fig. 101. on page 221 the receiver in Station B furnishes through the AGC voltage the information of the received power to the ATPC controller; the received power level is set to the local IDU by the IDUODU service channel and then transferred to the remote station (in the IDU the power level is extracted by the PDH frame and sent to the ODU, where the ATPC controller is resident, by IDUODU dialogue). In the remote station (A) the ATPC controller compares the voltage with threshold values (presettable in the embedded ODU SW) and according to the obtained result it orders to increase/decrease the transmitted power. These orders are processed and therefore transferred to the associated transmitter. In the protected configurations the control information of the transmitted power are 1+1 protected transmitted.
[1]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 219 / 332
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be summarized as follows (for each channel): received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move the Tx output power). Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition). This information is transmitted instead of the received power level The ATPC channel is identified according to the position in the frame where the ATPC information is inserted/extracted
The information for each channel received at the remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received is compared to the set thresholds and it is decided to send the up or down or hold commands to the transmitter. The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to set the Tx at low Pout. The failure of Rx0 and Rx1 received in the Tx remote station is used to set them at low Pout in case of 1+1HSB configuration. It will be switched on after Rx failure removal. The Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation alarms. [2] Organization of the control system The ATPC control system is repeated for each channel without any centralized function. The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction: [3] the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion of the above data in the service channel; The Tx system control implementing extraction of data from the service channel and PTx drive.
ATPC threshold management The transmitter can change the output power in the ML (max level) and mL (min level) range. The transceiver has its own default value for ML, mL and NL (nominal level). The following values can be set through the CT: AML (ATPC Max. Level) AmL (ATPC min. Level) With the constraints where where mL <= AmL <= NL mL <= AML <= ML It means that: the ATPC range is not fixed but is variable according to the values set for AML and AmL the max ATPC output power can differ from the max output power of the transmitter and the ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range AML <= ML AmL >= mL
Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa, is performed at the speed of 1dB /10ms. A 3 dB POWER HOLD hysteresis range has been defined between the POWER UP and the POWER DOWN threshold levels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 220 / 332
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the ATPC loop alarm is deactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
The ATPC function can be both enabled or disabled: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be driven normally. An identifier station code is used in the remote station to be sure that an Rx power decrease of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increase of the relevant Tx one.
STATION A
PRX
STATION B
RX IF
MOD
IF
DEM
VATPC COMATPC
ATPC CONTROL
AGC
RFCOH INSERT
RFCOH EXTRACT
RX FAILURE PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA
ATPC DATA
DEM
IF
RX
PRX
PTX
TX
IF
MOD
NOTE: ATPC REGULATION SHOWN IN ONE DIRECTION OF TRANSMISSION ONLY AND VALID FOR EACH CHANNEL
Fig. 101. ATPC functionality [4] ATPC in HSB configuration Fig. 102. on page 222 shows all possible system states and actions carried out, according to the following legend: A E N HOLD = = = = PRx > 30dBm PRx < Extra power threshold PRx within A and S or within A and E according to cases The current output power value is maintained The output power value is ruled by the lowest PRx of the pair The output power value is ruled by the greatest PRx of the pair
LOWER = HIGHER =
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Whenever one PRx is not considered valid (because it is not received, or there is a Card_Fail, or it is squelched, ..), the output power value is ruled by the only valid PRx. Should both PRx be not valid, system stays in the HOLD condition.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 221 / 332
PRx0 state
A
HIGHER HOLD
N
HOLD LOWER
E
HIGHER LOWER
PRx1 state
HIGHER
LOWER
LOWER
A N E
Fig. 102. ATPC in HSB configuration
41.4 Transmitted power control: RTPC function

The capability to adjust the transmitted power in a static and fixed way (RTPC = Remote Transmit Power Control) has been introduced for those countries where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which due to the short length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred. The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved. The setting of the transmitted power can be performed locally through ECT.
41.5 Internal service channels

The system to transmit CLA, RDI and ATPC information uses a 64 kbit/s service channel inserted in the radio aggregate frame. CLA (not operative in current release) CLA (Common Loss Alarms) is a mechanism, used only in 1+1 hot standby configurations, which detects local failures of the transmitter (Silent alarms) normally not detected by the conventional TxRx alarms. RDI RDI (Remote Defect Indication) is a 1bit alarm transmitted from the remote system to the local one, even if the NMSRF bidirectional channel is not working / not present. RDI is generated by the remote EC as the sum of the various card failures of the remote system. The RDI information is available on the Main unit (channel 1) front panel through LEDs. Refer to point [2] on page 121 for further information. ATPC The ATPC (Automatic Transmit Power Control) function allows to regulate the transmitted power in order to supply reduced power in normal propagation conditions, and maximum power in fading conditions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 222 / 332
41.6 User service channels

Two service channels are available.
a)
Service Channel 1 (data channel) This channel can be used in one of the following modes (settable by CT): 64 kbit/s V.11 codirectional 64 kbit/s G.703 codirectional 64 kbit/s V.11 contradirectional
b)
Service Channel 2 (Engineering Order Wire) EOW is a telephone channel with the possibility of implementing general or selective call. The handset is connected to a connector on the front panel of the IDU Access unit. To implement a selective call the CT/OS must assign a station number (between 10 and 99) to each terminal during the installation phase. Number 00 is for the general call (omnibus call). Two terminals in the network should not have the same station number. Two ways of calling are possible: SELECTIVE: a connection between two stations OMNIBUS: a unidirectional connection between one station and all the others
The numbers available for calls are from 10 to 99. The omnibus call number is identified by number 00. Fig. 103. on page 224 shows the block diagram of the EOW channel in 1+0 configuration. Fig. 117. on page 249 shows the block diagram of the EOW channel in 1+1 configuration (K_SWRx is the EPSRx Switch command). For operative details refer to chapter 32 on page 177.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 223 / 332
Main
ASICPegaso EOW Front Panel West dRXODU
RX
ck64 sync8 dTXODU ck64 , sync8
COMBO
TX
IDU ODU framer
Analog Party Line

TX
dTXRF dRXRF MUX Main frame
COMBO towards RF frame

RX
EOW Front Panel East
ck64 sync8
ODU
ASICPerseo
IDU ODU framer
Fig. 103. EOW analog party line block diagram in 1+0 configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 224 / 332
42 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
This chapter gives the detailed description of the equipment features and subsystems that have not been given in the previous part of this handbook. Information given in the following is: Functional description and components on page 226
Control subsystem hardware architecture on page 231 IDU functional description Protection schemes ODU functional description Loopbacks on page 233 on page 242 on page 259 on page 261
Please refer to other chapters of this section for the following related information: IDU Data Interface plugin Network management and interworking Alarms chapter 43 on page 265 chapter 44 on page 273 chapter 45 on page 281
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 225 / 332
42.1 Functional description and components

This paragraph sumsup the equipment functions and defines its components from the SW point of view: Functions and configurations herebelow IDU and ODU Components herebelow: IDU on page 227 ODU on page 228 Allowed Equipment Types on page 228 Remote Inventory Management on page 230 42.1.1 Functions and configurations ULS NE has the aim to multiplexer/demultiplexer the main tributaries (up to 16xE1 / 16xDS1 or 1xE3 / 1xDS3) with different modulation formats. The following Tab. 79. resumes the relation among market, tributaries and modulation. Tab. 79. Markets, tributaries and modulations forecasted Market Tributary 2xE1 4xE1 ETSI 8xE1 16xE1 1xE3 4xDS1 ANSI 8xDS1 16xDS1 1xDS3 Modulation 4QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM /16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM /16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM 4QAM / 16QAM
The main functions performed by IDU and ODU of ULS equipment are the following: Multiplexer/Demultiplexer The multiplexer function receives main tributaries (see Tab. 79. above) and generates a PDH frame. The demultiplexer function receives a PDH frame and generates main tributaries. Signal Protection switch (if any) The function provides one protection channel for the main signal against channelassociated failures for both hardware failures and temporary signals degradation or losses due to propagation effects (e.g. rain) according to equipment configuration. Radio Physical Interface The function converts a radio frequency signal into an internal logic level signal, and vice versa (RPPI). Specifically, the following functions are performed: Modulation and Tx functions in the transmit side Demodulation and Rx functions in the receive side
ULS NE can be composed by: one radio channel (1+0 configurations); two radio channels (1+1 configurations). The 2+0 configuration is not supported. 42.1.2 IDU and ODU Components
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The ULS NE is composed by two different parts: the indoor and the outdoor part. In the following they are described from physical and management point of view.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 226 / 332
42.1.2.1 IDU The indoor part is composed by one or two units/shelves (see Fig. 1. on page 22): IDU Main Unit Ch#1 IDU Extension Unit Ch#0 [1] IDU Main Unit The IDU Main unit is used both in 1+0 and 1+1 configurations. Six different types of IDU Main Unit are envisaged (with different P/Ns): IDU Main Unit for ETSI market, for 24 V Power Supply IDU Main Unit for ETSI market, for 48/60 V Power Supply IDU Main Unit for ETSI market, for 24/60 V Power Supply (Full Range) IDU Main Unit for ANSI market, for 24 V Power Supply IDU Main Unit for ANSI market, for 48/60 V Power Supply IDU Main Unit for ANSI market, for 24/60 V Power Supply (Full Range) The IDU Main Unit provides the external interfaces for the 8xE1 (ETSI version) or 8xDS1 (ANSI version) tributaries, user service channel, housekeeping and summarizing alarms, NMS V11 and G703 interfaces and a telephone jack. It contains the MONOM, the PQECRC and the Power Supply units. The MONOM unit manages 8E1/DS1 tributaries, the Mux/Demux and the cable interface functions. The PQECRC unit implements the Equipment and IDU Controller functions. a) Software Key on IDU Main unit A Software Key (Flash Card) is always plugged onto the Main board allowing flexibility in choosing user interfaces. Refer to para.24.5 on page 124 for details. Optional plugin unit for IDU Main unit An optional plugin unit (alternative between them, with different P/Ns) for: additional 8xE1 plugin or 8xDS1 plugin or 1xE3 plugin or 1xDS3 plugin or Data plugin implementing Ethernet interfaces can be plugged onto the IDU Main unit.
b)
[2]
IDU Extension Unit The IDU Extension Unit is used only in 1+1 configurations. Six different types of IDU Extension Unit are envisaged (with different P/Ns): IDU Extension Unit for ETSI market, for 24 V Power Supply IDU Extension Unit for ETSI market, for 48/60 V Power Supply IDU Extension Unit for ETSI market, for 24/60 V Power Supply (Full Range) IDU Extension Unit for ANSI market, for 24 V Power Supply IDU Extension Unit for ANSI market, for 48/60 V Power Supply IDU Extension Unit for ANSI market, for 24/60 V Power Supply (Full Range) The IDU Extension Unit contains the MONOE, the Power Supply and the Hitless Switch units. c) Optional plugin unit for IDU Extension unit An optional plugin unit (alternative between them, with the same P/Ns of those envisaged for the IDU Main Unit) for: additional 8xE1 plugin or 8xDS1 plugin or 1xE3 plugin or 1xDS3 plugin must be plugged onto the IDU Extension unit, when the same type of plugin unit is equipped on the IDU Main unit . Note: even if equipped on the IDU Main unit, Data plugin is not envisaged on IDU Extension unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 227 / 332
42.1.2.2 ODU According to the configuration type, one or two electrical ODU are managed in the Outdoor part. Each ODU contains a PQECRC unit. It implements the ODU controller functions. 42.1.2.3 Allowed Equipment Types This paragraph provides information on the allowed equipment types for all the configurations supported by ULS NE. In the following tables, the list of allowed equipment types for each physical position, includes the whole set of possible types, but, according to the NE configuration defined by the managers, only one value will be present for each physical position. N.B. Both IDU and ODU shelves are numbered inside a virtual rack (equipmentPosition = 1). All the IDUs, ODUs and contained positions will be numbered accordingly. Shelves Equipment Types The following Tab. 80. provides the shelves equipment types allowed for each supported NE configuration (see support domain section for the list of supported configurations). The shelves are numbered according to the following sequence rule: IDU Ch#1 ODU Ch#1 IDU Ch#0 ODU Ch#0 Tab. 80. Shelves Equipment Types NE Configuration Market Type (note 1) ETSI 1.2.0.0 ANSI (note 1) ETSI 1.2.0.0 1+1 (note 3) ANSI (note 1) ETSI 1.4.0.0 ANSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI ODUA (note 1) The equipment types allowed for IDU shelf are market type independent. (note 2) All the 1+0 configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[1]
Position 1.1.0.0
Allowed Equipment Type Description IDU Main Shelf ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI
Allowed Equipment Type IDUM ODUE ODUA IDUM ODUE ODUA IDUE ODUE
Equipment Label IDU Ch#1 ODU Ch#1
1+0 1+0 ETH (note 2)
1.1.0.0
IDU Main Shelf ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ANSI
IDU Ch#1 ODU Ch#1
1.3.0.0
IDU Extension Shelf ODU 1+0 4/16 QAM ETSI
IDU Ch#0 ODU Ch#0
(note 3) All the 1+1 configurations.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 228 / 332
[2]
Slots and Subslots Equipment Types The following tables indicate the allowed equipment types for each slot inside each shelf type.
1)
IDU IDUM
Tab. 81. Allowed board/plugin types in IDU Main shelf Position Allowed Equipment Type Description Main Unit 24 V Supply 1.1.1.0 Main Unit 48/60 V Range Supply Main Unit 24/60 V Range Supply 8xE1/DS1 plugin unit 1.1.1.1 1xE3/DS3 plugin unit 2xEthernet plugin unit Allowed Equipment Type M24S M4860S M2460S P8E1DS1 P1E3DS3 P2DATAS IDU/MAIN/<note 1> Ch#1 IDU/MAIN Ch#1 Equipment Label
(note 1) The label is one of the following: E1, when the 8xE1/DS1 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in E1 mode DS1, when the 8xE1/DS1 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in DS1 mode. E3, when the 1xE3/DS3 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in E3 mode DS3, when the 1xE3/DS3 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in DS3 mode. DATA, when the 2xDATA plugin is provisioned.
IDUE Tab. 82. Allowed board/plugin types in IDU Extension shelf Position Allowed Equipment Type Description Ext. Unit 24 Supply 1.3.1.0 Ext. Unit 48/60 V Range Supply Ext. Unit 24/60 V Range Supply 8xE1/DS1 plugin unit 1.3.1.1 1xE3/DS3 plugin unit P1E3DS3 Allowed Equipment Type E24S E4860S E2460S P8E1DS1 IDU/EXT/<note 1> Ch#0 IDU/EXT Ch#0 Equipment Label
(note 1) The label is one of the following: E1, when the 8xE1/DS1 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in E1 mode DS1, when the 8xE1/DS1 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in DS1 mode. E3, when the 1xE3/DS3 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in E3 mode DS3, when the 1xE3/DS3 plugin is provisioned and it configured to work in DS3 mode.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
2)
ODU No slot can be defined inside the Electrical ODU.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 229 / 332
42.1.2.4 Remote Inventory Management The Remote Inventory feature allows to store the information useful to identify the components of the product. From management point of view the Remote Inventory data are provided by the following equipment types: Main Unit (M24S, M4860S, M2460S) Extension Unit (E24S, E4860S, E2460S) Ethernet plugin (P2DATAS) PDH Tributary optional plugsin (P8E1DS1, P1E3DS3) ODU unit (ODUE, ODUA) For all the other equipment types the remoteInventoryStatus columnar object assumes the value unavailable. The RI data of each subcomponents unit (i.e. MONOM in the IDU, MILOU in the ODU) cannot be seen at SNMP management interface but only by means of factory tools. Also the information about the equipment type can be read from the remote inventory data (Unit mnemonic field). All the units must be provided in its own remote inventory data this type of information. It is used to identify the actual equipment type and then, eventually, to provide an equipment mismatch alarm, if the equipment type read from remote inventory data is different from the equipment expected provided by the managers. If it is not possible to read the Remote Inventory information, a Card Fail alarm is declared.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 230 / 332
42.2 Control subsystem hardware architecture

This paragraph describes briefly the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the function partitioning among them and the internal interfaces managed by this subsystem. The control subsystem block diagram is shown in Fig. 104. on page 232. 42.2.1 Function partitioning The control subsystem provides the resources to support the communication interfaces and the processing functions required by the NMS (Network Management System). The functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows: Message Communication Function (MCF); Equipment Management Function (EMF); Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF); Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E); Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U); Basic Functions (BF). 42.2.2 Control elements The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are: Equipment controller (EC); ODU controller (ODUC). [1] Equipment Controller One EC has in charge the MCF, VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol stack) required for the communication between the NE and the management systems (OS and CT). It performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model). No protection of this control element is performed. In case of failure, the main tributaries transport capability is guaranteed. EC is also in charge of the PMMF/E and PMMF/UIDU: it provides the resources to support the control and management functions related to the real physical machine. The EC is physically located on the P Plugin of IDU MAIN board (para.42.3.2 on page 234). [2] ODU Supervisory Unit The ODUC has in charge the PMMF/UODU. This function requires a real time processing of the data coming from the ODU ASIC. The ODUC has the aim to provide an uniform interface towards the EC avoiding a EC dependency from the ODU HW. Inside the IDU there is one single internal communication interface: the IDU SPI interface.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 231 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ODU ASIC P
D_UP CK_UP D_D CK_D D_UP CK_UP SPI master
ODU #1 IDU Main Board

SPI bus Pegaso ASIC ASIC core Cable MUX Frame ins /extr
D_D CK_D
1
P plug in
Flat cable
03
ASIC core Frame ins /extr ODU driver Cable MUX IDU ODU cable slave SPI slave Other SPI2 slave devices SPI master SPI slaves Rem .Inv PSU Rem .Inv Spider (IDU driver) Slot #1 Parallel Alarms ODU ASIC
D_UP CK_UP D_D CK_D
ODU SPI driver
SPI
Vcc
SPI master
P ODU SC
ODU #0
IDU ODU cable
IDU Extension Board
ASIC core Cable MUX
Pegaso ASIC ASIC core

D_UP CK_UP
Fig. 104. Control subsystem block diagram

Frame ins /extr Cable MUX slave SPI slave Frame ins /extr
D_D CK_D
ODU SPI driver
ODU driver
3DB 06687 BA AA
Other SPI2 slave devices
332
SPI
SPI master SPI slaves Rem .Inv
SPI master
Spider (IDU driver) Slot #0 PSU Rem .Inv Parallel Alarms
Vcc
P ODU SC
232 / 332
42.3 IDU functional description

42.3.1 Introduction The Indoor Unit (IDU) performs all customer interface requirements both as voice and data: NxE1/E3 for ETSI market NxDS1/DS3 for ANSI market EOW Service channels OSTMN
and feeds the Outdoor Unit (ODU) via a single coaxial cable carrying: Base Band Transmission Signal (from IDU to ODU) Base Band Receiver Signal (from ODU to IDU) ODU Supply Voltage
The IDU is available in 2 configurations: 1+0 IDU Please refer to para.11.2.1 on pages 3738 for general descriptions and block diagrams. 1+1 IDU Please refer to para.11.2.2.1 on pages 3944 for general descriptions and block diagrams.
The boards used in IDU are: IDU Main unit IDU Extension unit para.42.3.2 on page 234 para.42.3.3 on page 240
The IDU power supply system is described in para.42.3.4 on page 241.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 233 / 332
42.3.2 IDU Main unit As shown in Fig. 105. below, the components of the IDU Main unit are: the MONOM unit (the motherboard), which includes: the interface for 8E1/DS1 tributaries and for all the other channels whose connectors are present on its front plate the Mux/Demux (block diagram in Fig. 106. on page 235), which carries out the following functions: Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the Tributary signals, and the insertion/extraction from the main stream of the following signals: EOW Service Channel Network Management System
Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the signal toward the ODU interface as framed / unframed implementing the following processes: Scrambler/Descrambler Coding/Decoding (ReedSolomon) + Interleaving cable interface functions: cable Interface circuit adds to this signal the ODU supply voltage and ODU connector management information, feeding the N connector available on the front panel of the board.
the microprocessor platform (PQ/ECRC), see para.42.3.2.1 on page 236.
DC/DC converter plugin board (PSU). It is a module including DC/DC converters and filters. The power distribution for 1+1 systems is described in para.42.3.4 on page 241 (in 1+0 systems the IDU extension board is not equipped). the connector for the flash Card, which stores the SW of the terminal, see para.42.3.2.2 on page 238. the connectors for an optional tributary plugin. tributary plugin (optional) PSU
flash card MONOM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 105. Components of the IDU Main unit
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 234 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
64 Kbit /s NMS RF from P plug in
03
Main Board
Parallel I/O
XO
F 1TX
Frame Synch
Pegaso ASIC F1 F 1TX

IDU ODU chann . insert
Trib . interf
MUX
Interleav . Up sampling F CK= F 1, F 1/2 , F 1/4 , F 1/8
SCR
RS COD
SPI Spider ATPC Local SPI EOW ODU

16 NCO @ 2048K 2 NCO @ 64K
uP mess. IDU ODU frame
614Kbit/s IDU ODU service channel Cable interface 614Kbit/s ODU IDU service channel
Remote inventory
Fig. 106. Mux/Demux block diagram

Frame Synch F1
Deinterl . Down sampling 614Kb/s extract. DE MUX DE SCR RX switch Trib . interf
F1
F 1RX
Frame recovery
RS DEC
3DB 06687 BA AA
F CK= F 1 , F 1/2 , F 1/4 , F 1/8
332
F 1RX VCXO
PSU
64 Kbit /s NMS RF to P plug in
235 / 332
Ethernet data plug in
42.3.2.1 Microprocessor platform The P platform, identified as PQ/ECRC (Power Quick / Equipment Controller Radio Controller), is embedded in IDU Main monoboard. Refer to Fig. 107. on page 237. The P platform is equipped with: CPU: Embedded PowerPC core; 32 Mbyte SDRAM; 32 Mbyte Flash Eprom; Ethernet 10/100BaseT electrical interface for OS (or CT); a switch (Tristate in Fig. 107. ) for the 64Kb/s NMS RFside channel (NMS RF in Fig. 107. ). This switch is necessary for the (1+1) system where: RF TX side: NMS is transmitted on both channels ( TX split). The clock is codirectional; RF RX side: the P selects the active channel, with the same strategy used for main tributaries ( RX switch). a CPLD (Gutturnio) for various logical and systemrelated logical functions (including identification data of the module and board itself).
The P platform is designed to be supplied by 3.3V; in (1+1) configuration, the P platform is supplied in parallel by the Main monoboard and by the the Extension monoboard. The P supports the following interfaces: MII towards the onboard Ethernet 10/100BaseT interface; three 64Kbit/s SCC interfaces for the NMS (PPPHDLC connection): one codir. interface (NMSRF in Fig. 107. ) towards the BB ASICs; two co/contradir. interfaces (NMS Front panel in Fig. 107. ) towards the IDU front panel. one SCC interface for a serial RS232 connection to a CT; SPI interface towards the backplane: to directly control IDU HW (Asic FPGA Rem. Inventory); to indirectly control ODU HW (Direct Protocol over SPI BB ASIC ODU Modem ASIC Direct Protocol over SPI ODU mP SPI ODU ODU HW); FPGA download (Ethernet Data and Hitless), only for SW upgrades: the FPGA has its own local memory, whose content is changed via SPI bus only in the case of a SW upgrade; parallel Commands/Alarms (by CPLD Gutturnio); RS232 interface for debug purposes; parallel interface for system identification (by CPLD Gutturnio). HW control is performed with the architecture described in Fig. 107.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 236 / 332
32 Mbyte All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. Flash EPROM 10/100 Ethernet MII Interface OS (or CT)
32 Mbyte SDRAM SCC Commands Alarms CPLD Gutturnio SCC 64Kbit/s 64Kbit/s NMS (Front panel RS422) NMS (Front panel G703)
P
NMS (RF#1) NMS (RF#0) Tri state NMS (RF) 64Kbit/s SCC
SCC
RS 232
CT
SMC
RS 232
Debug
CPLD
Serial channel
Gutturnio (System identification)

l ASIC/FPGA/Rem.Inventory l uP messages towards ODU l FPGA download (SW upgrade only)
SPI
49,152MHz
CLOCK BUFFER
OSC
24,576MHz
Fig. 107. Microprocessor platform supported interfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 237 / 332
42.3.2.2 Flash Card content Whole Equipment configuration data and programs are contained in the Flash Card, as shown in Fig. 108. below: SW COMMIT VERSION (ACTIVE) SW STANDBY VERSION (not active)
SW instances
MIB NE Data Base configuration NE network routing data
Fig. 108. Flash Card content [1] SW instances The SW COMMIT VERSION is that used by the system. The SW STANDBY VERSION instance is created the first time a SW download from ECT to the NE is carried out. A new SWP download is envisaged whenever a new SWP package version or release (new with respect to that presently loaded in the system) is supplied to Customer (*). (*) for the meaning of SWP package version and release refer to para.C.3.2 on page 321. The management of these SW instances is described in the CT Operators Handbook. [2] NE data N.B. as shown in Fig. 108. above, differently from SW instances, NE data are present as single instances in the Flash Card. Base configuration It is defined by Flash Card P/N. It is not changeable, but with Flash Card upgrade (described in the CT Operators Handbook). b) MIB Most (but not all) configuration data set is named MIB (Management Information Base). Such data are defined by Craft Terminal and can be changed only within the limits (Base configuration) implicitly defined by the employed Flash Card type. MIB can be saved as a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well can be restored in the Flash Card retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS), as described in detail in the CT Operators Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 238 / 332
c)
NE network routing data Defined by Craft Terminal, they are:
1. 2. 3.
Local configuration Systems local address NTP server configuration Interface configuration NMS configuration Ethernet configuration IP Static Routing configuration OSPF AREA configuration
4.
IP configuration
All those listed parameter are NOT stored into the MIB file because considered unique to a particular system in a network and are NOT meant to be reproduced on other systems in the same network because will cause conflicts in the supervision network centre. [3] System restart The system restart (reloading of all RAMs present in the system with information stored in the Flash Card) is without traffic interruption and is carried out: after the activation of a new SWP after power off/on after EC/OC reset (manual of after new SWP activation) after plugin insertion [4] FPGA download As a whole, the correct performance of a certain SWP is granted if the system software works together with the FPGAs SW versions specifically required by the SWP itself. When a new SWP is loaded into the NE, the SW versions present in the equipped FPGA may not be consistent with those expected, so FPGA upgrade could be necessary. When a new SWP is loaded from ECT into the ULS NE, also the SW images of FPGAs are loaded into the PQ/ECRC. Each of these SW images is downloaded automatically toward the relevant FPGA only in case the FPGA version currently running is lower than that made available by the new SWP. The FPGA version comparison and the possible FPGA download are without traffic interruption and are launched every time a system restart is carried out.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 239 / 332
42.3.3 IDU Extension unit As shown in Fig. 109. below, the components of the IDU Extension unit are: the MONOE unit (the motherboard), which includes: the interface for 8E1/DS1 tributaries and for all the other channels whose connectors are present on its front plate the Mux/Demux (block diagram in Fig. 106. on page 235), which carries out the following functions: Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the Tributary signals, and the insertion/extraction from the main stream of the following signals (exchanged with the IDU Main unit): EOW Service Channel
Multiplexing/Demultiplexing of the signal toward the ODU interface as framed / unframed implementing the following processes: Scrambler/Descrambler Coding/Decoding (ReedSolomon) + Interleaving cable interface functions: cable Interface circuit adds to this signal the ODU supply voltage and ODU connector management information, feeding the N connector available on the front panel of the board.
the Hitless Switch function, described in detail in para.42.4 on page 242
DC/DC converter plugin board (PSU). It is a module including DC/DC converters and filters. The power distribution for 1+1 systems is described in para.42.3.4 on page 241) the connectors for an optional tributary plugin. PSU tributary plugin (optional)
MONOE Fig. 109. Components of the IDU Extension unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 240 / 332
42.3.4 IDU Power Supply Unit The PSU is a plugin of the Main monoboard and Extension monoboard. The PSU is functionally made up of three main blocks: Input Section (IS): common to both LVS and HVS Low Voltage Section (LVS): for internal IDU power supply High Voltage Section (HVS): for external ODU power supply and two auxiliary blocks: Alarm generation: for external supervision Remote Inventory: for factory identification The following versions are foreseen: a ) floating (4860) V nom. 20% b ) floating 24V nom. 20% c ) floating (2460) V nom. 20% Input is designed as floating, meaning that either plus or minus of battery input could be externally connected to ground input, without affecting any required characteristic or functionality. Following alarms are provided by the PSU Unit and connected to spiders pins: Fail_IS: IS is not working properly or standing input voltage outside the normal service range Fail_LVS: Low Voltage Section (+3,3V and 1,5V) not working properly Fail_HVS: High Voltage Section (55V) not working properly
IDU Extension board PSU

Batt
GND 55V => ODU
Flat cable
Filter
+ Batt Holdup Cap
High Voltage section
+1.5V
Alarms
Remote inventory
Low Voltage section
+3.3V +3.3V
IDU Main board PSU

Batt
GND 55V => ODU
Filter
+ Batt Holdup Cap
High Voltage section
+1.5V
Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Remote inventory
Low Voltage section
+3.3V +3.3V
Fig. 110. Power distribution in 1+1 systems
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 241 / 332
42.4 Protection schemes

42.4.1 Introduction Hitless switching is always present in (1+1) configuration. The Hitless switching functionality is permanently integrated in the Extension Unit (embedded in the Extension monoboard MONOE). Two different protection schemes are supported: Electrical Protection Switch (EPS) both at TX and RX side: the aim is to protect circuitry after Hitless Switching; EPS switching at TX and RX side are in tracking (one single logic drives both TX and RX EPS) RX Hitless Radio Protection Switch (RPSRX). The way to implement the above two versions are described in para.42.4.12 on page 257, here only a functional description is given. Tab. 83. below summarizes the protection type supported for tributaries and services. Tab. 83. Protections for Tributaries/services in 9400AWY (1+1) configuration tributaries / services 18 E1/DS1 916 E1/DS1 (opt) E3/DS3 (opt) Ethernet DATA (opt) TMN V11 TMN G703 TMN RF User Service channel Telephone Audio1 Audio2 Alarms Housekeeping EPS protected (TXRX in tracking) Y Y Y N N Y Y Y N N N N RPSRX (HSW) protected Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Main/Extension external interface location M&E M&E M&E M M M M&E M M M M Connector type SubD37 SubD37 (opt) 2x(1.0/2.3) (opt) 2x RJ45 (opt) SubD15 (a) SubD15 (b) SubD15 ( c) RJ11 SubD15 (a) SubD15 (b) SubD15 Special split cable Y Y Y Y
The following Tab. 84. defines the characteristics of this protection scheme. Tab. 84. Characteristics of the protection scheme Parameter Type Protection group type Switching type Restoration criteria Switching condition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Value 1+1 Single ended Revertive/Non Revertive Equipment failures Lockout spare Forced switch from main to spare Manual switch from main to spare and viceversa
Operator commands
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 242 / 332
42.4.2 Tributaries The architecture is depicted in Fig. 111. below. Note that: E1/DS1 tributaries external interfaces are located both on Main and Extension Units. The E1/DS1 TX Split functionality is performed by a special cable connecting tributaries external interfaces on Main subrack to Extension subrack, dedicated to tributaries (see Fig. 10. on page 40), and by an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPSTX command to match input impedance E3/DS3 external interfaces are located both on Main and Extension Units. The E3/DS3 TX Split functionality is performed by two special cable connecting tributaries external interfaces on Main subrack to Extension subrack, dedicated to tributaries (see Fig. 14. on page 43 and Fig. 15. on page 44), and by an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPSTX command to match input impedance the TX Split functionality is performed by a special cable connecting tributaries external interfaces on Main subrack to Extension subrack, dedicated to tributaries (E1/DS1 refer to Fig. 10. on page 40 and E3/DS3), AND by an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPSTX command to match input impedance Switch EPS is implemented by: a Switch EPS Input section: due to the use of the special split cable, an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPS command to match input impedance a Switch EPS TX section: necessary for the hitless switching, because it allows for the transmission of the same signal over the two RF channels, and to allow replacement of main or extension subracks without loss of traffic. Switches sw1 and sw2 move together; a Switch EPS RX section: when sw6 is closed, sw7 is opened and viceversa
Switch EPS Input section, TX section and RX section move together driven by the same switching command depending on a suitable set of alarms from the two channels; the RPS RX (hitless) receives the two aggregate signal, aligns them, and selects the best one, depending on a suitable set of alarms from the two channels; both sw4 and sw5, when in (1+1) configuration and if the Hitless Switch circuitry is not in failure, ALWAYS select the signal coming from sw3; in a (1+1) HSB system the two Squelch TX commands control (onoff) the emission of RF power.
SwitchEPS Input sect PDH tributaries SwitchEPS TX sect SwitchEPS RX sect PDH tributaries sw6 SPLIT CABLE sw7 PDH Demux PDH tributaries
PDH MUX IDU MAIN TX sw1
ODU
ODU sw4
PDH Demux IDU MAIN RX IDU EXT RX
SPLIT CABLE IDU EXT TX sw2 Z PDH tributaries PDH MUX
Squelch TX Squelch TX
ODU ODU sw3 sw5
Hitless RX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 111. EPS and RPS system overview
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 243 / 332
42.4.3 TMNRF TMNRF is a 64Kbit/s channel (data+clock) connecting microprocessors of two network elements. In 9400AWY (1+1) configuration, TMNRF channel is protected by both by RPSRX (Hitless Switch) and EPS.
< LINE SIDE MAIN
trib
TMN RF: TX
RADIO SIDE >
EPS
SCR + RS COD + INTERL + UP SAMPL
PEGASO
PQ/EC RC platform D#1,CK#1 64Kbit/s TMNRF MUX
IDU ODU INS
EPS
trib
PEGASO
MUX D#0,CK#0
SCR + RS COD + INTERL + UP SAMPL
IDU ODU INS
EXTENSION
Fig. 112. TMNRF: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units at TX side
< RADIO SIDE MAIN
TMNRF: RX
LINE SIDE >
EPS PEGASO
64Kbit/s TMNRF IDU ODU EXTR
DWN SAMPL + DE INTERL + RS DEC D#1,CK#1
DE SCR + DEMUX
PQ/EC RC platform
trib
EXTENSION
HSW
PEGASO
D#0,CK#0
IDU ODU EXTR
DWN SAMPL + DE INTERL + RS DEC
DE SCR + DEMUX
trib
Fig. 113. TMNRF: signals exchanged between Main Extension Units in RX direction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note that NMSRF EPS switching is implemented by a switch in the P platform (refer to para.42.3.2.1 on page 236).
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 244 / 332
42.4.4 TMN line: V11 TMNV11 (in two working modes: DTE, CODIR) is a 64Kbit/s channel from the microprocessor towards the front panel. The only components between the microprocessor and the front panel are: the RS422 TXRX interface a couple of Mux for DTE/CODIR clock management
These components receive a protected power supply. 42.4.5 TMN line: G.703 and inframe Both TMN line G703 (in two working modes: DTE, CODIR) and TMN line inframe is a 64Kbit/s channel from the microprocessor towards the front panel. TMN G703 external interface (SubD 15 connector) is located on Main Unit only. TMN line inframe mode is alternative to TMN line G703 mode. This working mode in fact disables NMS G703 interface and enables the insertion/extraction of the 64 Kbit/s channel in the first E1/T1 slot when in framed configuration. TMN inframe channel is inserted without stuffing, so that it must be synchronous with the tributary going towards the line chosen by EPS logic thus meaning that the microPtowardsline interface must be EPS driven. The notinservice channel (#0 or #1) according to EPS command tries to insert a TMN line inframe in an outgoing E1/DS1 tributary that is not synchronous, but this is not a problem because E1/DS1 is in high impedance (by EPS command) towards the line. In 9400AWY (1+1) configuration, TMNline G.703 and inframe channel are EPS (TXRX) protected (refer to Fig. 114. and Fig. 115. on page 246 for TX and RX directions).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 245 / 332
< RADIO SIDE EPS
TMN G703 LINE DTE CODIR IN FRAME: TX MAIN
LINE SIDE >
D#1,
PQ/EC platform
RC
D,CK
CK#1
RZ
HDB3
PEGASO
RZ /HDB3
Transf
D_RXN_G703 D_RXP_G703
D#1, CK#1
RZ
PEGASO
RZ /HDB3
EPS EXTENSION
Fig. 114. TMNG.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in TX direction Note that in txside (P => Pegaso => front panel) there is a signal (=dte/codir) defining two working modes for clock generation : codir (=TMN line mode G.703 codir) : the clock is an output of the uP and an input for Pegaso controdir (=TMN line modes DTE or inframe). In this case Pegaso provides the suitable output clock to the P.
TMNG703 LINE DTE CODIR IN FRAME: RX
< RADIO SIDE MAIN
D
LINE SIDE >
EPS
RZ
PQ/EC RC platform
DTE/CODIR
PEGASO
CK CK
RZ /HDB3
EPS
In DTE: Pegaso output In CO DIR: Pegaso input
64Kbit/s G703 HDB3
DTE/CODIR D
EPS
RZ
D_TXN_G703 D_TXP_G703
PEGASO
CK CK
RZ /HDB3
EPS
EXTENSION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 115. TMNG.703: signals exchanged between Main and Extension Units in RX direction
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 246 / 332
64Kbit/s G703
42.4.6 User Service channel User service channel working modes are described in 24.4.7 on page 111.
User service channel external interface (SubD15) is located both on Main and Extension subrack. A special user service channel splitcable (linking externally the SubD15 connectors on Main subrack and on Extension subrack, see Fig. 10. on page 40) is used to support EPS protection in (1+1) configuration. In 9400AWY R.2.0, user service channels in all working modes are both EPS and RPSRX (Hitless Switch) protected. Refer to Fig. 116. below as an example of the scheme necessary when the user service channel is in G.703 mode.
< LINE SIDE MAIN
COD_RXP COD_RXN COD_TXP RZ+_IN
64Kbit/s user service channel: TXRX
RADIO SIDE >
G703
RZ_IN RZ+_OUT
PEGASO
COD_TXN
G703
RZ_OUT
split cable
EPS
EXTENSION
COD_RXP COD_RXN COD_TXP RZ+_IN
G703
RZ_IN RZ+_OUT
PEGASO
COD_TXN
G703
RZ_OUT
EPS
Fig. 116. User Service Channel (TXRX direction) in G703 mode
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 247 / 332
42.4.7 EOW party line See Fig. 117. on page 249. Telephone, Audio1 and Audio2 external interfaces (respectively RJ11, SubD15, SubD15) are located on Main subrack only. RF EOW channel is RPSRX (Hitless Switch) protected in (1+1) configuration but not EPS protected meaning that when the Main Unit is switchedoff or in failure, the EOW channel is lost. Note that Audio1 and Audio2 output can be squelched by independent commands driven by the P (by Spider device) after OS/CT selections in case that NMS (which I/O are in the same subD15 Main Restyling front connector) internetworking connections may lead to audio loops. 42.4.8 Alarms Housekeeping Alarms and Housekeeping external interface (SubD15 connector) is present on Main subrack only. TMNRF supervision, transporting alarms and housekeeping to remote sites, is (1+1) EPS and RPSRX protected. Components between the microP and the front panel are not EPS protected.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 248 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABRX dtmf rx pegaso k_EPS
sum
ED
EOW PARTY LINE ARCHITECTURE
AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2
03
LINE SIDE >
LG=EOW busy from Pegaso uP/Spider . . ICCH AB_DTMF from pegaso . dtmf tx sum Z . . rx tx COMBO service kit ABTX from pegaso pegaso LV=EOW free dtmf rx tel c on/off pegaso hook c LIOC= free/busy from Pegaso c current gener k_EPS MUX + RS cod COMBO RF frame rx tx
DESCR + DEMUX
< RADIO SIDE
PEGASO
k_EPS
. .
K_EPS
IDUODU insert
IDUODU extract
ck64rx ck64tx
PARTY LINE
MAIN
(hitless )
Fig. 117. EOWparty line architecture

k_EPS MUX + RS cod Z COMBO RF frame rx tx
DESCR + DEMUX
PEGASO
EXTENSION
k_EPS
IDUODU insert
3DB 06687 BA AA
ck64rx ck64tx rx tx COMBO service kit (hitless )
332
IDUODU extract
PARTY LINE
249 / 332
42.4.9 EPS logic management Refer to Fig. 118. on page 251 for an high level scheme (for sw1 / sw2 switches position refer to Fig. 111. on page 243). Switch EPS is implemented by: a Switch EPS Input section: due to the use of the special split cable, an input high impedance circuitry driven by EPS command to match input impedance a Switch EPS TX section: necessary for the hitless switching, because it allows for the transmission of the same signal over the two RF channels, and to allow replacement of main or extension subracks without loss of traffic. Switches sw1 and sw2 move together; a Switch EPS RX section: when sw6 is closed, sw7 is opened and viceversa
EPS Input section, TX section and RX section are driven by one single EPS command (K_eps) generated by Gaia PLD in the Restyling Main Unit after elaborating alarms from both Main and Extension Units and distribute the EPS command K_EPS. Both all_eps_main and all_eps_ext alarms are based on related: Mux_TX_AL (from Pegaso) / clock alarm detecting a TX failure LOF_Demux, Demux failure generated by the demux section of Pegaso; together they give the general Fail_EPS alarm; Overall Card fail Los_in_trib: active when ALL the 16 tributaries (or E3/DS3 tributary) are in LOS condition (generated by HW circuit external to EPS logic)
Missing conditions (ext_missing_off / main_miss) are managed in the EPS logics (in Main/Extension) with highest priorities. If the Extension Unit is missing or notmissing but switched off (according to ext_missing_off value), the K_eps command choose Main channel as the EPS active one. The Extension logic: produces a single EPS summarizing alarm from Extension: all_eps_ext activates its local K_EPS if the auxiliary 100pins flat cable is missing (signal main_miss).
When on both channels there is an active alarm of the same weight, the logic leaves in service the channel currently in service. Auxiliary signals are used by the logic to decide according to SW configuration status (SW start, config_SW_KO, .. tbc).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 250 / 332
ext_miss_off
Card Fail Main All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel. Fail EPS Main (LOFDemux + Demux Fail )
config SW Main KO
Gaia
SW Start tbc OC_eps (echo)
Config SW Main KO
EC/RC
Config SW Ext KO
all_eps_main Rev_EPS via SPI

config SW Ext KO
OR
all_mux Main all_ck39_ main los_in_trb_main ext_miss_off
Process
K_EPS
Sw1 (in Pegaso )
SPIDER
Rev_EPS
MAIN
EPS function
+Vloc Card Fail Ext Fail EPS Ext (LOFDemux + Demux Fail ) main_miss
+Vpar
EXTENSION
NOT Sw2 (in Pegaso )
OR
All Mux Ext CK3956Ext (echo) LOS INTrb Ext all_eps_ext
K_EPS (loc)
SPIDER
Extension Logic Fig. 118. EPS alarms and commands overview
The operator can modify with the CT the state of the switch through the commands listed in Tab. 85. Tab. 85. EPS switch priority table Description Lockout Force Switch Automatic Switch Manual Switch Priority 1 2 3 4 Action When activated the main channel is used When activated the spare channel is used Normal operating condition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
At CT level there are two Manual Switch : channel 1 and channel 0. Manual Switch command includes Manual Switch ON and manual Switch OFF command (impulsive type commands); the manual operation is applicable if and only if no alarms criteria are present (otherwise it is removed).
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 251 / 332
42.4.10 RF TX Squelch management In (1+1) Hot standby configuration, the squelch command (K_TPS) is managed by EC and sent from IDU to ODU by HW wire command (IDU P Pegaso ASIC IDUODU channel Perseo2 ODU P by which it is managed as interrupt). Refer to Fig. 119. on page 253. In Main Unit a summarizing all_tps_main and all_tps_ext (active low) are generated by the TPS logic (implemented in Gaia PLD) based on: an internal all_tx_main based on incoming ALM_TX coming from ODU detecting ODU TX failure (ODU ch#1 P Perseo2 ch#1 ODUIDU channel by HW command Pegaso ch#1 Gaia PLD), Card Fail, IDUODU cable loss all_tx_ext coming from Extension Unit by 100 pins auxiliary flat cable ext_missing_off (= Extension missing or notmissing but switchedoff) from Extension Unit by 100 pins auxiliary flat cable
The general principle is: if the Extension is missing or switched off, then all_tps_main = 1 and all_tps_ext = 0 if the Extension is not missing and switchedon, Gaia manages the output all_tps_main and all_tps_ext according to normal logic based on all_tx_main and all_tx_ext
If both transmitters have an active alarm, the last active transmitter is kept as active transmitter except in Revertive Mode where TX#1 is chosen. Note that the EC avoids switching to ODU while in its reconfiguration phase (for example: after ODU#1 replacement in Revertive Mode); this condition is checked by an auxiliary ECOC exchange between EC and OC. The Extension logic: generates a single summarizing alarm: all_tx_ext based on ALM_TX_Ext (ODU ch#0 P Perseo2 ch#0 ODUIDU channel by HW command Pegaso ch#0 Extension logic), Card Fail, IDUODU cable loss activates its local K_TPS if the auxiliary flat cable is missing (main_miss)
If the 100pins auxiliary flat cable is missing while both units are switchedon (to be avoided in the maintenance procedure), both transmitters are put in antenna. In (1+1) FD configuration, the ODU RFTX part is squelched only if a failure in the TX part of the ODU is detected. In (1+1) HSB configuration, only one ODU RFTX part is active. The default working mode is Revertive Mode: the Main ODU is always selected in antenna. The Not Revertive Mode can be optionally selected: the first transmitter to be efficient is the one selected in antenna (disregarding the attribute of Main or Spare). The control operations are Lockout, Force, Automatic, Manual squelch with the same priorities described in Tab. 85. on page 251. The guaranteed TX switching time in case of ODU failure is less than 700 ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 252 / 332
MAIN Unit
ext_miss_off
Card Fail Main IDU ODU Main Cable Loss ALM Tx Main
Gaia PLD
all tps ext all tps main

K_TPS
EC/RC
SPI
Logic SPIDER
SPRI
All_tx_ext
SPI
ext_miss_off
PEGASO
ALM Tx Main
ODU Main
TPS function
+V loc
+V par
main _miss
EXTENSION Unit
SPI
Card Fail Ext IDU ODU Ext Cable Loss
not
(echo)
SPIDER
OR
ALL Tx Ext SPRI
K_TPS ( loc)
ALM Tx Ext
SPI
Extension Logic
ALM Tx Ext
PEGASO
ODU Ext
Fig. 119. Hot Stand By configuration: TPS alarms and commands overview
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 253 / 332
42.4.11 RPSRX logic management The devices implementing RPS alignment/logic are powered by the parallel power supply, in order to avoid synch losses when switching on/off the extension subrack. The alarm switching criteria are the following (refer to Tab. 86. on page 255 for priorities): all_rps1_pr1 (all_rps0_pr1) summarizing priority1alarm based on: HBER alarm indicating an high BER condition based on RS_KO thresholded counting; IDUODU cable loss Fail_RX_ODU: an alarm available from the ODU by means of the IDUODU uPs channel LOF_RPS: an alarm coming from Pegaso related to a loss from the RX frame recovery block (from the cable)
LBER based on corr_RS (=ERR_BIT) signal from the RSdecoder part of Pegaso indicating one corrected bit by RS. Based on these performance monitoring primitives, the HSW FPGA in Unit elaborates a Low BER alarm. EW_ODU: an alarm coming from the ODU through HW command from ODU (Perseo2 ODUIDU channel Pegaso RPS logic). It is generated by Perseo from MSE information;
When in (1+1) configuration with Extension Unit present (ext_miss not alarmed) and with Hitless Switch circuitry not in failure (card_fail_rps not active), RX switch positions in Pegaso ch#1 (sw4 in Fig. 111. on page 243 and Fig. 120. on page 255) and Pegaso ch#0 (sw5 in Fig. 111. on page 243 and Fig. 120. on page 255) are in the crossed position to receive signals chosen by Hitless Switch logic; if card_fail_rps alarm is on, the switches position move to receive the direct signals. If the Extension Unit is missing (ext_miss), Pegaso working mode is (1+0) and the switches position is the direct one. If the Main Unit is switchedon and the Extension Unit is switchedoff (ext_miss_off), then the Hitless Switch circuitry is kept supplied in parallel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 254 / 332
MAIN
extmiss Fail ODU Main
EC/RC
config_SW_rpsKO
Gaia PLD
IDUODU Main Cable Loss HBER Main LOF RPS Main configSWrpsKO card_fail_rps
all_rps1_pr1
OR
Working mode (1+0)/(1+1)
SPIDER
(echo)
OR
Rps fail
logic
sw4 position in Pegaso
ext_miss
ew_odu1
PEGASO
+Vp ext miss
corr_RS1
RPS logic
card_fail_rps
EXTENSION
Fail ODU Ext from local Spider
IDUODU Ext Cable Loss
all_rps1_pr1
Working mode Rev/No Rev and OCrps via SPI
HBER Ext
LOF RPS Ext
OR
all_rps0_pr1
RPS LOGIC
Rev /NoRev _RPS
SPIDER
(echo)
Corr _RS0
Working mode (1+0)/(1+1) (echo)
ew_odu0
K_RPS = sw5 position in Pegaso
ew_odu0
PEGASO
Extension Logic
Corr _RS0
Fig. 120. RPS alarms and commands overview Among automatic switch criteria the following priorities apply: Tab. 86. RPSRX Automatic switch criteria priorities Description HW Failure + HBER LBER EW
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Priority 1 2 3
Comment all_rps_pr1 based on corr_RS ew_odu
The alignment condition between two channels is a preliminary condition in case of switching criteria 2 and 3 only.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 255 / 332
If both channels have a failure of the same priority, the protection doesnt happen and the switch hitless will stay in the last position if the switch works in not revertive mode, if the switch works in revertive mode it puts in service channel 1 (Main). The operator can: Force the main channel in service (Lockout command). The abnormal condition is signalled; Force the spare channel in service (Force Switch command); the abnormal condition is signalled; Let the switch normally work according to the switching command produced the internal logic (Automatic Switch command) Perform a manual switch only if the switching criteria are not alarmed and if the alignment condition is ok (abnormal condition is not signalled in this case). An incoming alarm will abort this working mode. At CT level there are two Manual Switch : channel 1 and channel 0. Manual Switch command includes Manual Switch ON and manual Switch OFF commands (impulsive type commands.
The following priority table applies: Tab. 87. RPSRX priority table Description Lockout RPS RX Force Switch RPS RX Automatic Switch RPS RX Manual Switch RPS RX Priority 1 2 3 4 Action / Comment When activated: the main channel is used When activated: the spare channel is used Normal operating condition It is activated by CT, but executed only if alignment is present
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 256 / 332
A channel with priority 1 alarm will be protected by the other channel even if the second has alarms at priority greater than 1 and so on. If both channels have alarms at the same priority the switch doesnt apply if the working mode is not revertive, otherwise (revertive mode) the main channel keeps/becomes in service.
42.4.12 Hitless Switch Hitless switching is always present in (1+1) configuration. The Hitless switching functionality is permanently integrated in the Extension Unit (embedded in the Extension monoboard MONOE). The Hitless Switch main components embedded in Extension monoboard are: HSW FPGA: it implements the Hitless switch logic, alignment and switch functions; the VCXO loop (working at 39.168MHz for the ETSI market and at 57.12MHz for the ANSI one. The HSW FPGA receives from Pegaso and provides to Pegaso a 39.168 / 57.12MHz clock auxiliary devices for the HSW FPGA: n PROM to program locally the FPGA (FPGA download is to be supported by JTAG architecture);
The functional Hitless Switch platform includes: the Hitless Aligner and Switch block in HSW FPGA in which the two input gross bit flows are aligned to be switched when the Hitless Logic sends the switching command K_RPS. the Hitless Logic in HSW FPGA collects the alarm switching criteria and monitors the signal that declares if the two gross bit flows are aligned, the switch is applied by means of the K_RPS command. the external VCXO circuit provides the elastic memories read clock to the FPGA. the external circuit must be driven to smooth the VCXO control voltage switch; the input voltage to the VCXO, while switching, must not receive sudden variations that could generate impulsive output jitter. Performance Monitoring after the Hitless Switch Function is requested Hitless Switch Logic Refer to para.42.4.11 on page 254 for switching alarms criteria. When a switching event in priority 2 or 3 arrives to the Hitless Switch Logic, the switching command K_RPS is propagated if and only if the two gross bit flows are aligned (the ok_compa signal is the alignment state monitored by the Hitless Switch Logic). The alignment condition is not a preliminary condition to switching in case of alarm priority 1. [2] Hitless aligner and switch The Hitless aligner and switch block diagram is implemented in HSW FPGA. The alignment strategy is based on the alignment word detection after the elastic memories (where the two flows are synchronous and where the bitdifference between the two alignment words is onebit multiple) and on a one shot recovering action in the sense that the elastic memory is not forced to move on a bitbybit base (this would increase the switching time) but the revealed synchronisms delay/advance can be directly applied. The two alignment word detectors, one for each of the gross bit flows, send a synchronism signal to the aligner block that acts differently depending on its working mode: the static alignment procedure consists in forcing to zero the static delays of both ways and both elastic memories are forced to work at the half value of their dynamics. The objective of this calibration is to align the two input flows with respect to the static path differences due to different cables lengths. The product request is to recover a maximum cable difference of 50m (considering both TX and RX side).
[1]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 257 / 332
during the dynamic alignment phase, the aligner continues detecting the bit difference between the two synchronisms coming from each alignment word detector and forcing the not active elastic memory to recover the detected difference in one shot action to reduce the alignment time. The ok_compa signal provided by the aligner represents the two flows alignment state necessary to the Hitless logic to apply the switching command K_RPS when necessary. The purpose of the dynamic alignment is to recover the paths differences due to fading distortions from which the elastic memory dimensions are derived ( half symbol time referring to the working symbol frequency). The K_RPS command implies the switch of the output gross bit flow and the switch of the elastic memory on which the command to align the active synchronism applies.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 258 / 332
The aligner evaluates the bit difference between the two synchronisms coming from each alignment word detector and forces this value in the static delays of the anticipated flow. From then on, that is during the dynamic alignment phase, the static delays keep unchanged. It is requested to keep the static delay values memorized in the PQ/ECRC flash card (the uP at the end of each static alignment phase memorizes the value which becomes a default value to be written in the proper FPGA register at each of the following configuration) so that after any extension board replacement or at any restart, the automatic static alignment procedure can be avoided; only after a new CT request, the static alignment procedure reapplies and the new delay value is memorized by the uP till the next users request. For test purposes, it is requested the possibility to set the static delay values about both main and spare channel by SPI. Note that it should be possible to avoid the static alignment procedure if the mux/demux configuration changes inside the same market (2E1, 4E1, 8E1, 16E1/E3 for the ETSI market, 4DS1, 8DS1, 16DS1, DS3 for the ANSI market) : the EC should be able to transform the last memorized static delay (linked to the last mux/demux configuration) in the newer static delay values linked to the newer mux/demux configuration. The operator can know the alignment/not alignment condition by CT (the EC controls this condition by polling) and insert for each channel independently, by manual operation, an arbitrary static delay value in the selectable range.
42.5 ODU functional description

The Outdoor unit is made up of the following sections:
Modem and IF section Local Oscillator Tx IF section Rx IF section RF section Diplexer DC/DC converter
Modem and IF section

D A
Tx IF section
AGC 0 to 30 dB
RF section
from/to IDU
I N T E R F A C E
Rx IF section
FPGA AWYUX
Synthesizer IF Rx2
MicroP Platform
DC/DC Converter
Fig. 121. ODU block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 259 / 332
Diplexer
C A B L E
Synthesizer IF Rx1
RF LO XN
Perseo ASIC
D A
LO
Synthesizer IF Tx
AGC 0 to 30 dB
To antenna
Loopback RF
Modem and IF Section Cable interface The cable interface between IDU and ODU allows to carry over the coaxial cable: the transmit and receive data streams (and interface these streams to the modem on ODU side), the control signals and service channel. the DC power supply from the IDU to the ODU
Modem section The modem section performs the 4 QAM or 16 QAM modulation and demodulation functions, with embedded digital filtering and equalization. It also incorporates the analog to digital and digital to analog conversions. IF section The IF section incorporates the quadrature modulator (respectively the quadrature demodulator) for the upconversion (respectively downconversion) to a transmit IF (respectively from a receive IF). It performs baseband filtering and AGC. IF frequencies are variable in order to cope with all frequency spacing .
Local Oscillator There is one single Local Oscillator both for transmit and receive RF units. It is electronically tuned, by software, to the requested frequency, providing frequency agility over a quarter of the frequency plan.
RF Section (Front End) RF transmitter (Tx) This module upconverts and amplifies the RF signal and sends it to the Diplexer. The output power is regulated with a feedback loop. The module incorporates a mute function in case of transmitter failure. RF Receiver (Rx) The receiver performs low noise amplification of the received RF signal and downconverts it by mixing with the LO in a mixer. It feeds the IF resulting signal to the IF module.
Diplexer The Diplexer separates the transmit and receive signals at the RF antenna port.
DC/DC Converter The DC/DC Converter provides the DC/DC conversion to generate the secondary voltages from the remote supply voltage. It interfaces with all active modules of the transceiver.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 260 / 332
42.6 Loopbacks
Five loopbacks can be performed at different levels.
2 near end and 1 far end loopbacks are embedded in the IDU 2 near end loopbacks are embedded in the ODU.
Some loopbacks are declared local only; this means that, when the NE receives a loopback request, the NE executes the request only if it is arriving from the local ECT. This restriction has been introduced to avoid the risk of a permanent disconnection from the NMS of a remote NE.
42.6.1 IDU loopbacks [1] Near end IDU cable loopback internal local only
Near end IDU
Near end ODU RF
Far end ODU
Far end IDU
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
Fig. 122. Near end IDU cable loopback [2] Far end IDU tributary loopback internal This loop can be activated separately on each tributary (example: in 16 E1 mode the ith trib. can be looped independently from the others). Assuming that an ECT is connected to the station A, the NE A uses the dedicated link connection to activate/deactivate this loop on the remote station B. In this way, from station A, it is possible to activate/deactivate this loop without accessing the NE B through a RECT. It is not forbidden (even if not considered here) to use a RECT from station B to activate this loop.
Near end IDU
Near end ODU RF
Far end ODU
Far end IDU
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
Station A
Station B
Fig. 123. Far end IDU tributary loopback

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 261 / 332
[3]
Near end tributary loopback line It can be activated separately on each tributary (example: in 16 E1 mode the ith trib. can be looped independently from the others). It is not forbidden (even if not considered here) to use a RECT from station B to activate this loop.
Nearend IDU
Nearend ODU
RF
Far end ODU
Far end IDU
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
Station A
Station B
Fig. 124. Near end tributary loopback
42.6.2 ODU loopbacks [1] Near end ODU cable loopback internal local only
Near end IDU
Near end ODU RF
Far end ODU
Far end IDU
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
Fig. 125. Near end ODU cable loopback It is executed by the NE only if it sent by the local ECT. [2] Near end RF loopback internal local only Taking into account the HW implementation of the RF loopback, it is not necessary to switch off the remote transmitter during a local RF loopback.
Nearend IDU
Nearend ODU
RF
Far end ODU
Far end IDU
16E1/E3
LIU
FRAME
MODEM
IF RF
IF RF
MODEM
FRAME
LIU
16E1/E3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 126. Near end RF loopback
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 262 / 332
The RF loopback is executed by the NE only by the local ECT. The main principle is described below:
Tx IF section
RF section
15dB coupling PA
IF Rx1
RF LO XN
LO
Variable attenuator
Voff / Von
LNA 15dB coupling
675MHz
Rx IF section
=IF Tx
Fig. 127. RF loopback scheme At the output of the RF section, a part of the Tx signal is taken and applied to the Rx chain through a variable attenuator and couplers. After Rx down conversion, the frequency of the recovered IF signal is equal to the frequency of IF Tx signal. The IF Rx1 synthesizer (on the LO section) is then converted to the right frequency to recover 675 MHz signal after the second down conversion. The RF loopback is activated when Von is applied to the variable attenuator. Otherwise, Voff setting guarantees a good Tx/Rx isolation. The RF loopback feature is guaranteed from nominal output power down to 10 dB under the nominal output power.
The signal that is sent after the loopbacks is the same signal that had been received (loop and continue).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 263 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
264 / 332
43 IDU DATA INTERFACE PLUGIN

Ethernet user data transport is possible with an optional dedicated plugin which supports 2 Ethernet Accesses (they can be 10BASET or 100BASET). This chapter describes in detail the implementation and working environment of the Ethernet accesses.
43.1 Data plugin block diagram

In Fig. 128. below it is sketched a block diagram of the Data Plugin. On board there are: Medusa FPGA: it implements a multiplexing of the two Ethernet accesses into a serial bit stream, suitable for the communication with the Pegaso ASIC (and viceversa); auxiliary devices for Medusa: n PROM to program Medusa at power up; a suitable external RAM; a connector for the lab. downloading of the PROMs; in order to download the PROMs from the PQECRC: a suitable circuit for the conversion (SPI<=>JTAG); a remote inventory; a double 10/100 Ethernet interface fullduplex working.
Data plugin
RAMTX 512Kx18
Connector
SW upgrade
Programming @ power on D TX towards Pegaso
MUX
n x PROM
CK
Medusa FPGA
RX from Pegaso
SPI => JTAG
Rem.Inv.
Spider
Backplane SPI bus 2 x 10/100 Eth. LEDs
XO
25 MHz
2x 10/100 Ethernet Interface
Fig. 128. Data plugin block diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 265 / 332
MII protocol
43.2 Ethernet overview

The Ethernet data interface plugin is conceived to transport Ethernet frames (10BASET and 100BASET) compliant to the IEEE 802.3 CSMA/CD specification inside 9400AWY proprietary PDH frame. The following Tab. 88. summarizes the main 10BASET and 100BASET parameters: Tab. 88. 10BASET and 100BASET main parameters Parameter Transmission speed Bit time Slot time Waiting time before a re transmission Min. distance between two packets Description 10BASET 10 Mb/s 100 ns 512 bit (51.2 s) 9.6 s 1530 bytes 64 bytes 100BASET 100 Mb/s 10 ns 512 bit (5.12 s) 0.96 s 1530 bytes 64 bytes
Inter packet gap (IPG) Max frame size Min frame size
The IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frame format (from 64 to 1518 bytes plus Preamble and Start Frame Delimiter) is shown in Fig. 129. on page 267, and it is composed by the : Preamble: it is a 7bytes sequence (alternatively 1 and 0) used for clock synchronization with the received frame; Start Frame Delimiter: it is the 10101011 sequence which defines the beginning of the frame; Source Address: it identifies the MAC address of the station from which the frame was initiated; Destination Address Field: it identifies the station(s) for which the frame is intended. It may be an individual or multicast address, depending on the LSB value. Length/Type Field: these 2bytes may indicate the number of MAC client data bytes contained in the Data Field (Length interpretation) or (if the value is equal or greater than 1500) the nature of the higherlevel protocols requesting Ethernet services (Type interpretation). MAC Client Data and Pad Field: they contain a sequence of octets going from 46 to 1500 (46 is the minimum size required for correct CSMA/CD protocol operation). If necessary, the data field is extended by appending extrabytes (that is a pad) to reach the minimum packet size (64 bytes). Frame Check Sequence: a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is used by the transmit and receive algorithm to generate this 4bytesCRC field; it is computed as a function of all the frame except the preamble and SFD fields (and FCS obviously).
Note that the end frame delimiter doesnt exist because this function is done by the Inter Frame Gap (IFG), the minimum distance between two packets transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 266 / 332
Octets 7
Ethernet MAC Frame

Preamble Start of Frame Delimiter Destination Address (DA) Source Address (SA) Lenght/Type MAC client data Pad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 6 6 2 46 1500 4 Bit # 1
Fig. 129. Ethernet MAC frame fields
43.3 Applications
The typical application for the Ethernet user data is the connection of two user LANs by means of two external routers and a PDH radio link (see figures in para.A.3.2 on page 296). The following has to be considered: Ethernet transport over PDH is considered only for the access part of the network => the only implemented connection is pointtopoint; flexibility of Ethernet throughput; mixed mode: data traffic (Ethernet) can be mixed with voice traffic (nxE1, E3, nxDS1, DS3); 10BaseT 100 BaseTX with autonegotiation is the interface type; no MAC address filtering: all what is received from the line is transmitted. Local traffic can be rerouted only by an external switch/router; bandwidth compression: a mechanism of bandwidth compression is implemented, because the bandwidth of a PDH link is in general less than the max bandwidth of the Ethernet interfaces. flow control towards the Ethernet source.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 267 / 332
43.4 Integration with the PDH mux/demux

Two functions play an essential role in the Ethernet data transport: the standard PDH mux/demux (carried out by Pegaso ASIC in IDU Main unit) and the data encapsulation/buffering (carried out by Medusa FPGA in Ethernet plugin). The two functions have been decoupled as much as possible: the standard PDH mux/demux offers a transport capability to the data traffic, but doesnt know how many data interfaces are present (and what type); the data encapsulation/buffering uses the transport capability offered by the mux, but doesnt know what is the current mux type/frame. In Fig. 130. below this mechanism is described, using the 8E1 mux as an example. The 8E1 Framing block is implemented into the Pegaso ASIC, the Ethernet Data Encapsulation block is implemented into the Medusa FPGA of the Data plugin. The connection between the two functions is simply realized with three wires: Data valid: Pegaso tells to Medusa when it is possible to insert Ethernet data into the PDH frame Frame bit CLK: the clock for the transmission of Ethernet bits; Data: Ethernet bits to be inserted into the PDH frame.
In this way it is easily possible to implement any combination of voice (E1, DS1) and data, as depicted in Tab. 89. on page 269.
#1 #2
ooo
8E1MUX Example
E1 E1 E1
Stuffing Stuffing
ooo ooo
#8
Stuffing
Data
8E1 Framing
19.4 Mbit/s
10/100 BaseT 10/100 BaseT
Ethernet Data Encapsulation
(19.4 MHz) Frame bit CLK Data valid
8E1Frame
Bit rate 19.4 Mb/s
u
8E1 4E1 + Data@8Mb/s Data @16Mb/s
Data Valid Data Valid Data Valid
Fig. 130. Ethernet data 8E1 example
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 268 / 332
Tab. 89. Data/voice mix (ETSI) NE CONFIGURATION

VOICE 1 E1
DATA 1 E1 2 E1 3 E1 2 E1 1 E1 4 E1 7 E1 6 E1 5 E1 4 E1 3 E1 2 E1 1 E1 8 E1 15E1 14E1 13E1 12E1 11E1 10E1 9E1 8E1 16E1
2 E1
2 E1 1 E1 2 E1
4 E1
3 E1 4 E1 1 E1 2 E1 3 E1 4 E1
8 E1
5 E1 6 E1 7 E1 8 E1 1E1 2E1 3E1 4E1
16E1
5E1 6E1 7E1 8E1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 269 / 332
43.5 Bandwidth compression

A compression mechanism is necessary, because (with a Fast Ethernet interface) the PDH transport capability is always less than the maximum input bit rate (see Fig. 131. below).
PDH 28 MHz RF channel
100 Mb/s
PDH
7 MHz RF channel
Fig. 131. Bandwidth compression examples for the 100BASET case Note also that with a 10BaseT input interface the PDH transport capability can be sometimes larger and sometimes smaller than the maximum input bit rate (see Fig. 132. below) .
20 Mb/s
2 Ethernet
20 Mb/s
32 Mb/s
2 Ethernet
10 Mb/s
1 Ethernet
Fig. 132. Bandwidth compression examples in the 10BASET case Given a gross bit rate at the output of the Mux, any possible combination of voice and data can be realized.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 270 / 332
16 Mb/s
8 Mb/s
8 Mb/s
1 Fast Ethernet
32 Mb/s
1 Fast Ethernet
100 Mb/s
43.6 Ethernet Data management supported by ULS

This paragraph summarizes the features supported by ULS in terms of Ethernet Physical/Port interface and GFP management. [1] Ethernet Physical Interface Layer The Ethernet interfaces can be configured according to two different modes: manual (or default type) mode (autonegotiation is disabled) or automatic mode (autonegotiation is enabled). In automatic mode a mechanism of autosensing (the autonegotiation) of the parameters involved is activated, these parameters are negotiated with the remote Ethernet interface.
The following items resume the features supported by ULS in terms of Ethernet Physical interface management: the rate (10 or 100 Mb/s) is always configurable independently from the modality (manual or automatic) the directionality is always fullduplex (no carrier control mechanism is implemented to use the halfduplex mode) when the autonegotiation process fails or when the autonegotiation parameters are changed, the autonegotiation restart command has to be performed in order to have new configured parameters effective. Jabber function (10BaseT only) is managed.
[2]
Ethernet Port Layer The following items resume the features supported by ULS in terms of Ethernet Port layer management: in case of incoming Ethernet traffic leading to exhaustion of buffers on input queues, PAUSE frames are transmitted in order to slow down remote peer MAC layer. The Ethernet Flow Control (EFC) is always active, both when the autonegotiation is enabled and when it is disabled. Length of time (number of Quanta) for which EFC asks to inhibit data frame transmission is not managed at SNMP interface (fixed value not defined yet). in case of remote peer MAC layer without EFC feature, the overflow of the input queues is required to lead to discard any further received MAC frames: a correct frame received and discarded because of an input queues overflow, is not counted as a received frame. total transparency towards the 802.1Q Ethernet corrupted frames (TX and RX side independently) can be discarded or forwarded to the addressed destination, according to the related SNMP manager request.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 271 / 332
[3]
GFP Layer The following items resume the features supported (or not supported) by ULS in terms of GFP management: GFP payload extension header is fixed (linear extension header): two independent FE signals are transported onto a single PDH path. GFP frame validity checks is not supported (optional FCS is not used) GFP defect handling and reporting procedures are not supported
Defects supported are: Loss Of Frame (LOF) Client Signal Fail (CSF). The CSF is reported when CSF GFP frames are detected in rx side (these frames are inserted as consequence of a remote link down defect (LOS)).
[4]
Loopback No loopbacks are available for Ethernet tributaries.
[5]
Performance Monitoring Performance Monitoring is not envisaged for Ethernet tributaries.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 272 / 332
44 NETWORK MANAGEMENT AND INTERWORKING For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
The Alcatel 9400AWY Terminal features very advanced supervisory functions, which are optimized for operation and maintenance, offering solutions from very small to very large networks in an evolutionary path: for local management of a single link (local and remote equipment), an F interface to a craft terminal (ECT) is provided, allowing diagnostic and configuration of the network elements through a user friendly manmachine interface (Windows_ environment), for small to medium sized networks, from isolated hops up to networks composed of a maximum 128 equipment, based on RECT for more complex networks composed of numerous links integrated in a transport network a global solution is proposed, operating with one or more Operation Systems on workstations, with network management capabilities in fault locations, performance measurements, configuration and security management.
The network management protocol used is SNMP(Simple Network Management Protocol): ALCATEL proposes a concept of NMS to manage the 9400AWY IndoorOutdoor equipment, using a hierarchical management structure (Management Information Base MIB) based on the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The ALCATEL 9400AWY series SNMP Terminals produce the following main advantages: Open protocol: It provides a standardized open protocol; its management interface allowing management by other OS vendors or integration in Alcatel TMN through a TCPIP data communication network. Rerouting capability : It benefits of the TCPIP rerouting capability even in the standalone management solution. This means that the Supervision Bus can be looped or meshed (and it is recommended to do so when possible) via NMS interfaces, using a dedicated Service Channel of the Transmission Equipment or external leased lines (synchronous RS485/V11 at 64 Kbit/s) or using a time slot of E1 tributary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 273 / 332
44.1 Local monitoring: ECT

The local craft terminal (ECT) allows to access different domains, i.e.: Configuration Diagnosis Equipment External points Line interface Performance Radio Protection Schemes Loopback Software Download
44.1.1 Security management Starting from SWP version 2.0.2, the CT provides a User login procedure. An User is identified by a username and password. The security management allows to associate each User (with his/her username and password) to one of the predefined profiles, in order to allow his/her access to all the Craft Terminal functionalities or to a subset of them. The available predefined profile are: Administrator (both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface) This Operator can do everything on the NE. In particular, this Operator can manage security features (to add/remove users or to change own password and of all users). Constructor (only for OS interface) This Operator can do everything on the NE, also to access to the Manager List bypassing the NM checks, but for this Operator some administration functions are disabled: for example the Constructor cannot add or remove operators, and cannot do backup and restore. Operator (both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface) This Operator has in charge the operation at network level, not at radio site. This Operator cannot manage network configuration, only for NTP Configuration, due to dangerous isolation of NE. This Operator cannot either do quick configuration, or backup/restore, or restart NE. Also the provisioning of equipment is not supported, as well the operations requiring the operator presence on the radio site. craftPerson (only for CT/MibBrowser interface) This Operator has in charge the installation and the maintenance at radio site. This Operator can do everything on NE system, but cannot add or remove users. viewer (both for OS interface and CT/MibBrowser interface) This Operator can only explore the NE.
For further information, please refer to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook (from ED.03).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 274 / 332
44.2 Small/medium sized networks: RECT

For networks up to 128 Network Elements (called cluster), a standalone solution based on RECT functionality is available. It allows to access the remote NE, display the global synthesis view as well as the NE view of each equipment of the cluster. All applications available in the local management chapter are available for each Network Element of the Cluster The view indicates: the possibility of having a map composed of up to 128 NE that this view is available for each NE , each submap and each map that for each selected NE (on the left) there is the indication on the right of how many alarm are active (2 Major, 2 Minor, 1 Warning); the status of the single NE (Major alarm) is propagated to the superior Submap up to map. the possibility of executing the Log in command to further zoom inside the NE
44.3 Large mixed network: TMN

For large/mixed networks composed of 9400AWY SNMP terminals, associated with other types of equipment, 2 types of application are proposed: The first application is the one allowing the Customer, who wants to have a multivendor environment at the Network Element level, to homogenize the NE interface, whoever the equipment provider might be. The second application is the one where the NMS is fully provided by ALCATEL. The 9400AWY SNMP terminals will be managed by the ALCATEL Operation System 1353NM together with other type of NEs (SDH radios, ADM ) even if they are using different protocols as Q3 . The 1353NM provides real time monitoring and controls of all Network Elements entering in the configuration of the managed network.
The following picture illustrates the two applications proposed for the management of the ALCATEL 9400AWY/SNMP equipment.
Multivendor environment
Multivendor environment
OS/OS
SNMP
OS Alcatel 1353NM
SNMP
9400 IndoorOutdoor
9400 IndoorOutdoor
Application 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Application 2
Fig. 133. TMN with SNMP
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 275 / 332
44.4 1353NM operation system

The 1353NM Operation System provides the Network Element Management Functions according to ITUT M3010 functional areas, as the : Configuration management. Alarm and Control management. Performance management. Security management.
and the System Functions, as the : Database management. System Backup and Restore. Process and software management. Startup and stop. Filter on research. Graphical User Interface.
The Alcatel 9400AWY system features a leading concept of network management, using either an SNMP agent over TCP/IP. With SNMP, the NE can be placed in a multivendor environment and managed by both Alcatel 1300 equipment or other NMS providers. Whatever the size of the network, appropriate solutions can be carried out on an evolution path. Standalone solutions may rely solely on the integrated management platform in the 9400AWY. This allows reporting alarms, initiating controls and gathering performance information via a craft terminal. This userfriendly management system requires only a PC in a Windows(TM) environment. Each 9400AWY terminal is able to support remote craft functionality independently or in cooperation with a master NMS. Interoperability with other Alcatel urban radios at the user interface level and at the network management level is guaranteed, as well as with other Alcatel transmission products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 276 / 332
44.5 Use of NMS channels

The NMS channels are three 64 kbit/s channels, used for supervisory purposes. These channels use the IP/PPP protocol. Two NMS channels (NMSV11 and NMSG703) are used to connect other equipment in the same station. Another NMS channel (NMSRF) is used to connect another equipment in the radio remote station.
44.5.1 NMSV11 and NMSG703 channels Through these two channels the NE can exchange NMS management messages towards: other 9400AWY NEs; a router towards the OS; Melodie NEs. In this case only TCP/IP transport is offered to the Melodie NEs.
The NMS_V11 channel is a 64 kbit/s; its working mode can be selected between: DTE: data in and data out must be synchronous, data out being the slave, Asynchronous: Tx and Rx are totally asynchronous (this mode includes DCE behavior).
The NMS_G703 channel is a 64 kbit/s; its working mode can be selected between: DTE: G703 data in and G703 data out have to be synchronous, G703 data out being the slave, asynchronous: G703 data in and G703 data out are totally asynchronous (this mode includes DCE behavior), Inframe: this configuration both disables the NMS_G703 interface and enables the insertion/extraction into/from the first E1 of the 64Kbit/s channel comingfrom/towards the uP. The insertion/extraction is relative to the first slot of the first tributary even if there is the possibility in the IDU ASIC to configure the desired slot. This setting is not applicable with unframed E1.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 277 / 332
64Kb/s RS422 co or 64Kb/s G703 9400AWY nms
dir
9400AWY nms
(only TCP/IP transport) 64Kb/s RS422 co dir Melodie nms nms 9400AWY
(only TCP/IP transport) 64Kb/s G703 OS Eth Eth 9400AWY nms nms 9400AWY nms nms 64Kb/s RS422 co dir Melodie
OS Eth Ethernet transport CT Eth 9400AWY Eth
64Kb/s G703 OS Eth Eth Router (USY) (USY)
64Kb/s G703 9400AWY nms
64Kb/s RS422 co or 64Kb/s G703 OS Eth Eth Router
dir
nms
9400AWY
Fig. 134. Possible NMS connections
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Another possibility, not shown in the above figure, is the NMS channel transported in a timeslot of a 2 Mbit/s tributary signal, while the NMSG703 interface is disabled.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 278 / 332
44.5.2 NMSRF channel The NMSRF channel is a communication channel inserted in a 64 kbit/s channel of the radio aggregate frame. The channel uses the IP/ PPP protocol. Through the NMSRF channel the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS (or Remote Craft Terminal). Refer to the following figure, describing two adjacent RF NE (a and b) directly connected with one NMSRF channel: there is a dedicated link connection between NE a and NE b. Dedicated link connection means that each NE knows the IP address of the adjacent RF NE (i.e.: NE a knows the IP address of NE b and viceversa).
NMS RF
NMS RF
NMS RF
NMS_V11 NE NMS_V11 NE a NE b
_G703 NMS
NE NMS RF NE
Station 1
ECT
Station 2
Fig. 135. Station connected by the NMSRF channel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 279 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
280 / 332
45 ALARMS For this chapter as a whole, with reference to specific items and features, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
This chapter describes the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 alarms managed in the SWP versions this handbook issue refers to. N.B. As far as the alarm roots causing IDU Main Units leds RDI and LDI turning on are concerned, please refer to para.24.4.13 on page 121.
45.1 Alarms Provided by Item HW

Legend: SA = always Service Affecting
SAac = Service Affecting when the alarm is present on the active channel, Not Service Affecting when it is present on the standby channel NSA = always Not Service Affecting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 281 / 332
45.1.1 IDU Alarms Service Affecting Evaluation 1+0 Main Unit 24 V Supply M24S Main Unit 48/60 V 48/ 60 Range Supply Main Unit 24/60 V Range Supply M4860S Cable Loss IDU Card Fail Equipment Mismatch E1 RDI egressing (Rx side) (note 1) E1 RDI ingressing (Tx side) (note 1) High BER Housekeeping Alarm Lan Failure Link Identifier Mismatch Loss of Frame of PDH tributary ingressing (Tx side) (note 1) Loss of Frame of PDH tributary egressing (Rx side) (note 1) Loss of Frame of PDH signal Radio side Loss of Signal of PDH tributary Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 Auxiliary Signal Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 NMS Signal (DTE and Asynchronous mode only) Low BER PDHAIS egressing (Rx side) PDHAIS ingressing (Tx side) PPP IP Fail TCA on Hop Section TCA on Link Section (note 3) UAT on Hop Section UAT on Link Section (note 3)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Equipment Type
Alarm Description
1+1 SAac (note 3) SAac (note 2) SAac (note 2) NSA NSA SAac (note 3) NSA NSA SA SA SA SAac (note 3) SA NSA NSA NSA SA SA NSA SAac (note 3) SA SAac (note 3) SA
SA SA SA NSA NSA SA NSA NSA SA SA SA SA SA NSA NSA NSA SA SA NSA SA SA
M2460S
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 282 / 332
Equipment Expected
Equipment Type
Equipment Expected E24S E4860S
Alarm Description
Service Affecting Evaluation 1+0 1+1 SAac (note 3) SAac (note 2) SAac (note 2) SAac (note 2) NSA NSA SAac (note 3) SA NSA SA SA SAac (note 3) SA NSA NSA NSA SA SA SAac (note 3) SA SAac (note 3) SA NSA
Ext. Unit 24 V Supply Ext. Unit 48/60 V 48/ 60 Range Supply Ext. Unit 24/60 V Range Supply
Cable Loss IDU Card Fail Card Missing Equipment Mismatch E1 RDI egressing (Rx side) (note 1) E1 RDI ingressing (Tx side) (note 1) High BER Link Identifier Mismatch Loss of Alignment Loss of Frame of PDH tributary ingressing (Tx side) (note 1) Loss of Frame of PDH tributary egressing (Rx side) (note 1) Loss of Frame of PDH signal Radio side Loss of Signal of PDH tributary Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 Auxiliary Signal Loss of 64kbit/s G.703 NMS Signal (DTE and Asynchronous mode only) Low BER PDHAIS egressing (Rx side) PDHAIS ingressing (Tx side) TCA on Hop Section TCA on Link Section UAT on Hop Section UAT on Link Section Unconfigured Equipment
E2460S
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 283 / 332
Equipment Type
Equipment Expected P2DATAS Card Fail
Alarm Description
Service Affecting Evaluation 1+0 1+1 SA SA NSA SA SA NSA SAac (note 2) SAac (note 2) SAac (note 2) SA NSA
Ethernet unit
SA SA NSA SA SA NSA SA SA SA SA NSA
Card Missing Client Signal Fail egressing (Rx side) Loss of Signal on Ethernet port (link down) Loss of GFP on Ethernet port egressing (Rx side) Unconfigured Equipment 916xE1/DS1 plugin unit 1xE3/DS3 plugin unit P8E1DS1 Card Fail Card Missing Equipment Mismatch Loss of Signal of PDH tributary Unconfigured Equipment
P1E3DS3
(note 1) Only in case of framed tributaries. (note 2) The active channel must be referred to the EPS protection. (note 3) The active channel must be referred to the RPS protection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 284 / 332
45.1.2 ODU Alarms Service Affecting Evaluation 1+0 ATPC Loop Card Fail Demodulation Function Failure (note 4) Early Warning (note 8) Equipment Mismatch Loss of Signal for the Modulation Function (note 2) Modulation Function Failure (note 7) ODU not responding (note 1) Provisioned Frequency incompatible with actual HW Provisioned Tx Power incompatible with actual HW Receiving Function Failure (note 3) Software Version Mismatch Standby Software Version Mismatch Transmission Function Failure (note 5) Unconfigured Equipment (note 6) Firmware Download in progress NSA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA NSA SA NSA NSA SA NSA NSA 1+1 FD NSA SAac SAac NSA SAac NSA NSA SAac SAac NSA SAac NSA NSA NSA NSA NSA 1+1 HST NSA SAac SAac NSA SAac SAac SAac SAac SAac NSA SAac NSA NSA SAac NSA NSA
Equipment Type
Equipment Expected ODUE ODUA
Alarm Description
ODU ETSI ODU ANSI
N.B.
The active channel must be referred to the RPS, except for the transmission alarms in 1+1 HST configurations (for these alarms the active channel must be referred to TPS).
(note 1) This alarm represents a communication problem with the ODU (i.e. IDUODU cable failure, ODU missing, ODU power problem). (note 2) Loss of Signal for the Modulation Function represents the missing of data at the cable input of the ODU. (note 3) Receiving Function Failure represents the received power alarm. (note 4) Demodulation Function Failure represents the synchronization missing at receive side alarm. (note 5) Transmission Function Failure represents the transmitted power alarm. (note 6) Only for ODU Ch#0 in 1+1 configurations. (note 7) Modulation Function Failure represents the synchronization missing at transmission side alarm. (note 8) Only in the 1+1 configurations with Hitless Switch.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 285 / 332
45.2 Alarm severity

The following tables provide the content of the four predefined ASAPs (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles). As the notification types (probable causes) included in the predefined ASAPs are configuration dependent, the Config. column defines the configurations in which the probable cause are included. If no indication is provided means that the probable cause must be included in all the configurations. The severity defined in the following tables concerns the 1+1 configurations (when needed, the severity for SA and NSA is different). As general rule the severity for 1+0 configurations is obtained using the SA severity also for the NSA one (if they are different). The only exception is the LossOfSignal probable cause, in fact in this case different severity must be used for LOS of the PDH tributaries (SA) and of the auxiliary and NMS signals (NSA). ASAP#1 (No Alarm) is not reported in these tables: the severity of all the notification types (probable causes) is always NAL independently from the service dependency (SA and NSA). Legend: ETH: only in Ethernet configurations (1+0, 1+1) 1+1:only in 1+1 configurations NAL: Non ALarm MAJ: MAJor MIN: MINor WAR: WARning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 286 / 332
45.2.1 Equipment Alarms Primary Alarms ASAP#2 SA HousekeepingAlarm InternalCommunicationProblem LanFailure RemoteNEFailure ReplaceableUnitMissing ReplaceableUnitProblem ReplaceableUnitTypeMismatch StandByVersionMismatch UnconfiguredEquipmentPresent VersionMismatch WAR MAJ MIN NAL MAJ MAJ MAJ WAR WAR MIN NSA WAR MIN MIN NAL MIN MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN No Remote Alarms ASAP#3 SA MIN MAJ WAR NAL MAJ MAJ MAJ WAR WAR MIN NSA MIN MIN WAR NAL MIN MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN All Alarms ASAP#4 SA MAJ MAJ MIN WAR MAJ MAJ MAJ WAR WAR MIN NSA MAJ MIN MIN WAR MIN MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN
Notification Type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 287 / 332
45.2.2 Communication Alarms Primary Alarms No Remote ASAP#2 Alarms ASAP#3 SA Ais AtpcLoopProblem CableLOS DemFail EarlyWarning HighBER IncompatibleFrequency IncompatiblePTX LinkIdentifierMismatch LossOfAlignment LossOfFrame LossOfSignal ModLOS PPPFail RemoteDefectIndication RxFail ThresholdCross TxFail UnavailableTime ModFail 1+1 NAL MIN MAJ MAJ NAL MIN MAJ WAR MAJ MIN MAJ MAJ MAJ MIN NAL MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ NSA NAL MIN MIN MIN NAL WAR MIN WAR MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN WAR NAL MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN SA NAL WAR MAJ MAJ WAR MIN MAJ WAR MAJ MIN MAJ MAJ MAJ MIN NAL MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ NSA NAL WAR MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN WAR MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN WAR NAL MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN All Alarms ASAP#4 SA MAJ MIN MAJ MAJ WAR MIN MAJ WAR MAJ MIN MAJ MAJ MAJ MIN WAR MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ MAJ NSA MIN MIN MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN WAR MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN WAR WAR MIN MIN MIN MIN MIN
Notification Type
Config.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 288 / 332
SECTION 5: APPENDICES
SECTION CONTENT Appendix A Introduction to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 radio system family It explains briefly the characteristics of the 9400AWY equipment family. Appendix B SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling It describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. Moreover the labels affixed to the IDU and ODU equipment are described. Appendix C Documentation guide It contains all information regarding this handbook (purpose, applicability, history) and the Customer Documentation set it belongs to, in particular the list of the handbooks the Operators should have in order to carry out the required operations. Appendix D List of symbols and abbreviations
PAGE 291
301
313
323
For this section as a whole, with reference to specific items, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14 for system features and SWPversion relationship.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 289 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
290 / 332
APPENDIX A : INTRODUCTION TO THE 9400AWY REL.2.0 RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY

This Appendix explains briefly the characteristics of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 equipment family; it includes the following main subparagraphs: para.A.1 General description, below para.A.2 Products of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family, on page 292 para.A.3 9400AWY Rel.2.0 system usage in MW links and networks, on page 292
A.1 : General description

The Alcatel 9400AWY Rel.2.0 is a family of digital PointtoPoint microwave radio systems designed to satisfy the various digital transmission needs of public and private networks, for a large range of applications. Designed with mobile networks in mind, its scalability and flexibility will satisfy the numerous digital transmission needs of cellular mobile networks and microcellular networks backhauling (2G, 2.5G and 3G). Also suitable for public and private networks for multiple applications, such as, private data networks (WAN, LAN), utility networks, and others. The PDH radio represents an attractive solution for the above needs due to radio intrinsic characteristics as: easy and fast deployment effective solution in difficult geographical area very low cost of the complete network security against physical damages reuse of existing frequency plan progressive capital investment according to traffic needs The design of Alcatel 9400AWY radios is driven by a few fundamental objectives as: network flexibility easiness of management interoperability, integration and cooperation with other different types of network elements (radio or fibre based) The Alcatel 9400AWY is a complete homogeneous family of PDH PointtoPoint low and medium capacity microwave link, fully integrated in the last SDH 9600LSY and 9600USY families for world wide applications in all frequency bands starting at 7/8 GHz up to 38GHz The family supports radio transmission of NxE1/DS1 and E3/DS3 signals in various configurations and with a full set of plesiochronous user interfaces while a dedicated plugin allows for the Ethernet user data transport of 10/100BT data flows (available starting from R2.0). The 9400AWY family is fully compliant to the relevant ITUT/ITUR/ETSI/ANSI standards including EMC and safety. A special attention was also put to those standards concerning the network management and its integration into PDH based network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The compatibility between the new urban link generation and the previous one (9400UX) is guaranteed at user interface and frequency arrangement level while no channels extension of already installed 9400UX systems are possible with new generation equipment.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 291 / 332
A.2 : Products of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family

The 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family comprises the products, specialized for frequency bands, listed in Tab. 12. on page 47.
A.3 : 9400AWY Rel.2.0 system usage in MW links and networks

In this paragraph, with the aid of a few figures, are illustrated the main application in MW links and networks for the equipment belonging to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family. A.3.1 : Radio Hop length Typically, the distances achieved are: from 5 to 30 km for the microwave frequencies (13 to 18 GHz) from a few hundred meters up to 10 km for the millimeter wave frequencies (23 to 38 GHz)
Thanks to the flexible split mount structure and considering the possible usage of very high frequency bands from 13 GHz up to 38 GHz, the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family is suitable for urban and short haul applications; nevertheless 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family has been extended also to lower frequency bands in the range from 7 to 8 GHz allowing to apply the flexible structure of 9400AWY Rel.2.0 also for long hops in regional area. In the frequency band from 7 GHz up to 13 GHz flat and selective fading have to be considered and hop computations common to long distance radios have to be applied eventually considering frequency diversity 1+1 with hitless switch improvement. In the bands from 15 GHz up to 38 GHz instead, unavailability aspects due to rainfall are dominant. To give a general idea of the distance coverage that can be achieved, the figures inserted in the following provide a summary of possible hop lengths as function of different ITUR zones, of different availability percentages (99.999%, 99.99% and 99.9%), of different frequencies. If precise dimensioning of the link is requested, it is necessary to perform hop computation through DMHC software.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 292 / 332
Modulation
4 QAM
Capacity 8 E1
Configuration 1+0
8E1/T1 4QAM
Polarization V
Length in Km
F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115 F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115 F38 antenna sys. Gain avail. 81 1 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115
13 34,7 109 99,999% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 28,7 25,7 20,7 14,1 13,5 9,8 5,1 7,4 23 39,9 102 99,999% 25,7 18,4 15,1 12,2 10,6 8,5 8 7,6 7 5,9 4,4 4,2 3,1 2 2,5 38 44,3 93 99,999% 7,8 6,5 5,3 4,7 3,8 3,6 3,5 3,2 2,8 2,1 2 1,5 1 1,3
13 34,7 109 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 29,1 22,8 10,5 16,6 23 39,9 102 99,995% 30 28,1 23,8 19,6 17,3 14,1 13,3 12,6 11,6 10 7,4 7,1 5,4 3,3 4,4 38 44,3 93 99,995% 1 7 ,7 12,6 10,5 8,6 7,6 6,2 5,9 5,6 5,2 4,5 3,4 3,3 2,5 1,7 2,1
13 34,7 109 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 15,9 26,5 23 39,9 102 99,99% 30 30 29 24,4 21,8 17,9 17 16,1 14,9 12,9 9,7 9,4 7,3 4,4 5,9 38 44,3 93 99,99% 22 ,3 16 13,3 10,9 9,7 7,9 7,5 7,1 6,6 5,7 4,4 4,2 3,2 2,2 2,7
15 36,3 106 99,999% 30 30 30 30 29,6 22,2 20,5 19,1 17,2 14,1 9,9 9,5 6,9 3,9 5,3 25 40,8 99 99,999% 22,7 15,8 12,8 10,3 9 7,2 6,8 6,4 5,9 5 3,7 3,6 2,6 1,7 2,1 Rain rate
15 36,3 106 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 27,7 19,6 18,8 14,5 7,4 10,9 25 40,8 99 99,995% 30 25,2 20,9 17 14,9 12 11,3 10,7 9,9 8,4 6,3 6 4,6 2,9 3,7 exceeded at time
15 36,3 106 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 28,4 27,4 22,1 10,7 16,5 25 40,8 99 99,99% 30 30 26,1 21,5 19 15,4 14,6 13,8 12,8 10,9 8,2 7,9 6,1 3,7 4,9
18 38,4 103 99,999% 30 30 28,1 21,7 18,5 14,3 13,3 12,5 11,4 9,5 6,8 6,5 4,8 2,9 3,8 28 41,5 95 99,999% 17,5 12,1 9,9 8 7 5,7 5,3 5 4,7 4 3 2,8 2,1 1,4 1,7
18 38,4 103 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 26 24,2 22,7 20,7 17,3 12,5 12 9,2 5,2 7,2 28 41,5 95 99,995% 27,9 19,7 16,2 13,1 11,5 9,3 8,7 8,3 7,7 6,6 4,9 4,7 3,5 2,3 2,9
18 38,4 103 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 28,1 23,6 17,3 16,7 13,2 7,1 10,2 28 41,5 95 99,99% 30 24,9 20,6 16,7 14,7 11,9 11,2 10,6 9,8 8,4 6,3 6,1 4,7 3 3,8
Rain rate
Rain rat e
0.01% of the time of 1 minute (mm/h)y
with integration
TYPICAL REGIONS Sahara, West Siberia Labrador Canada,Central Siberia, Russia, Chile SW China, Hawaii Argentina,California,North Africa,Moscow,N. Europe UK,Ireland,North China Norway,I celand Central Europe SE Africa Italy,E.Europa,NE USA,Uruguay,Turkey,Korea,India Greece,NW Italy South Japan,North Mexico,SE USA S.Mexico,Caribbean Sea,E.Brasil,Venezuela,Per,Taiwan Central America,Central Brazil,Madagascar,Indonesia Cameron
Rain r a te
Fig. 136. Hop length VS availability due to rain (4QAM 8xE1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 293 / 332
Modulation
F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115 F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115 F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115
16 QAM
13 34,7 102 99,999% 30 30 30 30 30 25,1 23,2 21,5 19,5 16 11,1 10,6 7,7 4,3 6 23 39,9 95 99,999% 9.36 14,8 12,3 10 8,8 7,2 6,8 6,4 5,9 5,1 3,7 3,6 2,7 1,7 2,2 38 44,3 86 99,999% 9 6,5 5,4 4,5 4 3,3 3,1 3 2,8 2,4 1,8 1,8 1,3 1 1,1 13 34,7 102 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 21,7 20,8 16,1 8,2 12,1 23 39,9 95 99,995% 28,7 22,2 18,9 15,7 14 11,5 10,8 10,3 9,5 8,2 6,2 6 4,5 2,9 3,7 38 44,3 86 99,995% 14 10,2 8,6 7,1 6,3 5,2 5 4,7 4,4 3,8 2,9 2,8 2,2 1,5 1,8
Capacity 8 E1
13 34,7 102 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 29,8 24 11,7 18 23 39,9 95 99,99% 30 26,3 22,8 19,3 17,3 14,4 13,6 12,9 12,1 10,4 8 7,7 6 3,7 4,9 38 44,3 86 99,99% 17,3 12,7 10,7 8,9 7,9 6,6 6,2 5,9 5,5 4,8 3,7 3,6 2,8 1,9 2,3 15 36,3 99 99,999% 30 30 30 26,2 22,3 17,2 16 14,9 13,6 11,3 8 7,7 5,6 3,3 4,4 25 40,8 92 99,999% 17,9 12,7 10,5 8,6 7,5 6,1 5,7 5,4 5 4,3 3,2 3,1 2,3 1,5 1,9
Configuration 1+0
8E1/T1 16QAM 15 36,3 99 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 30 28,9 27 24,6 20,5 14,8 14,2 10,9 6 8,4 25 40,8 92 99,995% 26,4 19,7 16,5 13,6 12 9,8 9,2 8,8 8,1 7 5,2 5 3,8 2,5 3,1 exceeded at time 15 36,3 99 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 28 20,4 19,7 15,6 8,3 12 25 40,8 92 99,99% 30 23,9 20,3 16,9 15 12,4 11,7 11,1 10,3 8,9 6,7 6,5 5 3,2 4,1
Polarization V
18 38,4 96 99,999% 30 27 21,6 17 14,7 11,6 10,8 10,2 9,3 7,9 5,7 5,5 4 2,5 3,2 28 41,5 88 99,999% 13,8 9,8 8,1 6,6 5,9 4,8 4,5 4,3 4 3,4 2,5 2,4 1,8 1,2 1,5 18 38,4 96 99,995% 30 30 30 28,8 25 19,8 18,6 17,5 16 13,6 9,9 9,6 7,3 4,3 5,8 28 41,5 88 99,995% 21,1 15,3 12,8 10,5 9,3 7,6 7,2 6,8 6,3 5,4 4,1 4 ,3 3 2 12.00 18 38,4 96 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 25,9 24,3 22,9 21,1 17,9 13,3 12,8 10 5,8 7,9 28 41,5 88 99,99% 25,5 18,9 15,9 13,1 11,6 9,6 9 8,6 8 6,9 5,2 5 3,9 2,5 3,2
Length in Km
Rain rate
Rain rate
with integration
Rain r a te
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 294 / 332
Rain rate
Modulation
4 QAM
Capacity 16 E1
Configuration 1+0
16E1/T1 4QAM 15 36,3 103 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 24,7 23,7 19 9,6 14,4 25 40,8 96 99,99% 30 27,8 23,5 19,4 17,2 14,1 13,3 12,6 11,7 10 7,5 7,3 5,6 3,5 4,6
Polarization V
Length in Km
F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115 F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115 F38 antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115
13 34,7 106 99,999% 30 30 30 30 30 29,9 27,5 25,4 22,8 18,5 12,8 12,2 8,8 4,8 6,7 23 39,9 99 99,999% 23,3 16,8 13,8 11,2 9,8 7,9 7,5 7 6,5 5,5 4,1 3,9 2,9 1,9 2,4 38 44,3 90 99,999% 10,1 7,2 6 5 4,4 3,6 3,4 3,2 3 2,6 2 1,9 1,4 1 1,2
13 34,7 106 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 26,3 25,2 19,6 9,4 14,5 23 39,9 99 99,995% 30 25,5 21,6 17,9 15,8 12,9 12,2 11,5 10,7 9,2 6,9 6,6 5 3,1 4,1 38 44,3 90 99,995% 16,1 11,6 9,6 7,9 7 5,8 5,5 5,2 4,8 4,2 3,2 3,1 2,4 1,6 2
13 34,7 106 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 13,9 22,4 23 39,9 99 99,99% 30 30 26,2 22,1 19,8 16,3 15,5 14,7 13,7 11,8 8,9 8,6 6,7 4,1 5,4 38 44,3 90 99,99% 20,1 14,5 12,1 10 8,9 7,3 6,9 6,6 6,1 5,3 4,1 3,9 3 2 2,5
15 36,3 103 99,999% 30 30 30 30 26,2 19,9 18,4 17,2 15,6 12,9 9,1 8,7 6,3 3,6 4,9 25 40,8 96 99,999% 20,5 14,4 11,8 9,5 8,4 6,7 6,3 6 5,5 4,7 3,5 3,4 2,5 1,6 2 Rain rate
15 36,3 103 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 29,5 24,4 17,4 16,6 12,8 6,8 9,8 25 40,8 96 99,995% 30 22,7 18,9 15,4 13,6 11 10,4 9,8 9,1 7,8 5,8 5,6 4,2 2,7 3,4 exceeded at time
18 38,4 100 99,999% 30 30 25,1 19,6 16,8 13,1 12,2 11,4 10,5 8,8 6,3 6,1 4,4 2,7 3,5 28 41,5 92 99,999% 15,9 11,1 9,1 7,4 6,5 5,3 5 4,7 4,4 3,7 2,8 2,7 2 1,3 1,6
18 38,4 100 99,995% 30 30 30 30 29,5 23,2 21,6 20,3 18,6 15,6 11,3 10,9 8,3 4,8 6,5 28 41,5 92 99,995% 24,8 17,7 14,7 11,9 10,5 8,5 8,1 7,6 7,1 6,1 4,5 4,4 3,3 2,1 2,7
18 38,4 100 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 28,8 27,1 24,9 21 15,5 14,9 11,7 6,5 9,2 28 41,5 92 99,99% 30 22,2 18,4 15,1 13,3 10,9 10,2 9,7 9 7,7 5,8 5,6 4,3 2,8 3,5
Rain rate
Rain rat e
with integration
Rain r a te
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 295 / 332
Modulation 16 QAM
Capacity 16 E1
Configuration 1+0
16E1/T1 16QAM
Polarization V
Length in Km
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 26,3 18,8 18,1 13,9 7,3 10,6 23 39,9 92 99,995% 25,6 19,9 17 14,2 12,7 10,5 9,9 9,4 8,7 7,5 5,7 5,5 4,2 2,7 3,4 38 44,3 83 99,995% 12,6 9,3 7,8 6,5 5,8 4,8 4,6 4,4 4,1 3,6 2,7 2,6 2 1,4 1,7
30 30 25,2 22 17,6 16,5 15,6 14,4 12,2 9 8,7 6,6 4 5,3 28 41,5 85 99,995% 18,6 13,7 11,5 9,5 8,4 6,9 6,6 6,2 5,8 5 3,8 3,7 2,8 1,8 2,3
F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115 F38 antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115
23 39,9 92 99,999% 18,4 13,5 11,2 9,2 8,1 6,6 6,3 5,9 5,5 4,7 3,5 3,4 2,5 1,6 2 38 44,3 83 99,999% 8,2 6 5 4,2 3,7 3,1 2,9 2,8 2,6 2,3 1,7 1,7 1,3 1 1,1
23 39,9 92 99,99% 29,3 23,5 20,4 17,3 15,6 13 12,3 11,7 11 9,5 7,3 7 5,5 3,5 4,5 38 44,3 83 99,99% 15,5 11,5 9,7 8,1 7,3 6 5,7 5,5 5,1 4,5 3,4 3,3 2,6 1,8 2,2
25 40,8 89 99,999% 16,1 11,6 9,6 7,8 6,9 5,6 5,3 5 4,7 4 3 2,9 2,1 1,4 1,8 Rain rate
25 40,8 89 99,995% 23,4 17,6 14,8 12,3 10,9 8,9 8,4 8 7,4 6,4 4,8 4,7 3,5 2,3 2,9 exceeded at time
25 40,8 89 99,99% 27,5 21,2 18,1 15,2 13,5 11,2 10,6 10,1 9,4 8,1 6,2 5,9 4,6 2,9 3,8
28 41,5 85 99,999% 12,4 8,9 7,4 6,1 5,4 4,4 4,2 4 3,7 3,2 2,4 2,3 1,7 1,1 1,4
28 41,5 85 99,99% 22,3 16,7 14,1 11,8 10,5 8,7 8,2 7,8 7,3 6,3 4,8 4,6 3,5 2,3 2,9
Rain rate
with integration
Rain r ate
A.3.2 : Most common applications of 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family In the following drawings the most common applications of 9400AWY Rel.2.0 family within different types of network exploiting radio technology are shown, together with example of possible configurations and station types that can be used in the network nodes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 296 / 332
F antenna sys. Gain avail. 8 12 15 19 22 28 30 32 35 42 60 63 93 145 115
13 34,7 99 99,999% 30 30 30 30 28,9 22 20,4 19 17,3 14,3 10 9,6 7 4 5,4
13 34,7 99 99,995% 30
13 34,7 99 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 26,2 25,2 20,2 10,3 15,4
15 36,3 96 99,999% 30 30 29,6 23 19,7 15,4 14,3 13,4 12,3 10,2 7,3 7 5,1 3,1 4,1
15 36,3 96 99,995% 30 30 30 30 30 26,8 25 23,5 21,5 18,1 13,1 12,6 9,6 5,4 7,5
15 36,3 96 99,99% 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 28,6 24,1 17,8 17,1 13,5 7,4 10,5
18 38,4 93 99,999% 30 23,8 19,2 15,3 13,2 10,5 9,9 9,3 8,5 7,2 5,3 5 3,7 2,3 3
18 38,4 93 99,995% 30
18 38,4 93 99,99% 30 30 30 30 28,1 22,7 21,4 20,2 18,6 15,9 11,9 11,4 8,9 5,3 7,1
Rain rate
Mobile Switching Centre Base Station Controller Base Station
Fig. 140. Cellular GSM applications
Node B Aggregation node RNC
UTRAN capillary network
UTRAN backbone
Aggregation node RNC
Fig. 141. Cellular UMTS applications
Corporate PBX Voice Datas BTS/Cellular

STM1 STM0 16x2 Mbit/s : 2x2 4x2 : : 2x2
A9600 (SDH)
1 F 1ODU ON / OFF EXT ATT IDU ESC NURG I/O 4W NMSESC EXT 2 I/O 4W NMSEXT ODU RST EXT URG ACO 2 DEBUG
A T C L E
A9400 (PDH)
SME POTS ISDN LAN SoHo/Residential + A7390 (LMDS) A9400 (PDH)
POTS Internet High data rate A7385 (WIP)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 142. Alcatel 9400AWY Rel.2.0 integration in Wireless IP and LMDS network
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 297 / 332
Customer Box: either LAN router or Switch

9400AWY PDH Radio (IDU+ODU) 10/100 Ethernet 10/100 Ethernet
Fig. 143. LantoLan Single Hop
Customer Box: either LAN router or Switch 9400AWY PDH Radio (IDU+ODU) OMSN with LANtoLAN board
Ethernet frame mapped in SDH VC12, VC3, VC4
SitetoSite Traffic is mapped on a dedicated SDH VC
SDH
Ring/Network
10/100 Ethernet
10/100 Ethernet
10/100 Ethernet
The OMSN LANtoLAN board is present only at each terminating node
Fig. 144. LantoLan Single Hop with SDH Transport (2 sites)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 298 / 332
Customer Box: either LAN router or Switch 9400AWY PDH Radio (IDU+ODU)
OMSN with LANtoLAN board SitetoSite Traffic is mapped on a dedicated SDH VC
Ethernet frame mapped in SDH VC12, VC3, VC4
SDH
Ring/Network
Ethernet frame demapped from SDH VC12, VC3, VC4
(N1) Eth. I/Fs between customer box and PDH
(N1) Eth. I/Fs between PDH and OMSN
(N1) Eth. I/Fs between customer box and OMSN
The OMSN LANtoLAN board is present only at each terminating node
Fig. 145. LantoLan Single Hop with SDH Transport (N=3 sites)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 299 / 332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
3DB 06687 BA AA
332
300 / 332
APPENDIX B : SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
B.1 : Introduction
This appendix describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point d ) on page 13) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment. The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the related manuals listed in para.C.2.1 on page 318. This chapter is organized as follows: Compliance with International Standards Safety Rules General Rules Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command Dangerous Electrical Voltages Risks of Explosions Moving Mechanical Parts Equipment connection to earth Heatradiating Mechanical Parts Microwave radiations (EMF norms) Specific safety rules in this handbook herebelow on page 302 including: on page 302 on page 303 on page 304 on page 305 on page 305 on page 306 on page 306 on page 307 on page 308 on page 309 including: on page 309 on page 309 on page 309 on page 310 on page 310 on page 311
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) EMC General Norms Installation EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation EMC General Norms Maintenance
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges Suggestions, notes and cautions Labels affixed to the 9400AWY equipment
B.2 : Compliance with International Standards

Refer to chapter 12 on page 47.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 301 / 332
B.3 : Safety Rules

B.3.1 : General Rules Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular: Installation LineUp or Commissioning Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
Observe safety rules When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical assistance is meant : personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others. The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts. The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified is not permitted. The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong exclusively to the service personnel. For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings, inscriptions ect. It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety, i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged. Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER. To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream (rack or station distribution frame). The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 302 / 332
B.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT) IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION OR INSTRUCTION. (YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common ones, specifically: dangerous electrical voltages harmful optical signals risk of explosion moving mechanical parts heatradiating Mechanical Parts microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed The symbols presented in para.B.3.3 through B.3.8 are all the possible symbols that could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the equipment this handbook refers to.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 303 / 332
B.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages B.3.3.1: Electrical safety: Labelling The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING ! Ground protect the equipment before connecting it to the mains Make sure that power has been cut off before disconnecting ground protection.
B.3.3.2: Electrical safety: general rules carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rules: a) Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body. Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 304 / 332
B.3.4 : Risks of Explosions B.3.4.1: Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow (batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the openings must not be covered up.
B.3.5 : Moving Mechanical Parts B.3.5.1: Labelling and safety instructions The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been stopped.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 305 / 332
B.3.6 : Equipment connection to earth Terminals for equipment connection to earth , to be done according to international safety standards, are pointed out by the suitable symbol:
terminal symbol
The position of earth connection terminals is specified in the equipment Installation Handbook.
B.3.7 : Heatradiating Mechanical Parts B.3.7.1: Labelling and safety instructions The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
carefully observe the specific procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule: a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 306 / 332
B.3.8 : Microwave radiations (EMF norms) Equipment emitting RF power (Reminder from site preparation procedure):
The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive. The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer: Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general public. Compliance RF boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked. Workers should be allowed to switchoff the power if they have to operate inside compliance boundaries. Assure good cable connection. Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access ( if possible the cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than 2 meters high). Install the antenna as far as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9400AWY antenna may cause traffic shutdown.
Place the relevant stickers: On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top installation) Warning label Do not stand on the antenna axis
On the mast (front side)

EMF emission warning sign
EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top installation)
On the antenna (rear side) EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 307 / 332
Compliance boundaries for 9400AWY Rel.2.0 transceivers with 1ft (30 cm) antenna: B
Compliance boundaries System 9413 AWY Rel 2.0 9415 AWY Rel 2.0 9418 AWY Rel 2.0 Modulation 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM Worst Configuration 1+0 with integrated antenna (13 GHz 1ft. SP integrated antenna) 1+0 with integrated antenna (15 GHz 1ft. SP integrated antenna) 1+0 with integrated antenna (18 GHz 1ft. SP integrated antenna) A (m) 0,4 0,4 0,4 B (m) 2,63 0,55 0,71
Antenna configurations: a ) 1+0 with 1ft. integrated antenna b ) 1+1 HSB with coupler and 1ft. integrated antenna c ) Configuration with separated 1ft. antenna
B.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook Specific safety rules are specified in the following parts: chapter 35 : para.35.2.2 on page 198 para.35.3.1 on page 199 para.35.5.5.1 on page 208 para.35.5.5.2 on page 211
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 308 / 332
B.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination, grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic units, presence of dummy covers, etc.). Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks: Installation, LineUp or Commissioning Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
B.4.1 : EMC General Norms Installation All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar documents) Shielded cables must be suitably terminated Install filters outside the equipment as required Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before having cleaned and decrease it. Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Screw fasten the units to the subrack. To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
B.4.2 : EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers, ESD connector protections, etc.) To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
B.4.3 : EMC General Norms Maintenance Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.) Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well. Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 309 / 332
B.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated the maintenance and monitoring operations. Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the installation/maintenance phases. Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of: an elasticized band worn around the wrist a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND COILED CORD Fig. 146. Antistatic protection device kit
B.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes in this handbook are marked by the following symbol: Suggestion or note.... Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol: TITLE... (caution to avoid equipment damage) statement....
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 310 / 332
B.7 : Labels affixed to the 9400AWY equipment

This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.B.3.2 (page 303) thru B.5 (page 310). B.7.1 : Labels affixed on the IDU This label is affixed on the back side of: the IDU MAIN unit [position (C) in Fig. 39. on page 103] the IDU EXTENSION unit [position (C) in Fig. 40. on page 105]
A B
this label is just an example

SYMBOL OR WRITING
ALCATEL
MEANING Alcatel Logo Equipment Acronym European Community logo Notified body Not harmonized frequency logo 2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Logo (see para.12.10.3 on page 65) N.B. this symbol is present only on equipment supplied by Alcatel from August 13th, 2005 Electrostatic Device Logo
9400AWY CE 12345 (example) !
Logistical item 3DB 05620 AAXX (example) A P/N ICS 3DB 05620 AAAA 01 (example) B SERIAL N CW052402145 (example) SERIAL N CW052402141 (example) C 24 V 20%, 2.2 A max (example) 4860 V 20%, 1.10.7 A (example) 2460 V 20%, 2.20.7 A (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Technical Code for Customer Technical Code for Customer, bar code 128 Factory Technical Code + ICS Factory Technical Code + ICS, bar code 128 Factory serial number Factory serial number bar code 128 Power Supply Version 24 V Power Supply Version 48/60 V Power Supply Version Full Range Feeding to Continuous Current
Fig. 147. Label affixed on the IDU
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 311 / 332
B.7.2 : Labels affixed on the ODU a) the following label is affixed externally to all types of ODU and ODUs TRANSCEIVER boxes (see Fig. 73. on page 160 and Fig. 74. on page 161):
A B
C
SYMBOL OR WRITING A9400 CE !
ALCATEL
MEANING Equipment Acronym & Alcatel Logo European Community logo Not harmonized frequency logo 2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Logo (see para.12.10.3 on page 65) N.B. this symbol is present only on equipment supplied by Alcatel from August 13th, 2005
55
1.5A
Power supply (Feeding to Continuous Current) Technical Code for Customer Technical Code for Customer, bar code 128 Factory Serial number Factory Serial number bar code 128 Working frequency range Shifter TX Subband ANV P/N and ICS of the software loaded in factory ANV P/N + ICS ANV P/N + ICS bar code 128
Logistical Item 3CC13007AAXX (example) A Serial no LM0348T05EJ (example) B TX Frequency MHz 38319,7538876,25 (example) Shifter 1260 MHz (example) TX Subband 2 2P (example) Initial SW/ICS 3CC13007AAAA 02 (example) PN/ICS 3CC12988AAAA 01 (example) C
Fig. 148. Label affixed on the ODU and ODUs TRANSCEIVER box
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
only for 78 GHz ODUs, an additional label is placed on the branching assembly (for details refer to Fig. 76. and Fig. 77. on pages 163164).
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 312 / 332
APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE

This appendix contains all information regarding: this handbook, herebelow the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to, on page 318 general on Alcatel Customer Documentation, on page 320
C.1 : Handbook guide

This paragraph contains all information regarding this handbook and is structured as follows: Handbook applicability Purpose of the handbook Handbook history herebelow on page 314 on page 314
C.1.1 : Handbook applicability a) Productrelease applicability The current edition of this handbook applies to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 in the RF band configurations listed in Tab. 12. on page 47. NE applicability The current edition of this handbook applies to the following Network Elements (NE): ULS SWP and Version applicability The current edition of this handbook applies to the set of systems equipment, configurations and features associated to the following SWP versions: SWP Technical Description SWP 9400AWY R.2.0 CDROM SWP 9400AWY R.2.0.2 CDROM N.B. SWP Technical Code (REF. in Tab. 22. on page 82) REF.[55] REF.[56] Version V2.0.0 to V2.0.1 V2.0.2 N.B.
b)
c)
In case subsequent SWP versions, if any, would have no impacts on matters described in this handbook, this handbook will apply also to them.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 313 / 332
C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.C.1.1 on page 313. Refer to para.C.2 on page 318 in order to have the list and description of the Customer Documentation set. With reference to equipment configuration stated in para. C.1.1 on page 313, and taking into account that the system consists of an InDoor Unit (IDU) and of an OutDoor Unit (ODU), this handbook provides the following information: system description at different detail levels, with regard to system, hardware and software system technical specifications IDU and ODU item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning) unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of LED, pushbuttons, switches and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options spare parts provisioning routine maintenance procedures corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures
C.1.3 : Handbook history C.1.3.1: List of the editions and modified parts The following Tab. 90. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 314 / 332
Legend: n = new part Tab. 90. Handbook history

m = modified part
blank= part unchanged
HANDBOOK EDITION FRONT MATTER Preliminary information Handbook applicability, purpose and history Handbook structure SafetyEMCEMFESD norms and equipment labelling Quick Guide SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 11 12 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 31 32 33 34 35 41 42 43 44 45 A B C D System description Technical specifications Station layouts IDU part lists IDU provisioning IDU operative information Distributor subracks ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning ODU and related optional tools operative information Commercial Codes Maintenance Policy Set and use of EOW functions Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts First Level Maintenance Second Level Maintenance Radio transmission features System description IDU Data Interface plugin Network management and interworking Alarms Introduction to the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 radio system family SafetyEMCEMFESD norms and equipment labelling Documentation guide List of symbols and abbreviations
01 n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n
02
03
04
05
m m m m m m m m m m m m m
m m m m
m m m m m m m m n m m m m m m m m m m m m m m
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS
SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE
SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
SECTION 5: APPENDICES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 315 / 332

m m m m m m m m m
C.1.3.2: Notes on ED.01 Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for internal validation purposes: Ed.01ADRAFT created on April 4th, 2005 Ed.01BDRAFT created on April 19th, 2005 Ed.01 created on May 2nd, 2005 is the first released and validated version of the handbook, associated to SWP version V2.0.0.
C.1.3.3: Notes on Ed.02 Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for internal validation purposes: Ed.02ADRAFT created on October 19th, 2005 Ed.02 created on October 27th, 2005 is the second released and validated version of the handbook (N.B.), and has been done for the following major changes: whole handbook updated for the additional system features of new SWP version V2.0.1 and new SWP package V2.0.2: new ETSI IDU Main and Extension units, with different 3DB xxxxx AB P/N management of DS3/E3 ANSI interfaces and relevant HW items management of ANSItype ODUs and relevant HW items management of 78 GHz ODUs (new product 9470AWY) and relevant HW items frequency shifter management (para.41.2 on page 218) security management (para.44.1.1 on page 274) according to the additional feature and SWPversion relationship, summedup in Tab. 1. on page 14 N.B. Nevertheless, handbook can be used also in association with SWP former version V2.0.0. dismantling & recycling reference documentation, according to 2002/96/EC WEEE, described in chapter Technical specifications in chapter IDU operative information description of alarm roots for RCI and LCI leds corrected in chapter ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning new 3FT and 4FT integrated antennas added in chapter Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts description of Maintenance, Installation and Station Kit Tools improved new IDU and ODU labelling, according to 2002/96/EC WEEE, described in Appendix SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling scalable name for 9400AWY Rel.2.0 has been removed. This edition is validated in conjunction with SWP versions V2.0.0 to V2.0.1 only
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 316 / 332
C.1.3.4: Notes on Ed.03

Draft editions neither validated nor officially released issue, for internal validation purposes: Ed.03ADRAFT, created on December 19th, 2005 Ed.03BDRAFT created on January 16th, 2006 Ed.03 created on February 2nd, 2006 is the third released and validated version of the handbook, and has been done for the following major changes: throughout the handbook: handbook alignment to the new features of SWP version V2.0.2 (N.B.). Nevertheless, handbook can be used also in association with SWP former versions V2.0.0 to V2.0.1. removed (for frozen or delayed development) all references and descriptions relevant to: ODU 1+1 FD CP configuration 9411AWY (11 GHz) and 9432AWY (32 GHz) products 3dB Symmetric Couplers for ODU 1+1 HSB configurations transmitter tunability information removed (affected chapters Technical specifications and ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning) all references to possible use of SIBDL application by Customer have been cancelled in Section 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS: chapter Technical specifications updated in Section 2 SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS: updating of item denominations and P/Ns in chapters: IDU part lists IDU provisioning ODU and antenna configurations, part lists and provisioning In particular, FULL FLEXIBLE flash card name changed to 16E1/DS1 E3/DS3 4/16QAM new chapter Commercial Codes in chapter IDU operative information, description of OS (or ECT) 10/100BaseT connector corrected in Section 3 MAINTENANCE: chapter First Level Maintenance corrected, improved and updated for V2.0.2 all procedures regarding the Flash Card spare management and replacement procedures have been removed (shifted to Operators Handbook Ed.03) in Section 4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION: chapter IDU Data Interface plugin corrected for Performance Monitoring (not envisaged in ULS 2.0) security management description updated in chapter Network management and interworking in Section 5 APPENDICES: compliance boundaries for 9400AWY Rel.2.0 transceivers description added in Appendix SafetyEMCEMFESD norms and equipment labelling the documentation distribution policy has been modified (see Appendix Documentation Guide). Errors found in previous edition have been corrected. Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications of Ed.03 with respect to ED.02. Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted in other places of the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
This edition is validated in conjunction with SWP versions V2.0.0 to V2.0.2 only. For additional feature and SWPversion relationship, please refer to Tab. 1. on page 14. Following Information, still missing or to be confirmed/changed, will be updated in future edition(s) of this handbook : P/Ns of IDU Main and Extension Units for 24/60 V Power Supply (Full Range) 03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 317 / 332
ED
C.2 : Documentation set description

This paragraph contains all information regarding the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Customer Documentation and is organized as follows: 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Customer Documentation Additional documentation for 1320CT platform herebelow on page 319
C.2.1 : 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Customer Documentation This paragraph lists and briefly describes the documentation set envisaged for 9400AWY Rel.2.0. Please refer to following para.C.3 on page 320 for a general description of Alcatel Customer Documentation system. The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook. The standard Customer Documentation for 9400AWY Rel.2.0 is in the English language and is distributed to Customers only by the following CDROM: Tab. 91. 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation CDROM REF Technical Description DCP 9400AWY 2.0 CD_ROM [A] Technical Code 3DB 06687 AA** NOTES
Contains, in electronic format (ADOBE ACROBAT pdf files), all handbooks listed in Tab. 92. on page 319.
N.B. a) Standard supply One copy of the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 CDROM is automatically delivered to Customer together with the equipment it refers to (one copy for each terminal). As 9400AWY Rel.2.0 CDROM is a standard commercial item, additional copies can be ordered and delivered as any other Alcatel commercial item. Supply to Customers of paper copies of the handbooks is not envisaged. Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files is not envisaged. Productdocumentation consistency Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent documentation). Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the production issue of such units. Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release. Copies of the CDROMs regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required specifying P/N and edition. Copyright notification The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
c)
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 318 / 332
Tab. 92. Handbooks contained in the 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Documentation CDROM N.B.
The P/Ns of handbooks is just for Alcatel internal management only. As specified in point a ) on page 318, they do not represent Commercial item P/Ns. HANDBOOK 9400 AWY Rel. 2.0 Technical Handbook DOCUMENT P/N 3DB 06687 BAAA NOTES this handbook
REF
[B]
Provides information regarding AWY equipment description and composition, station layouts, hardware setting documentation and maintenance. 9400 AWY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 3DB 06687 CAAA
[C]
Provides AWY SWP screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and maintenance. 9400 AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 3DB 06687 DAAA
[D]
Provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to Alcatel WTD LAB. rules. 9400 AWY Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide 3DB 06687 EAAA
[E]
Provides information regarding equipment line up and commissioning, according to Alcatel WTD LAB. rules. Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 EAAA
[F]
Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products. It is common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
C.2.2 : Additional documentation for 1320CT platform Tab. 93. Documentation common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform REF CTK Version (N.B.) q 3.0.1 [G] ITEM DCP 1320 CT 3.x CD_ROM EN P/N 3AL 79552 AAAA
Contains, in electronic format, the 1320 CT Operators Handbook REF.[H] to [J] q 3.0.1 1320CT Rel.3.x Basic Operators Handbook 3AL 79551 AAAA
[H]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements. q 3.0.1 AS Rel.6.5 Operators Handbook 3AL 88876 AAAA
[I]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package. q 3.0.1 ELB Rel.2.x Operators Handbook 3AL 88877 AAAA
[J] N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package. The CT Version is displayed when, on the PC, you select the 1320CT application for its launch.
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 319 / 332
C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating. This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless Transmission Division) only. C.3.1 : CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation a) Definition Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization. Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned N.B. b) Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
Aims of standard Customer Documentation Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In particular: N.B. the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it; maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 320 / 332
C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation See Fig. 150. on page 322.
a)
Products A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole of performances and services that it is meant for. E.g. 9400 AWY is a product.
b)
Product-releases A product evolves through successive productreleases, which are the real products marketed for their delivery at a certain productrelease availability date. A certain productrelease performs more functionalities than the previous one. E.g. Rel.1.0 and Rel.2.0 are two successive productreleases of the same product. A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment performances that the specific productrelease has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c)
Configurations and Network Elements In some cases, a productrelease includes different possible configurations which are distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the management point of view, by different SWPs.
d)
SWP Releases and Versions See Fig. 149. herebelow. A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits). The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit identifies, together with the first, the SWP release. The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release. SWP version SWP Release Product Releases first digit SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes and/or minor additional features (same SWP Release within same ProductRelease) SWP evolution for main additional features (new SWP Release within same ProductRelease) (N.B. see next page) SWP evolution for additional features (new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease) 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 0. 0. 0. 1. 0. 0. Patch Level
7 9 7 2 7 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 149. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 321 / 332
N.B.
Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially distinguished by different names, e.g. :
SWP version 1.0.x 1.1.x 1.2.x
SWPRelease commercial name 1.0 1.0B 1.0C
e)
Customer Documentation A productrelease(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general: System and Hardware documentation: one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) an Installation Handbook a Commissioning Handbook or LineUp Guide Software documentation: a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded in the SWP) PRODUCT
evolution PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0 PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A
CONFIG.B
PRODUCT LEVELS DOCUMENTATION CONFIG.A System & HW Documentation
SWP REL.1.0
evolution
SWP REL.1.1
SWP REL.1.0 SW Documentation
SWP REL.1.1 SW Documentation
Fig. 150. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 322 / 332
APPENDIX D : LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Tab. 94. List of symbols N.B. This table lists some symbols whose interpretation could be doubtful. MEANING AND COMMENTS In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means from .. to ... E.g.: <value1> <value2> means: from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included) A polarization symbol like this: POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal SYMBOLS Once you have decided a polarization (e.g. H or vertical H ) ) V V
SYMBOL
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g.
Tab. 95. List of abbreviations ABBREVIATION
MEANING STARTING WITH NUMBERS
9400AWY 9400FSO 9600FSO 9600LSY 9600USY
Shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links PDH Low/Medium Capacity Free Space Optic System SDH/SONET High Capacity Free Space Optics System STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System Urban Haul Synchronous split mount Radio System A
ABIL ABN AC ACSE ADC A/D AE AF ADM AGC AIS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Enabling Abnormal Alternate Current Association Control Service Element Analog to Digital Converter Access Enable Atomic Function Add and Drop Multiplexer Automatic Gain Control Alarm indication Signal Alternate Mark Inversion Alarm on both station batteries American National Standard Institute
AMI AND ANSI
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 323 / 332
Tab. 95. List of abbreviations ABBREVIATION AP API APS ASAP ASE ASIC AT ATL ATM ATPC ATTD AUX Alternate Polarization Access Point Identifier Automatic Protection Switching
MEANING
Alarm Severity Assignment Profile Application Service Element Application Specific Integrated Circuit Attended Alarm Far Terminal Alarm Asynchronous transfer Mode Automatic Transmit Power Control ATTendeD (alarm storing) AUXiliary B
BATT BB BBE BCA BER BNC BSC BTS
Battery Base Band Background Block Error Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set) Bit Error Rate Bayonet Not Coupling Base Station Controller Base Transceiver Station C
CAND CCDP CCITT CE C/I CK CLA CLEC CMISE CMISS CO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All power supply units are faulty CoChannel Dual Polarized (Frequency reuse) International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee European Conformity Carrier to Interference ratio Clock Common Loss Alarm Competitive Local Exchange Carrier Common Management Information Service Element Card Missing Central Office Coaxial Copolar Customer premises equipment
COAX CP CPE
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 324 / 332

MEANING Incoming parallel contacts Outgoing parallel contacts Central Processor Unit Cyclic Redundancy Check n (Item) Change Status Craft Terminal Connection Termination Point D
CPI CPO CPU CRCn CS CT CTP
DA DAV D/A DC DCE DCN DDF DEFEC DEM DEMUX DF DIV DM DRRS DTE DTI DTMF
Distant Alarm Distinguishing Attribute Value Digital to Analog (converter/conversion) Direct Current Data Circuit Terminating Equipment Data Communication Network Digital Distribution Frame FEC Decoder Demodulator Demodulator Dialog Failure Diversity Degraded Minute Digital Radio Relay System Data Terminal Equipment Department of Trade and Industry Dual Tone Multi Frequency E
EB EBC EBU EC ECC ECS ECT

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Errored Block Errored Block Count European Broadcasting Union Equipment Controller Embedded Communication Channel External Communication Service Equipment Craft Terminal Equipment Engineering Equipment Failure Event Forwarding Discriminator
EE EF EFD
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 325 / 332
Tab. 95. List of abbreviations ABBREVIATION EIA EIRP EMC EMI EOW EPS ES ESD ETR ETS ETSI EW EWH EWL EXCBER Electronic Industries Association
MEANING
Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power ElectroMagnetic Compatibility Electromagnetic interference Engineering Order Wire Equipment Protection Switching Errored Second Electrostatic discharges European Telecommunication Report European Telecommunication Standard European Telecommunication Standard Institute Early Warning Early Warning High Early Warning Low Excessive BER F
F FCC FD FE FEC FIT FPGA FR FSO
Interface F (for Craft Terminal) or Fuse Federal Communications Commission Frequency Diversity Front End Forward Error Correction (Code) Failure Unit Field Programmable Gate Array Failure Rate or Frequency Reuse Free Space Optics G
GA GND GNE GSM
General Alarm or Gate Array Ground Gateway Network Element Gateway Network Element H
H HBER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Horizontal (polarization) High Bit Error Rate Handbook High Density Binary 3 High level Data Link Control
HDBK HDB3 HDLC
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 326 / 332

MEANING HETerofrequency or Frequency Diversity High Early Warning HouseKeeping Hot Standby Hardware Hardware Protection I
HET HEW HK HSB or HST HW HWP
ICS ID IDU IEC IEEE IF IN IND INT I/O IP IRC ISO ITUR (*) ITUT (*)
Item Change Status IDentifier InDoor Unit International Electro technical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering Intermediate Frequency Input Indicative alarm Internal Local Alarms Input/Output Internet Protocol International Radiotechnical Commission International Standards Organization International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication L
LAN LBER LC LDI LED LEW LMDS LO LOF LOM

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Local Area Network Low Bit Error Rate Loss of Configuration Local Defect Indication Light Emission Diode Low Early Warning
Local Oscillator Loss Of Frame Loss Of Multiframe Loss Of Signal Low Speed
LOS LS
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 327 / 332
Tab. 95. List of abbreviations ABBREVIATION M MAJ MCF MDT MEM MIB MIN MOC MOD MTBF MTTR MUX Major (alarm)
MEANING
Message Communication Function Mean Dawn Time Memorization Management Information Base Minor (alarm) Managed Object Class Modulator Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair Multiplexer N
NBF NDS NA NE NEBC NF NFD NG NMS NRZ NSA NTP NURG
Narrow Band Filter Nearend Defect Second Not Applicable Network Element Nearend Errored Block Count Noise Figure Net Filter Discrimination Not Urgent Network Management System Non Return to Zero Non Service Aff. Network Time Protocol Not urgent alarm O
OCT ODF ODU ODUC OFS OH

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Office Craft Terminal Optical Distribution Frame OutDoor Unit ODU Controller Out of Frame Second OverHead Operation and Maintenance Russian Regulatory Body Out Of Frame
O&M OIRT OOF
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 328 / 332

MEANING Out Of Service Logic sum/Loss of only one station battery ORing of station power supply alarm Operation System Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First Output Overflow Order Wire P
OOS OR ORALIM OS OSI OSPF OUT OVF OW
PABX PBX PC PDH PFAIL PI PLL PM PPI ppm PPP PRx PRBS P/S PSA PSA C PSA D PSK PSR PSU PTx
Private Automatic Branch Exchange Private Branch Exchange Personal Computer Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Power supply failure Physical Interface Phase Locked Loop Performance Monitoring Plesiochronous Physical interface parts per million Point to Point Protocol Received power Pseudo Random Binary Signal Parallel/Serial converter Protection Switch Actual Protection Switch Count Protection Switch Actual Duration Portable Service Kit Protection Switch Request Power Supply Unit Transmitted power Q
QAM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Quality Of Service R
QOS
RAI
Remote Alarm Indication
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 329 / 332
Tab. 95. List of abbreviations ABBREVIATION RAM RAPS RC RCK RCIM RDI RECC RECT REI REF REL RF RI RL RLTS RMS RNURG RPI RPS RSPI RT RTF RTPC RURG Rx Random Access Memory
MEANING
Radio Automatic Protection Switch Radio Controller Received clock Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch Remote Defect Indication Recommendation Remote Equipment Craft Terminal Remote Error Indication Reference Release Radio Frequency Remote Inventory Received Level Received Level Threshold Second Root Mean Square Not urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED Radio Physical Interface Radio Protection Switching Radio Synchronous Physical Interface Transceiver Remote Terminal Failure Remote Transmit Power Control Urgent Alarm command. Lights up the relative rack red LED Receiver/Received S
SA SC SD SES SF SNMP SP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Service Affecting or Service Alarm Service Channel or System Controller Space Diversity Severely Errored Second Signal Fail Simple Network Management Protocol Splitter Squelch Serial to Parallel Server Signal Fail
SQ S/P SSF
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 330 / 332

MEANING Standby Supervisory Unit Switch or Software Software Package T
STBY SU SW SWP
TA TCP TD TDM TEM TIM TL TLTS TM TMN TPH TP TR TRIB TRU Tx
Remote Alarm Transmission Control Protocol Layout drawing Time Division Multiplexer Transversal Electric Mode Trace Identifier Mismatch Transmitted Level Transmitted Level Threshold Second Transmission and Multiplexing Telecommunication Management Network Telephone Termination Point TRansceiver Tributary Top Rack Unit Transmitter/Transmitted U
U UAS UAT UDR UG UMTS URG URU USY UT UTRAN

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Unavailability UnAvailable Second UnAvailable Time Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type Urgent Alarm Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Urgent Underlying Resource Unavailable Urban Haul Synchronous split mount Radio System Unavailability Time Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network V
V VCO
Vertical (polarization) Voltage Controller Oscillator
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 331 / 332
Tab. 95. List of abbreviations ABBREVIATION VF VSWR Voice Frequency Voltage Standing Wave Ratio W WAN WBF WIP WLT WS Wide Access Network Wide Band Filter Wireless IP Wireless Line Terminal Work Station X XPD XPIC XPI XPIF XPOL NOTES: (*) Cross Polar Discrimination
MEANING
Cross Polar Interference Canceller Cross Polar Interference Cross Polar Improvement Factor Cross Polar/Polarization
Owing to change of name, all documents issued by the two ITU committees (CCIR ND CCITT) in 1992 (and in some cases even before then) are classified as ITUR and ITUT, respectively.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 332 / 332
Technical Handbook
Alcatel 9400AWY
Rel.2.0
7813151823252838 GHz shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links
3DB 06687 BAAA Ed.03
Documentation set for 9400AWY Rel.2.0 The standard Customer Documentation for 9400AWY Rel.2.0 is in the English language and is distributed to Customers only by the following CDROM: CDROM TITLE DCP 9400AWY 2.0 CD_ROM Technical Code 3DB 06687 AA** Commercial Code 3EJ 14535 AAAA
It contains, in electronic format (ADOBE ACROBAT pdf files), the following handbooks: Document Title 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook 9400AWY CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook 9400AWY Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide Interference investigation procedure Document Technical Code 3DB 06687 BAAA 3DB 06687 CAAA 3DB 06687 DAAA 3DB 06687 EAAA 3DB 04165 EAAA Notes this handbook
For further information, please refer to Appendix Documentation guide in section APPENDICES
If printed on paper by Users, it is suggested to divide this handbook by numbered separators, for an easier access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES PRELIMINARY INFORMATION HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY HANDBOOK STRUCTURE SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING QUICK GUIDE SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION SECTION 5: APPENDICES SECTION 6: ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
SEPARATOR
1 2 3 4 5 6
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N:

ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (source&pdf)
No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 334 + 4 = 338 DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 154.153 kbytes
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE: HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY: SERVONO 5 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 5 5 SEPARATORS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 5 ARE NECESSARY STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING No pagine (facciate) No pages TARGHETTE - LABELS FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT PARTE INIZIALE - FRONT MATTER INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT SEPARATOR 1 SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INSERIRE SEPARATORE 2 - INSERT SEPARATOR 2 SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS INSERIRE SEPARATORE 3 - INSERT SEPARATOR 3 SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE INSERIRE SEPARATORE 4 - INSERT SEPARATOR 4 SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION INSERIRE SEPARATORE 5 - INSERT SEPARATOR 5 SECTION 5: APPENDICES TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 334 167 289/332 332/332 215/332 288/332 173/332 214/332 67/332 172/332 19/332 66/332 2 1/332 18/332 numerate numbered da from a to
fase step
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
RELEASED 3DB 06687 BAAA TQZZA 4 Y 1/ 4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
Site VIMERCATE
WTD
Originators E.CORRADINI
9400AWY REL.2.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain Division Rubric Type Distribution Codes
: : : :
9400AWY Rel.2.0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK 9400AWY REL.2.0 TECHICAL HANDBOOK Internal : External :
Approvals Name App. P.CREMONESI V.FOSSATI R.PELLIZZONI
Name App.
PUBLISHING NOTES Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format. Source files and printable files of this handbook are archived in PDM: Source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 4.1.3 Printable file: PDF file must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 5.0 at least. (N.B. : it has been created with ACROBAT DISTILLER 7.0)
3DB 06687 BAAA Ed.03 9400AWY Rel.2.0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7813151823252838 GHz shorthaul low/medium capacity digital microwave radio links TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
03
9400AWY Rel.2.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.0
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9400AWY Rel.2.0

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
ED
03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
03
RELEASED
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
3DB 06687 BAAA TQZZA
4/ 4

AWY 20 Technical ED03

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AWY 20 Technical ED03

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

9400AWY REL.2.

SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . .

060202 051027 050503 DATE

E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE ORIGINATOR

9400AWY Rel.2.0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 1 / 332

SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 2 / 332

SECTION 3: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 3 / 332

SECTION 4: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 4 / 332

182 182 182 182 182 183 183

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 5 / 332

SECTION 5: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 6 / 332

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 7 / 332

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 8 / 332

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 9 / 332

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 10 / 332

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 11 / 332

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 13 / 332

HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 14 / 332

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 15 / 332

SAFETYEMCEMFESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

Equipment connection to earth

Moving mechanical parts

Heatradiating mechanical parts

Equipment emitting RF power (EMF norms)

Other labels: TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges

2002/96/EC WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment) Logo

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) Other Labels affixed to the Equipment

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 16 / 332

read para.11.1 on pages 21 thru 36

get item P/Ns

read Appendix B on page 301

read para.24.1 on page 102

read chapter 27 on page 159

read para.35.4 on page 200

read chapter 32 on page 177

03 3DB 06687 BA AA 332 17 / 332

.. continues Tab. 2. If you need immediate operative information on how to:

install or upgrade Craft Terminals and/or equipments software

read para.24.6 on page 125

read para.33.3 on page 182

read chapter 34 on page 185